Common Features

User’s Guide
Famic Technologies Inc. All rights reserved.©

Automation Studio™ Common Features User’s Guide

Document Reference: DASBAENFTP62U_032

REPRODUCTION

Reproduction or re-transmission of this manual or software, in whole or in part, by any

means is strictly prohibited without the express written consent of Famic
Technologies Inc.

Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Automation Studio™ is a registered trademark of Famic Technologies®

 Table of Contents

1 Introduction ................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Educational Edition Limitations ............................................................................ 1-2
1.2 General Information............................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 Document Content ................................................................................................. 1-3
1.4 Conventions Used in this Document...................................................................... 1-4
1.4.1 Typographical Conventions ..................................................................... 1-4
1.4.2 “Choose” Versus “Select” ....................................................................... 1-4
1.4.3 Combinations and Sequences of Keys ..................................................... 1-5
1.4.4 Basic Notions and Terminology Conventions ......................................... 1-5
2 User Interface Description ............................................................................................ 2-1
2.1 Main Application Window or Diagram Editor ...................................................... 2-2
2.1.1 Contextual Menus .................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2 Title Bar ................................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.3 Automation Studio™ Menu..................................................................... 2-3
2.1.4 Ribbon ................................................................................................... 2-16
2.1.5 Quick Access Toolbar............................................................................ 2-58
2.1.6 Contextual Menus .................................................................................. 2-61
2.1.7 Status Bar............................................................................................... 2-62
2.2 Floating Windows ................................................................................................ 2-63
2.2.1 Floating Window Manipulation ............................................................. 2-63
2.2.2 Properties Window ................................................................................ 2-64
2.2.3 Library Explorer .................................................................................... 2-67
2.2.4 Project Explorer ..................................................................................... 2-89
2.2.5 Catalogue Manager .............................................................................. 2-103
2.2.6 Variable Manager ................................................................................ 2-103
2.2.7 Accessory Manager ............................................................................. 2-116
2.2.8 Layers Manager ................................................................................... 2-121
2.2.9 Translation Manager ............................................................................ 2-127
2.2.10 Communication Manager .................................................................... 2-139
2.2.11 Display of Pictures ............................................................................... 2-144
2.2.12 Message Explorer ................................................................................ 2-145
2.2.13 Steady State Settings ........................................................................... 2-150
2.2.14 Failure Builder ..................................................................................... 2-150
2.2.15 Standards Transfer ............................................................................... 2-154
3 Common Commands of the Dialogues ......................................................................... 3-1

Famic Technologies Inc. i

Automation Studio™ – User’s Guide
4 Creation and Management of a Project .......................................................................4-1
4.1 Project Management ..............................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 Creating a New Project ............................................................................4-1
4.1.2 Opening ....................................................................................................4-1
4.1.3 Save a Project...........................................................................................4-3
4.1.4 Print and Print Preview ............................................................................4-5
4.1.5 Print Preview Page ...................................................................................4-7
4.1.6 Send To Project ........................................................................................4-8
4.1.7 Closing a Project ......................................................................................4-8
4.1.8 Exit the Application .................................................................................4-9
4.2 Project Properties ...................................................................................................4-9
4.2.1 “Project” Branch ....................................................................................4-11
4.2.2 “General Standards” Branch ..................................................................4-28
4.2.3 “Fluid System” Branch ..........................................................................4-49
4.2.4 “Electrical System” Branch ...................................................................4-49
4.2.5 “Automation” Branch ............................................................................4-51
4.2.6 “Report” Branch.....................................................................................4-55
5 Document ........................................................................................................................5-1
5.1 Document Management .........................................................................................5-1
5.1.1 Creation ....................................................................................................5-2
5.1.2 Import ......................................................................................................5-4
5.1.3 Save a Document Template .....................................................................5-4
5.1.4 Export ......................................................................................................5-5
5.2 Document Properties ..............................................................................................5-9
5.2.1 “Document Properties” Branch ..............................................................5-10
5.2.2 “History” Branch ...................................................................................5-14
6 Elements within a Diagram ...........................................................................................6-1
6.1 Elements Management ...........................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 Inserting/Creating ....................................................................................6-1
6.1.2 Component Search .................................................................................6-14
6.1.3 Find and Replace Text ...........................................................................6-15
6.1.4 Element Selection ..................................................................................6-17
6.1.5 Relocating Elements ..............................................................................6-18
6.1.6 Duplicating Elements .............................................................................6-18
6.1.7 Deleting Components.............................................................................6-19
6.1.8 Modifying Components .........................................................................6-19
6.1.9 Modifying a Group or an Assembly.......................................................6-21
6.1.10 Transferring Elements between Diagrams .............................................6-24
6.1.11 Using Jump-to-Label Instead of Links ...................................................6-25

ii
 Table of Contents
6.2 Properties of Library Components ....................................................................... 6-26
6.2.1 “Data” Branch........................................................................................ 6-27
6.2.2 “Accessories” Branch ............................................................................ 6-37
6.2.3 Graphical Data ....................................................................................... 6-37
6.2.4 “Variable Assignment” Branch ............................................................. 6-40
6.3 Sizing Sheet Manager .......................................................................................... 6-46
6.3.1 Working with sizing sheets .................................................................... 6-49
6.3.2 Adding a new sizing sheet ..................................................................... 6-55
6.3.3 Association of Sizing Sheet to component ............................................ 6-70
6.3.4 Additional Information Chart ................................................................ 6-72
6.3.5 Additional Information Table ................................................................ 6-77
6.4 Attributes of Graphic Objects .............................................................................. 6-80
6.4.1 “Data” Branch........................................................................................ 6-81
6.4.2 “Transparency” Branch ......................................................................... 6-81
6.4.3 “Hyperlink” Branch ............................................................................... 6-82
6.5 Accessories Management .................................................................................... 6-90
6.5.1 Creating Accessories ............................................................................. 6-90
6.5.2 Accessory Association ........................................................................... 6-93
6.5.3 Deleting Accessories ............................................................................. 6-95
7 Reports ........................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1 Managing Reports .................................................................................................. 7-1
7.1.1 Creating ................................................................................................... 7-1
7.1.2 Actions in a Spreadsheet Report ............................................................ 7-21
7.1.3 Actions to the Report Print View ........................................................... 7-28
7.1.4 Export .................................................................................................... 7-28
7.1.5 Update.................................................................................................... 7-29
7.1.6 Print Preview and Print .......................................................................... 7-30
7.1.7 Saving a Report ..................................................................................... 7-30
7.2 Report Properties ................................................................................................. 7-30
7.2.1 “Document Properties” Branch ............................................................. 7-30
“Revisions” Branch ............................................................................................. 7-34
8 Simulation and Analysis ................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1 Description of the Simulation Mode ...................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 Launching the Simulation ........................................................................ 8-2
8.2 Simulation Paces .................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.1 10 ms Simulation ..................................................................................... 8-4
8.2.2 0.5, 1 and 2 ms Simulation ...................................................................... 8-5
8.2.3 0.1 ms Simulation .................................................................................... 8-5

© Famic Technologies Inc. iii

Automation Studio™ – User’s Guide
8.3 Detecting Simulation Errors...................................................................................8-5
8.4 Advanced Analysis Tools ......................................................................................8-6
8.4.1 Snapshot of a Circuit State .......................................................................8-6
8.4.2 Dynamic Measuring Instruments ...........................................................8-15
8.5 Video Recording ..................................................................................................8-24
8.5.1 Video Recording Options.......................................................................8-25
9 Plotters ............................................................................................................................9-1
9.1 Presentation of the Plotters ....................................................................................9-1
9.1.1 Access to the Plotters ...............................................................................9-1
9.1.2 Interface Overview...................................................................................9-2
9.1.3 Description of Each Plotter ......................................................................9-3
9.2 y(t) and y(x) Plotters ..............................................................................................9-5
9.2.1 Plotters Configuration ..............................................................................9-7
9.2.2 Plotter Document Properties ..................................................................9-14
9.2.3 Plotters Toolbar......................................................................................9-15
9.2.4 Plotters Contextual Menu.......................................................................9-22
9.2.5 Plotters Appearance Configuration ........................................................9-24
9.2.6 Data Plot in Simulation ..........................................................................9-26
9.3 z(x,y) Plotter ........................................................................................................9-31
9.3.1 Plotter’s Configuration...........................................................................9-32
9.3.2 z(x,y) Plotter Toolbar .............................................................................9-37
9.3.3 Contextual Menu of z(x,y) Plotter .........................................................9-41
9.3.4 z(x,y) Plotter Appearence Configuration ...............................................9-42
9.3.5 Data Plot in Simulation ..........................................................................9-43
10 Custom Component .....................................................................................................10-1
10.1 Application Example ...........................................................................................10-1
10.2 Custom Component Elements ..............................................................................10-1
10.2.1 Symbol ...................................................................................................10-2
10.2.2 Behaviour ...............................................................................................10-7
10.2.3 Logic ....................................................................................................10-14
10.3 Custom Component Generating Wizard ............................................................10-19
10.3.1 “Symbol Selection” Dialogue ..............................................................10-20
10.3.2 “Behaviour Selection” Dialogue ..........................................................10-21
10.3.3 “Logic Selection” Dialogue .................................................................10-22
10.3.4 “Variables Configuration” Dialogue ....................................................10-23
10.3.5 “Simulation Setting Configuration” Dialogue .....................................10-26
10.3.6 “Options Configuration” Dialogue ......................................................10-28
10.3.7 Confirmation Dialogue for Custom Component Creation ...................10-30

iv
 Table of Contents
10.4 Custom Component Properties Dialogue ........................................................... 10-31
10.4.1 “Data” Branch...................................................................................... 10-31
10.4.2 “Variable Assignment” Branch ........................................................... 10-33
10.4.3 “Accessories” Branch .......................................................................... 10-34
10.4.4 “Troubleshooting” Branch ................................................................... 10-34
10.5 Custom Component Simulation ......................................................................... 10-34
10.6 Additional application example: Hydraulic pump by block diagram ................ 10-38
11 I/O Interface Card ....................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1 Using the I/O Interface Card ................................................................................ 11-2
11.2 Practical Example Using the I/O Interface Card .................................................. 11-4
11.2.1 Building the Circuit ............................................................................... 11-4
11.2.2 Defining the Sequence ........................................................................... 11-6
11.2.3 Sequence Ladder Logic Diagram .......................................................... 11-7
11.2.4 Assigning I/O Variables to Electrical Circuit Components ................. 11-10
11.3 Simulating the Circuit Connected to a PLC ....................................................... 11-11
A Shortcuts ........................................................................................................................... 1
A.1. Keyboard Shortcuts .................................................................................................. 1
A.2. Navigation Keys ....................................................................................................... 5
A.3. Mouse Shortcuts ....................................................................................................... 6
B Glossary ............................................................................................................................. 1
C Index .................................................................................................................................. 1

© Famic Technologies Inc. v

1 Introduction
Automation Studio™ is an innovative software system solution for design, simulation, and
project documentation. Specifically oriented for design, documentation, training and
support of automation systems, it may include hydraulic, pneumatic and electrical
operative devices as well as a command part expressed into ladder logic, relay or SFC
diagrams. It is intended to be used by engineers, technicians, training,
service/maintenance and support personnel in a wide variety of related fields.

Automation Studio™ provides the ability to design and document a complete virtual
machine using the available technologies, and step-by-step follow-up on a project
lifecycle by using a minimum number of source projects. These steps are: design, drafting
and technical documents, validation, commercial documentation and technical reports,
training, troubleshooting and document management of the virtual machine. The
objective is to minimize human error, and avoid the need for document and prototype
duplication.

The software consists of several modules, which are also called workshops, and libraries
that can be added according to each user’s needs and requirements. Each library contains
hundreds of SO, IEC, JIC and NEMA compliant symbols. Users can select the appropriate
components and drag and drop them onto the workspace to quickly create virtually any
type of system. Systems can consist of one single technology such as hydraulics,
pneumatics, electrotechnical, etc., or of a combination of multiple technologies that will
interact with each other during simulation as they would in the real life.

Automation Studio™ includes functions for editing, simulation, printing, file management
and presentation. Access to technical and commercial data is also available.

The needs expressed by users have triggered the development of two products that
enhance the capabilities of Automation Studio™.
1. Automation Studio™ Simulation is a product that is used to simulate projects and
create training material for increasing needs.
2. Automation Studio™ Design is a product that is used to edit projects, meeting the
increasing needs in technical drawing and designing.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 1-1

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

1.1 Educational Edition Limitations

The Educational Edition is a lighter edition of the Professional one. Some features have
not been developed or were limited such as:
● Opening simultaneous projects
● Limit on the number of diagrams
● Limit on the number of components per diagram or project
● Limit on the number of components for thermal simulation
● Steady state and snapshot of simulator’s variables
● Configurable components
● Limit on the number of measuring instruments
● Limit on the number of plotter curves
● Global Variables

1.2 General Information

th
The 6 generation of Automation Studio™ includes all the functionalities of its
predecessors and incorporates new features that integrate the software into the work
process of quality-oriented businesses. Many of these new features are listed below:
● Teams can work on the same project: multi-user sessions are now possible.
● Standardization among the company and its uses of Automation Studio™
(Drafting standards, Component and Document Naming rules, etc.).
● Security and Access Management based on user’s preferences for documents,
software functions and even component detailed information.
● Integration of Automation Studio™ with a company’s existing tools with the use
of macro functions that communicate with other applications.
● A new more intuitive user interface structured around all the software features.

The Automation Studio™ user documentation has a modular structure. The current
Automation Studio™ - User’s Guide contains information regarding the main functions of
the Project Explorer, the Library Explorer, the common functionalities for all the Editors in
Edition and Simulation mode. Each workshop has a User’s Guide that provides specific
information.

If a function explained into one of the guides is related to users team work,
standardization of work procedure, rights management and access or integration of
Automation Studio™ with other applications, we will mention it.

1-2
 Introduction

Depending on the Automation Studio™ edition, some functions might be either limited
(number of components, documents or projects, thermal simulation etc.) or missing
(Specialized builders or report types etc.).

All physics phenomena calculated by the simulator are available in all editions.

1.3 Document Content

The Workshops User's Guides complement this core system User's Guide. These
documents explain the practical and theoretical use of the software through exercises
and examples so that the workshop technology is easily understood. These guides
include the standardization functions for the specified technology.

Refer to the Workshops User's Guide for information on the different functions,
components and examples in order to learn and use Automation Studio™ in edition or
simulation mode.

All the instructions required to use workshops shared functions are included in this User’s
Guide. Specifically, this guide includes the Project Explorer, the Library Explorer, and the
Diagram Editor environments, along with their commands and dialogue boxes.
Instructions that are essential to the simulation of the different workshop technologies
are also described. This Guide includes the team work functionalities.

See the Administrator’s Guide for the management of user profiles, access management
as well as transfer and management of enterprise standards.

See the Catalogue Manager Guide to discover how to create, manage and design a
system starting from manufacturer’s pre-configured parts instead of using generic
components from the main Automation Studio™ library.

See the API Guide to integrate Automation Studio™ into a work process, create macro
functions or create didactic material.

Instructions are presented the way the process should be executed. The content is
organized so that each step in each section follows the next step very closely. In fact, the
basic Automation Studio™ system can be learned by reading this guide and following the
sequence of chapters as they are presented. For tasks specific to a workshop, users are
invited to read the User’s Guide supplied with that specific workshop.

Information can also be accessed through the index and the appendices at the end of this

© Famic Technologies Inc. 1-3

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

document for a summary of reference data.

1.4 Conventions Used in this Document

It is important to know the conventions used in this guide. They were designed to
present information in a clear and structured way. The same conventions apply in the
workshops User's Guides.

1.4.1 Typographical Conventions

The following specific typographical formats are applied in this guide.

● “Quotation marks”: The names of the user interface elements such as tabs,
commands, dialogue boxes, buttons and fields are typed within quotation marks.
Example: Choose “Home” Tab  “Documents” Group  “New Document” 
“Standard Diagram”.
● SMALL CAPS: The names of the keyboard keys are shown in small capitals.
Example: Press on the SHIFT key to separate a component from a link.
● Bold: Text, which must be entered as shown, appears in bold.
Example: Type setup.exe and then press the ENTER key to start the installation
software.
● Italic: Names of variables, diagram titles, files and text representing reference
information are presented in italic script.
Example: In the File Name box, type the name of the file with the .prx extension,
in the form name.prx.

Example: For more information, refer to the Windows User's Guide.

1.4.2 “Choose” Versus “Select”

The word “choose” indicates a selection that triggers an action.

 Example: Choose the “Automation Studio™ Menu”  “Exit Automation Studio™”.

The word “select” is used when identifying an object to be modified or when selecting
an option in a dialogue box.

 Example: Select the printer driver from the Printer drop-down list box.

1-4
 Introduction

1.4.3 Combinations and Sequences of Keys

KEY1+KEY2:The plus sign (+) indicates that the first key must be pressed and held down
while pressing the second one. Example: CTRL+A.

KEY1, KEY2:
The comma (,) instructs to press the first key, release, then press the second
one. Example: ALT, F.

1.4.4 Basic Notions and Terminology Conventions

There are two terminology conventions used in this document. One is for terms
connected with the use of the mouse, and the second is for icons used in this document.

Terms for the Use of the Mouse

Term Definition
Point to an element Position the mouse cursor on an element on the
screen.
Click Press and immediately release the mouse button.
Unless otherwise indicated, click the left mouse button.
Right-click Press and immediately release the right mouse button.
Double-click Press the mouse button twice in quick succession.
Unless otherwise indicated, double-click the left mouse
button.
Drag Press and hold the left mouse button while moving the
mouse cursor across the screen.

Notes and Tips

The current help document uses icons to represent important notes and tips explaining
the commands that can be used.
Icon Definition
Indicates an important notice or concept.


© Famic Technologies Inc. 1-5

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Icon Definition
Indicates a tip or a trick that simplifies the use of commands in
 Automation Studio™.

1-6
2 User Interface Description
This section introduces a detailed description of each item that comprises the Automation
Studio™ User Interface. Items in the main window are divided into two categories:
1. The main application window gives access to most available functions in Automation
Studio™. This window is contains all the documents used, and will be referred to
“Diagram Editor” in the following pages of this guide.
2. Management utility windows are floating and can be accessed from the main
application window.

A list of shortcuts for utility windows and functions is available at the end of this
document in the Annex.

Figure 2-1: Main Application Window

Zone or Element Category
1 Title Bar Static
2 Custom Toolbar Static
3 Automation Studio™ Menu Static
4 Ribbon Static
5 Status Bar Static
6 Library Explorer Dynamic

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-1

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Zone or Element Category

7 Project Explorer Dynamic
8 Contextual menu – Example Dynamic

2.1 Main Application Window or Diagram Editor

The main window consists of static elements such as the title bar, the Automation
Studio™ menu, the custom toolbar, the ribbon and the status bar.

It is also the main window that contains the views of an active project (see section
2.2.4.2 Project Explorer Configuration Window).

2.1.1 Contextual Menus

When working on a diagram, the contextual menu can be used an alternative means to
reach certain commands offered in the ribbon. Right-click on the diagram to make the
contextual menu appear.

The commands available in the contextual menu are determined by the current mode
(simulation or edit mode), as well as the position of the cursor. If the cursor is on a
specific item, the contextual menu may contain commands relevant to that item.

Certain commands offered in the contextual menu are not available in the ribbon bar.
These commands apply specifically to the selected element or to the present context.
Refer to the various guides to know the specific contextual menus, depending on the
component and the technology used.

2.1.2 Title Bar

When starting Automation Studio™, the default title bar of the Diagram Editor is shown
on Figure 2-2: Title Bar of Automation Studio™ upon Opening. When saving for the first
time or when opening an existing project, the title bar displays the name of the software
followed by the name of the project and current diagram.

Figure 2-2: Title Bar of Automation Studio™ upon Opening

2-2
 User Interface Description

2.1.3 Automation Studio™ Menu

The button located in the upper left corner of the main window provides access to
the Automation Studio™ menu.

In general, the Automation Studio™ menu contains project management functions while
the ribbon (see section 2.1.4 Ribbon) contains all the command tabs dedicated to project
creation (editing and simulation).

Figure 2-3: Automation Studio™ Menu

Automation Studio™ menu functions are grouped together in categories, which appear on
the left-hand side of the menu (Figure 2-3: Automation Studio™ Menu). As long as no
category is selected, click on one of the projects appearing on the right-hand side of the
menu, to open it.

The menu also displays two buttons in the lower section of the window : “Automation
Studio™ Options” to modify the application’s options, and “Exit Automation Studio™” to
close the application.

Automation Studio™ options are described in section 2.1.3.2 Automation Studio™ Options.
A description of the functions offered in the Automation Studio™ menu is provided below.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-3

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

2.1.3.1 Functions of Automation Studio™ Menu

Figure 2-4: Automation Studio™ Menu – Project

Category Command Description

Project Save Project This command saves a project and its
modifications, if applicable. See section 4.1.3
Save.
Save Project As… This command saves a project and its
modifications under a different name without
affecting the original version of the document.
Save Project This command saves a project as a template. This
Template… template contains all the standards included in
the source project.
Open Project… This command opens an existing project, with
backwards compatibility up to version 3.x.
Close Project This command closes a project and saves or
discards the modifications that have been made.
See section 4.1.7 Closing a Project.
Update Project (Team Work) This command updates all the
documents modified by other users within the
same project.

2-4
 User Interface Description

Category Command Description

Project Properties… This command inserts, verifies and modifies the
information in a project. (For more information,
refer to section 4.2 Project Properties.)
Custom properties specific to a project can be
defined.
Project This command gives project administrators the
Permissions… ability to define users and assign access rights to
a project. (For more information, refer to the
Installation and Administration Guide.)
Custom permissions specific to a project can be
defined.
Send To This command sends a compressed copy of the
current project by email. (For the procedure, refer
to section 4.1.6 Send To.)
New Project This command creates a new project based on
the available templates.
As shown here, this command is also available
by the icon appearing on the ribbon.

Figure 2-5: Automation Studio™ Menu - Document

Category Command Description

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-5

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Category Command Description

Document Save Document This command saves the active document.
Open Document This command opens a document in the
active project.
Close Document This command closes the selected opened
document in the active project.
Document Properties… This command provides access to the
properties of the current document.
Save Standard Diagram This command saves a document as a
Template… template based on the active standard
diagram.
Save Sequential Function This command saves a document as a
Chart Template… template based on the active sequential
function chart.
Save Report Template… This command saves a report as a
template based on the active report.
Save Electrotechnical This command saves a document as a
Diagram Template… template based on the active
electrotechnical diagram.
Save Electrotechnical This command saves a document as a
Panel Layout Template… template based on the active
electrotechnical panel layout.
Save Connection Diagram This command saves a document as a
Template… template based on the active connection
diagram.
Save One-Line Diagram This command saves a document as a
Template… template based on the active one-line
diagram.
New Document This command creates a new document
based on available templates.
As shown here, this command is also
available by the icon appearing on the
ribbon.

2-6
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-6 : Automation Studio™ Menu – New Document

New Web Page

For a new web page, a window opens asking for a name and a URL address for the web
page.

Figure 2-7 : Automation Studio™ Menu – New Web Page

Figure 2-8: Automation Studio™ Menu –Print

Category Command Description
Print Print… This command accesses the print
function of all or some documents
within the active project. (For the

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-7

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

procedure, refer to Section 4.1.4

Print and Print Preview.)
Print Preview… This command accesses the print
preview functions of all or specific
documents of the active project.
Export This command exports a project
or a SFC. The project export can
be performed in many formats.
(For the procedure, refer to
Section 5.1.4 Export.)
SFCs are exported in GIE format
or in a “Siemens Step 7 S7-Graph”
format recognized by certain
PLCs. The SFC export function is
optional in the software and an
appropriate licence type is
required to access it.
Import This command imports SFCs in GIE
(SFC Importation / Exportation)
and GIG (from the GRAPHITE
software) formats.

Register your Software

The “Support” menu allows you to register the software, check for updates, download
manufacturers’ catalogues and teachware and helps you find information about your
version of Automation Studio™. It gives you also access to the user’s guides of different
Automation Studio™ modules and online support.

2-8
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-9: Automation Studio™ - Support

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-9

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Category Command Description

Support Automation Studio™ Help This command accesses contextual
help regarding the active window
(Project Explorer, Library Explorer,
etc.) or active element (component,
group, CAD, etc.)
Software Registration This command accesses the Internet
registration portal to register a copy
of Automation Studio™ with Famic
Technologies inc.

The computer must be connected to

the Internet for access to this
service. Registration is mandatory in
order to access the online technical
support.

Check for Updates This command verifies the

availability of new updates to get
the most recent version of the
software.
Manufacturers’Catalogues This command opens a window from
Download which you can download
manufacturers’catalogues.
Teachware Download This command allows teachware
download.
About This command accesses the license
manager as well as detailed
information on the installed
Automation Studio™ version.
User’s Guides This command accesses the Help on
different modules in Automation
Studio™.
Script This command accesses the Script
Module Help File.

2-10
 User Interface Description

Category Command Description

Online Support Client Support Page This command accesses the client
dedicated technical support portal.
It is necessary to have a registered
copy (during installation, by fax/mail
or by the “Software Registration”
command from the “Support”
menu). The technical support portal
provides access to download certain
useful items, such as Service
Releases, User-defined Libraries,
Manufacturers Catalogues,
documents related to the use of the
software, etc.
Discussion Forum This command provides access to
our online forum of our software.
Frequently Asked This command provides access to a
Questions list of pertinent questions asked by
Automation Studio™ users. The
technical support team publishes the
answers in order to help other users
and to provide a better customer
support.
Automation Studio™ on This command provides direct access
the Web to the web page where the new
software features are described.
Automation Studio™ This command sets application
Options options specific to the user. For more
information, refer to section 2.1.3.2
Automation Studio™ Options.

The language of Automation Studio™

interface can be set in the options.

Exit Automation This command completely closes the

Studio™ application, while the “Close”

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-11

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Category Command Description

command only to closes the active
project (See section 4.1.8 Exit the
Application).

2.1.3.2 Automation Studio™ Options

To set the application options, go to the Automation Studio™ Menu  Click on

“Automation Studio™ Options”.

Figure 2-10 : Automation Studio™ Options in the Automation Studio™ Menu

2-12
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-11 : Automation Studio™ Options

These options are user defined and included in a database named ASSettings.mdb. To
standardize this database for all users, administrators must copy ASSettings.mdb in each
user directory:
● C:\Users\UserName\AppData\Roaming\Famic Technologies\Automation
Studio\6.0 (Win7)
● C:\Documents and Settings\[utilisateur]\Application Data\Famic
Technologies\Automation Studio\6.0 (Windows XP) or equivalent path other OS.

 Some options changes require Automation Studio™ to be restarted before taking

effect e.g. the language selection (For more information refer to section 4.2.1.2
“Standards”).
Name Description
Language
Language This command is used to set the language
displayed on the software interface.

Locations

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-13

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Name Description

 To integrate Automation Studio™ in the global company process, we strongly

recommend sharing all the following folders to ensure the management of
common standards are easily accessible by each team member.
Catalogue and Library Location Organize the manufacturer’s catalogues and
custom libraries folder.
Templates Location Specify the templates folder.

Enterprise Standard DB Location Specify the company standard database

folder.
Fluids Valves Spools DB Location Specify the fluid valves spools database
folder.
Scripts
Enterprise Scripts Location Specify the directory path for company
scripts. Many paths can be declared using
semicolons. For more information, refer to
API Guide.
Custom Scripts Location Specify the directory path for users’ scripts.
Many paths can be declared using
semicolons. See API Guide for more details.

Startup Script Specify name or location of the script that is

launched when starting the application. See
API Guide for details.
Display Internal Variable Name in a Display the internal name of the variables.
Tooltip
Backup and Update Settings
File Project Backup Copy On Opening This command is used to set whether a
backup will be created in the initial project
directory when opened.
Autosave Delay This command is used to set the delay
between the automatic saves. See section
2.1.3.3 Project Recovery.

2-14
 User Interface Description

Name Description
Software Update This command is used to set the software
update mode to be manual or with automatic
check delays for Automation Studio™ (daily,
weekly, monthly).

Application Opening Behaviour This command is used to set the behaviour at

the opening of the application. Five
possibilities are offered: No project is created
when opening the application, or a project is
created with standard, electrotechnical, SFC
or One-Line document.

Electrotechnical Edition
Wire Edition Rerouting This command is used to activate the
automatic rerouting of wires.
Show Wire Update Warning This command displays a warning message
before a wire update.
Information
Company Name This command is used to input the name of
the company.
OPC Server
OPC Server State This command is used to activate or
deactivate the Automation Studio™ OPC
Server.
UA Services TCP Port This command is used to set the TCP port
address for the UA Services. A UA (OPC
Unified Architecture) client will connect to
this port.
UA Discovery Services TCP Port This command is used to set the TCP port
address for the UA Discovery Services.

2.1.3.3 Project Recovery

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-15

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

If the File Project Backup Copy On Opening” option has been selected in the Automation
Studio™ options, the projects are saved automatically if, for whatever reason, Automation
Studio™ was unexpectedly closed after a certain delay.

Figure 2-12: Setting Autosave Delay in the Automation Studio™ Options

 By default the delay is set to 15 minutes, but the function can be deactivated by
selecting “Never” or can be increased up to 120 minutes.

The saved file is kept under a temporary file in the folder where the project file has been
previously saved or in the default Automation Studio ™ installation folder if the project has
never been saved. The extension .autosave is added at the end of the project file full
name (e.g. MyProject.prx.autosave).

 When reopening Automation Studio™, the user will be asked to select the projects
recovered.

Figure 2-13: Project Recovery after Autosave

2.1.4 Ribbon

The ribbon replaces the usual menus and toolbars. It cannot be moved or hidden, but can
be minimized.

2-16
 User Interface Description

It is composed of:
1. Tabs: of typical usage controls or main scenarios.
2. Groups: within the tabs, assembly of controls of a same function.
3. Commands: within groups, to manage generally unit functions.
4. Help button: to access contextual help of the current window (Project, Library
Explorer, etc.) or of the current element (component, group, CAD, etc.).

Figure 2-14: Components of the Ribbon

 To minimize/maximize the ribbon bar, right-click on it and click “Minimize the

Ribbon”.

 Once the Ribbon is minimized, the controls are still accessible: click on the tab for
access. Once the control is selected, the tab is minimized again.

 When the ribbon is not minimized, it is possible to move from one tab to another
if by placing the mouse on the “Ribbon” and use the mouse scroll.

When putting the mouse cursor on one command, a tooltip appears. To access a
command, simply click on its icon. Some commands have an arrow on the right of or
below the icon. By clicking on the arrow, a menu appears displaying a group of
distributed controls. By clicking on the main icon, the main function is launched.

A grey shaded command indicates it is disabled under the current circumstances.

Highlighted icons indicate the command is commonly used.

To validate a data entry, click on ENTER or move out of the field.

Right-click in the ribbon zone to make the contextual menu appear.

Command Description

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-17

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Command Description
Add to the Quick Access Toolbar This command appears when a command of the
ribbon is right-clicked. It is used to add a command
to the Quick Access Toolbar. (See section 2.1.5 Quick
Access Toolbar
Customize Quick Access Toolbar… This command is used to access the toolbar
customization dialogue box, and configure the
toolbar content. (See section 2.1.5 Quick Access
Toolbar)
Show Quick Access Toolbar This command is used to move the customized
(Above) the Ribbon toolbar above or below the ribbon. (By default it
appears above)
Minimize the Ribbon This command is used to minimize the ribbon.

The following is a description of each Command in each Group of the ribbon bar Tabs.

2.1.4.1 “Home” Tab

This tab contains all the necessary commands to create documents, access components
and draft the whole technical diagram of the system.

“New” Group

This command group is used to create a new project or a new document in the active
project.

Figure 2-15: “New” Group

2-18
 User Interface Description

Command Description
Project This command opens the project templates list from which
to create a new project.

Document This command is used to insert different types of

documents (standard, electrotechnical, report, web page,
etc.).
The arrow (under the word “Document”) contains a set
of sub-commands, for every possible document type.

“Components” Group

This command group is used to access components from many technologies used in
technical drafting.

Figure 2-16: “Components” Group

Command Description
Library This command is used to open the Library Explorer to draw
Explorer technical diagrams with generic symbols which are included
with Automation Studio™.
Refer to section 2.2.3 Library Explorer.
Catalogue This command is used to open the catalogue explorer to
Manager draw technical diagrams with specific components
configured with all the manufacturer’s specifications.
Refer to section 2.2.5 Catalogue Manager.

“Insert” Group

This command group is used to add text information related to components and
documents.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-19

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 2-17: “Insert” Group

Icon Command Description
Insert This command is used to add a reference associated with
Reference one element, group, assembly or subcomponent of an
assembly (See section 6.1.1.3 Graphic Elements).
Insert BOM This command is sued to automatically insert a bill of
materials into a diagram. By default, it contains the
“Quantity” and the “Name of Component” properties. The
Bill of Materials can be configured (See section 6.1.1.4 Bill
of Materials and Revisions History).
History This command is used to insert a table into a diagram that
summarizes all the revisions. This table works in the same
manner as a Bill of Materials (See section 6.1.1.4 Bill of
Materials and Revisions History).

“Links” Group

This command group is used to create links between components and to apply functions
to the components. The content displayed in this group varies according to the active
document. The figure below details of the “Links” group in an active standard diagram.
For details about one-line or multiline electrotechnical and SFC diagrams, please see their
respective workshop guide.

Figure 2-18: “Links” Group

Command Description
Link This command creates a technological link.

Direct Link This command creates a straight lined link.

Convert Link This command converts a deviated Link to a Direct Link and

2-20
 User Interface Description

Command Description
vice versa.
Break Link This command divides a link into two or more segments.

Join Link This command connects two distinct segments linked by a

connection into a single link.
Convert Link This command transforms a link into two jumps with the
to Jump same tag name.

“Snap” Group

This command group is used to activate or deactivate:

 The snapping of symbols from the library onto the grid via connection ports.

 The snapping of CAD elements on the virtual grid. The precision of the grip snap
can be set using the “Drawing Snap Precision” command.

Figure 2-19: “Snap” Group

Check the Grid box in the View Tab to see the element behaviour. If this box is
unchecked, these snap options will not be visible.

Command Description
Component This command makes the component symbols to snap on
Snap the grid. Otherwise, the component symbols can be located
to the nearest pixel anywhere in the workspace. This is not
recommended for technical diagrams because this can make
the symbol’s alignment more difficult.
Drawing This command makes the CAD elements (circle, line, square,
Snap etc.) snap onto a virtual grid according to its precision
setting.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-21

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide
“Drawing” Group

This command group allows the drafting of 2D geometric shapes.

Figure 2-20: “Drawing” Group

Command Description
Pointer Tool Used to select objects.

Line This command is used to draw a line on a diagram.

Rectangle This command is used to draw a rectangle or a square on a

diagram.
To draw a square, hold down the CTRL key while drawing.
Ellipse This command is used to draw an ellipse or a circle on a
diagram.

 To draw a circle, hold down the CTRL key while

drawing.
Arc This command is used to draw an arc on a diagram.

Polygon This command is used to draw a polygon on a diagram.

Polypolygon This command is used to draw a set of overlapping

polygons to define alternatively solid and empty surfaces.
Spline This command is used to draw a spline.

Text This command is used to insert text areas into a diagram.

Picture This command is used to insert images (JPG, BMP, WMF,

EMF, …) into a diagram.
Field This command is used to insert automatic fields that can
contain the current diagram or project properties. This is
useful when building dynamic title blocks.

2-22
 User Interface Description
“Component Tooltip” Group

This command group is used to input information that will be displayed in the component
tooltip (text or hyperlink).

When editing, these commands are used to automatically add a text or a hyperlink to a
picture, audio, video and other type of file in the tooltip of a component. Each property
includes a label and a description. Once created, it will be displayed in the component
tooltip, as long as the option is checked in the “View” tab of the
main ribbon.

It is possible to activate the “User Translated Text Value” option in order to display the
information in other languages.

The user can further edit these property values directly in the component property
dialogue box, under “User-defined” properties in the Data tab. The property label appears
as an alias in this dialogue box.

This command supports most of the technology components and drawing elements, even
if they are part of a group or an assembly. The layer, however, must be active and
visible.

To apply one of these commands, simply click on the selection in the “Home” tab of the
main ribbon in the “Component Tooltip” group. When the mouse cursor passes over the
element with a tooltip, the element is highlighted.

Clicking on the highlighted element opens the corresponding property dialogue boxes:
a. Text to edit the label (name) and text (content).
b. Hyperlink to edit the label and text by clicking on the abc command or on
the magnifier icon to browse the required file.

Figure 2-21 : “Component Tooltip” Group

Icon Command Description

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-23

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Icon Command Description

Insert a text To insert a text in the component tooltip.
Refer to the section Example : Insert a Text.
Hyperlink to To insert a hyperlink to a picture in the component tooltip.
Picture Refer to the section Insert a Hyperlink to a Picture, an Audio
File, a Video or Other File.
Hyperlink to To insert a hyperlink to an audio file in the component
Audio File tooltip.
Refer to the section Insert a Hyperlink to a Picture, an Audio
File, a Video or Other File.
Hyperlink to To insert a hyperlink to a video in the component tooltip.
Video Refer to the section Insert a Hyperlink to a Picture, an Audio
File, a Video or Other File.
Hyperlink to To insert a hyperlink to a file in the component tooltip.
File Refer to the section Insert a Hyperlink to a Picture, an Audio
File, a Video or Other File.

Example : Insert a Text

Step 1: Click on the icon in the ribbon.

Figure 2-22 : Text Icon in the Ribbon

Step 2 : Move the pointer over the component and click on it.

Figure 2-23 : Text Pointer

2-24
 User Interface Description

Step 3 :Insert the label and the text, then select the translation option, if applicable.

Figure 2-24 : Insert a Text in the Component Tooltip

Insert a Hyperlink to a Picture, an Audio File, a Video or Other File

Step 1: Click on the appropriate icon in the ribbon.

Step 2: Move the pointer over the component and click on it.

Step 3 : Click on the “Magnifier” and browse to find the file (picture, audio, video or

other). Edit the path using the “abc” icon next to the magnifier icon : .

Figure 2-25 : Insert a Hyperlink to a Picture

Figure 2-26 : Insert a Hyperlink to an Audio File

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-25

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 2-27 : Insert a Hyperlink to a Video

Figure 2-28 : Insert a Hyperlink to a File

Generic Viewer

Once inserted, the hyperlink will launch from the Component Tooltip and will open in the
Automation Studio™ Generic Viewer (for compatible files).

Result if you insert many item types:

Figure 2-29 : Pump Tooltip

By clicking on the hyperlink “Video 1”, the Generic Viewer will open to enable the video
to play.

2-26
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-30 : Generic Viewer

“Custom Component” Group

This commands group is used to start the wizard for generating a custom component
(see 10.3 Custom Component Generating Wizard), insert a “Port” component (see
10.2.1.2 Ports and 10.2.2.2 Ports Correspondence) and finally, extract the symbol of a
component, a group or an assembly of drawing objects.

This group is located in the “Home” Tab only if the current document is of the “Standard”
or “Electrotechnical” type.

Figure 2-31 "Custom Component" Group

Icon Command Description
Custom Starts the assistant which is composed of different dialogues
Component that may create a custom component and configure its
variables and options (see 10.3 Custom Component
Generating Wizard).

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-27

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Icon Command Description

Port Inserts a “Port” component into the diagram (see 10.2.1.2
Ports). It will be used as the custom component’s connection
port if the port is configured (see 10.2.2.2 Ports
Correspondence).
Extract
Symbol Extracts symbol of a component, a group or an assembly of
drawing objects. This command is activated only if the user
selects a component, a group or an assembly on a standard
or electrotechnical diagram.

2.1.4.2 “Edit” Tab

This tab contains all the necessary commands to manage the format of various objects
inserted on a diagram.

“Clipboard” Group

This group of commands is used to copy and paste objects onto a diagram.

Figure 2-32: “Clipboard” Group

Icon Command Description

Paste This command is used to insert an item from the clipboard
into the current document.
Cut This command is used to remove a selected item from the
current document to the clipboard.
Copy This command is used to copy a selected item from the
current document to the clipboard.
Duplicate This command is used to duplicate selected objects in the
same document.

2-28
 User Interface Description

Icon Command Description

Format This command is used to copy the selected text format and
Painter to associate this format with other text boxes.
Delete This command is used to delete a selected object on a
diagram.

“Location” Group

This group of commands is relative to the standard editor, electrotechnical or one-line. It

is used to display or assign the component’s membership in the system.

Figure 2-33: “Localization” Group

Icon Command Description
Installation Identifies and modifies a component location based
Circuit on the “Installation Number” and the “Circuit
Number”. For more information, refer to Hydraulics,
Pneumatics and Electrotechnical Workshops User’s
Guide.

 NOTE: If 2 circuits are configured with

different fluids, then their components
cannot be connected to each other. The
editor considers two different oils as
incompatible.
Installations / Access to project properties at the appropriate
Circuits section for hydraulic Installations/Circuits settings
management.
Installations / Access to project properties at the appropriate
Circuit section for pneumatic Installations/Circuits settings
management.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-29

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide
“Text” Group

This group of commands is used to modify the format of the selected text information on
a diagram.

Figure 2-34: “Text” Group

Icon Command Description

Font Modify the text font.

Font Size Modify font size of the selected text.

Decrease Font Decrease the size of the selected text font.

Size
Increase Font Increase the size of the selected text font.
Size
Bold Set the selected text in boldface.

Italic Set the selected text in italics.

Underline Underline the selected text.

Strikethrough Draw a line through the middle of the selected text.

Align Text Align the text to the left in the selected text box.
Left
Align Text Align the text in the center of the selected text box.
Center
Align Text Align the text to the right in the selected text box.
Right
Font Colour Change the colour of the selected text.

2-30
 User Interface Description
“Line” Group

This group of commands is used to individually modify the format of selected drawn
objects and symbols on a diagram. However, this is not recommended when working
within a company standard.

Figure 2-35: “Line” Group

Icon Command Description
Colour Modify line colour of the selected graphic object, as well as
the font colour of typed text on the diagram.
Thickness Modify the line thickness of the selected graphic object on
the diagram.
Line Style Modify the graphic style of the lines.

Beginning of Modify the beginning of line’s symbol.

Line
Beginning of Modify the beginning of line’s symbol size.
Line Size
End of Line Modify the end of line’s symbol.

End of Line Modify the end of line’s symbol size.

Size

“Surface” Group

Figure 2-36 :“Surface” Group

Icon Command Description
Fill Pattern Modify the fill pattern.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-31

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Icon Command Description

Foreground Modify the Foreground Colour.
Colour
Background Modify the Background Colour.
Colour

“Layout” Group

Figure 2-37: “Layout” Group

The “Layout” Group in the “Edit” Tab contains all the commands related to setting the
orientation and layout of elements in a diagram.

In this case, an object can be a symbol, a group, or a multiple selection of these

elements. If the selection is a group, the layout functions apply on the symmetrical axis
and on the centre of rotation of the group. If it is a multiple selection, the layout
functions apply individually to each element of the selection.
Position
Icon Command Description
Rotate Left This command is used to apply a counter-
clockwise rotation of 90° to a selected object.
Rotate Right This command is used to apply a clockwise
rotation of 90° to a selected object.
Rotate 180° This command is used to apply a rotation of 180°
to a selected object.
Vertical Flip This command is used to transpose a selected
object on its vertical axis.
Horizontal Flip This command is used to transpose a selected
object on its horizontal axis.
Free Rotation This command is used to pivot the selection
using the handles.

2-32
 User Interface Description

Alignment
Icon Command Description
Align Left This command is used to align all the selected
components to the left edge of the master.
Align Center This command is used to align all the selected
components to the center of the master.
Align Right This command is used to align all the selected
components to the right edge of the master.
Align Top This command is used to align all the selected
components to the top edge of the page.
Align Middle This command is used to align all the selected
components to the middle of the master.
Align Bottom This command is used to align all the selected
components to the bottom edge of the master.
True/False Align Relative to the This option and the following are mutually
First Shape Selected exclusive. When this option is selected, the
alignment is based on the first selected item
(master), which has blue grips, compared to the
others which have white grips.
True/False Align to Page The alignment is done relative to the page print
boundaries (left, right, top and bottom
boundaries).
Distribute
Icon Command Description
Distribute Horizontally Place evenly all vertical centre axes of each
selected component.
Distribute Vertically Place evenly all horizontal center axes of each
selected component.
True/False Distribute Relative to This option and the following are mutually
Extent of Selection exclusive. When this option is selected, the
distribution is based on the selected items.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-33

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

True/False Distribute Relative to When this option is selected, the distribution is

Page Extent based on the entire page.

Coordinates and Orientation

Any selected item inserted onto a diagram is surrounded by a rectangle and handles that
are either blue or white. The coordinates of the selection box (the rectangle), upper left
corner, can be located with the X and Y values that are measured relative to the upper
left corner of the document.

The “Coordinates and Orientation” window is accessible from the “Edit” tab  “Layout”

group of the ribbon . It is used to display and modify the positioning parameters of
the selected element.

This window is also used to apply mirror operations with the “Vertical Flip” and
“Horizontal Flip” checkboxes.

Figure 2-38: “Coordinate and Orientation” Dialogue Box

X The abscissa (X coordinate) of the upper left corner of the
selection box prior to any rotation or flip operation.
Y The ordinate (Y coordinate) of the upper left corner of the
selection box prior to any transformation.
W Width of the selection box prior to any rotation or flip operation.
H Height of the selection box prior to any rotation or flip operation.

2-34
 User Interface Description

A Sets the horizontal axis angle of the selection box.

CX X coordinates of the center of rotation relative to the geometric
center of the selected objects or group of objects.
CY Y coordinates of the center of rotation relative to the geometric
center of the selected objects or group of objects.
This button shows the state of the selected item and vertically
flips the item.
This button shows the state of the selected item and horizontally
flips the item.

Symbols are inserted on stacked layers on the design. The first layer is superposed over
the others; while the last layer is below all the others.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-35

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Sizing
Icon Command Description
Width Resizes all selected items horizontally.

Height Resizes all selected items vertically.

Width and Height Resizes all selected items vertically and

horizontally.
Group and Assembly
Icon Command Description

Group/Ungroup This command is used to bring selected objects

together into one element called a group.

Assembly/Unassembly This command is used to assemble a group of

components to make an assembly.
Order
Icon Command Description
Bring to Front This command is used to bring a selected object
to the first layer on the diagram.
Bring Forward This command is used to move a selected object
to one layer above the current one.
Send Backward This command is used to move a selected object
to one layer below the current one.
Send to Back This command is used to bring a selected object
to the last layer on the diagram.
Others

Icon Command Description

Visibility This command is used to make the selected
components invisible or visible.

2-36
 User Interface Description
“Editing” Group

This command group is used to create and assign layers to components. This command
can also be used to find and select components.

Figure 2-39: “Editing” Group

Icon Command Description
Find & This command is used to search a text string in a document
Replace Text and to replace it if specified.
Find This command is used to search components by circuit and
Component installation number.
Layers This command is used to open the “Layers” window.
Properties Refer to section 2.2.8 Layers Manager.
Select This command is used to select some or all items present on
the diagram and on visible layers. For example, in the Fluid
Workshops:
● All
● Lines and components
● Components
● Lines
Update Page Renumbering documents according to the page numbering
Numbering mode.
Page If activated, all documents in the project are considered for
Numbering by page numbering. Otherwise, all documents are numbered
Project separately.

2.1.4.3 “View” Tab

The “View” tab contains the commands related to the display and the modification of
project properties, active document, or components. It is also used to modify the
displayed information on the diagram, the zooms and the windows.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-37

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide
“Properties” Group

This command group provides access to the project, active document or component
properties.

Figure 2-40: “Properties” Group

Icon Command Description
Project Properties This command is used to open the project
properties dialogue box.

Document This command is used to open the document

Properties properties dialogue box. Diagram properties
can be customized.
Component This command is used to open the component
Properties properties dialogue box. Component properties
can be customized.

“Show” Group

This command group is used to display or hide visual information of components or

document on the diagram. This group displays the commands according to the active
document type. For more information, please refer to the one-line or multiline
electrotechnical user’s guide.

Figure 2-41: “Show” Group

Command Description
Grid This command is used to display or hide the grid
that snaps symbols or drawn objects.
References This command is used to display or hide the
references inserted onto the diagram.

2-38
 User Interface Description

Satellites This command is used to display or hide the

satellites inserted onto the diagram.
Connection Port This command is used to view or hide the names
Names of all the connection ports of each symbol on the
diagram.
Component This command is used to display or hide the
Tooltip component tooltip when the cursor is moved
over the component symbol.
Margins and This command is used to display or hide the
Page Breaks margins and page breaks of a diagram.
Contact Points This command is used to display or hide the
contact points of each symbol on the diagram.
Rulers This command is used to display or hide the
vertical and horizontal rulers.
Connection This command is used to display or hide the
Ports connection ports of each symbol on the diagram.
Highlight Links This command is used to display or hide the
highlighted colours of the links while editing.
These colours are defined by the hydraulic or
pneumatic standards.
Hyperlinks This command is used to display the tag names
of assigned variables with a hyperlink format or
normal text.

Customize Texts Diplay

Once the display options are selected in the “Show” group (see Figure 2-41: “Show”
Group) different kinds of texts displayed on the diagram can be customized according to
user’s needs. The groups “Text”, “Line” and “Surface” located in the “Edit” tab allow the
user to modify characters’ fonts, colour or size or backgrounds and patterns.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-39

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 2-42 Customize Texts Display via the Ribbon

References, Drawing Tools or Labels’ typography can also be modified via the project
properties under the category “Appearance”.

Figure 2-43 Customize Texts Display via the Project Properties

The user can also access directly the font window by double-clicking on the group’s name
after an assembly.

2-40
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-44 Font window

Connection Ports and Contact Points

There are two types of connections: Connection Ports and Contact Points. Connection
ports link two components and allow fluid transmission (air or oil) or electric current
transmission. Contact points put a sensor and a receiver in contact to allow a component
to influence the behaviour of another component.

Connection ports are represented by a circle which appears to the point of connection.
The colour of the circle indicates the state of the connection (connected or not).

Mechanical contacts are represented by a rhombus which appears at the contact point.
Contrary to the connection ports, the colour of rhombuses is not influenced by the state
of the connection.

Figure 2-45: Two Connection Types: Connection Ports (1) and Mechanical Contacts (2)

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-41

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

When two connections are stacked, they change colour to indicate that the link is
established, to quickly identify free connections.

To show or hide the connections: check or uncheck “Connection Ports” and “Contact
Points” in this group.

Connection Port Names:

The display of the port names is a useful function when making a real assembly from a
diagram. In this example, this information is exact and immediate shows which are the
connections to be made.

Figure 2-46: Component with Connection Ports’ Numbers

It is possible to lock/unlock the names of the connection ports of a component by using

the “Lock Connection Port Names” command in the component’s contextual menu. When
names are locked, they cannot be moved.

To show or hide the connection ports names: check or uncheck the “Connection Port
Names” command in this group.

“Component” Group

This command group displays information about component identification.

Figure 2-47: “Component” Group

Icon Command Description
Show/Hide Item Identifier Option to display or hide the selected
Tool component ID.
Lock/Unlock Item Identifier Option to lock or unlock the position of the
Tool selected component ID.

2-42
 User Interface Description

Icon Command Description

Lock/Unlock Component Option to lock or unlock the component
Displayable Number number in the renumbering process.
Lock/Unlock Connection Port Option to lock or unlock the position of the
Names Tool connection ports.
Lock/Unlock Component Size Option to lock or unlock the selected
component size.

“Navigation” Group

This command group is used to navigate between hyperlinks inside the same or different
documents.

Figure 2-48: “Navigation” Group

Icon Command Description
Back This command is used to return to the
previous hyperlink.
Forward This command is used to go to the next
hyperlink.

“Zoom” Group

This command group is used to modify the view size of the document page on the
screen.

Figure 2-49: “Zoom” Group

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-43

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Icon Command Description

Zoom Percentage This command is used to set the magnification of
the screen image. This value can also be set from
the status bar (see section 2.1.7 Status Bar).
Zoom + This command is used to increase the
magnification view of the page.
Zoom - This command is used to reduce the
magnification view of the page.
Zoom Window This command is used to select an area of the
diagram with the mouse and increase the
magnification view of the selected area.
Zoom Page This command is used to view the entire page.

Zoom all This command is used to view the complete set

Components of components on the page regardless of their
position on the diagram.
Previous Zoom This command is used to revert to the last view
percentage.
Panning This command is used to move across the page
in real time and see its content in a
multidirectional movement.

“Window” Group

This command group is used to manage all open document windows in the project
explorer.

Figure 2-50: “Window” Group

Window Organisation: In Automation Studio™, users can organize the display of projects
and their diagrams in various windows, optimizing the display of these windows while
designing and simulating projects.

2-44
 User Interface Description

Benefits of Multi-windowing: The capability of Windows to simultaneously display

multiple windows facilitates the exchange of information between the different open
windows on the screen. In Automation Studio™, this capability is a highly useful analytic
tool for the following applications:
● To evaluate one or more diagrams during simulation.
● To highlight sections of the diagram in which the behaviour under simulation is
of particular interest.

This feature is useful when working on complex circuits contained on large-size diagrams
or during the simulation of a project containing many diagrams. The following figure is an
example of a multi-window display of two different windows at the same time.

Figure 2-51: Multi-windowing

The “Window” group contains the commands related to the organization of the layout
and duplication of certain windows.
Icon Command Description
New View This command is used to create a different view on the
same document with its own zoom scale.
Close all This command is used to close all the windows of the
Window(s) current project.
Horizontal This command is used to display the various projects’
Tile opened windows horizontally, whether or not they are
active.
Vertical Tile This command is used to display the various projects’
opened windows vertically, whether or not they are active.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-45

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Icon Command Description

Cascade This command is used to display the all open project
windows, arranged one after the other with a slight gap
between them, whether or not they are active.
Switch This command is used to select the active window. Select
Windows the window to activate or open the existing windows
management dialogue box.
In this dialogue, choose the “Activate” command to make
the selected window the active one.
Status Bar This command is used to display the status bar of the main
window.

Figure 2-52: Existing Windows Management Dialogue Box

Command Description
Activate This command is used to select the project window to
display on the first layer.
OK This command is used to validate the selection.
Minimize This command is used to minimize the selected windows.

2.1.4.4 “Simulation” Tab

This tab contains the commands related to the simulation of a project or a diagram.

The simulation of a project or diagram launches the simulation engine that computes and
solves the selected portion of the drawn circuit, and responds to the behaviour and
animation of symbols.

2-46
 User Interface Description
“Control” Group

This command group manages the activation of the simulation, from starting, pausing or
stopping, to the speed at which it is run.

Figure 2-53: “Control” Group

Icon Command Description
Normal Simulation This command is used to simulate a circuit in normal
speed.
Simulate with This command is used to simulate a circuit from a digital
Snapshot snapshot.

Please be sure you have done at least one snapshot to

be able to use this command

Step by Step This command is used to simulate a circuit one step at a

time. Each mouse click corresponds to one cycle.
Slow Motion This command is used to simulate a circuit at the
slowest speed.
Pause This command is used to interrupt simulation.

Stop Simulation This command is used to stop simulation.

“Mode” Group

This commands’ group is used to select the documents to be simulated.

Figure 2-54: “Mode” Group

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-47

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Icon Command Description

Project Simulation Selects all the current project’s diagrams when
launching simulation.
Document Selects the current diagram when launching
Simulation simulation.
Selection Selects the selected items when launching simulation.

Select Documents Opens the dialogue box of diagrams to be simulated in

to Simulate the current project.

 It is possible to select layers to be simulated from the Layer Manager.

“Conditions” Group

This command group is used to access simulation analysis tools.

Figure 2-55: “Conditions” Group

Icon Command Description

Trigger a snapshot This command is used to take a picture of the diagram
during simulation. (See section 8.4.1 Snapshot of a
Circuit State.)
Steady State This command is used to open and close the “Steady
Settings State Setting” dialogue box to configure all its
parameters.
Refer to section 2.2.13 Steady State Settings.
Open Path Detection This command is used to detect the possible flow path
Tool of the selected fluid line.
Simulation Options This command is used to visualize and modify
different parameters used for project’s simulation.

2-48
 User Interface Description
“Measuring” Group

This command group is used to access to the dynamic measuring instruments and the
plotters.

Figure 2-56: “Measuring” Group

Icon Command Description
y(t) Plotter This command is used to open and close the y(t)
Plotter window.
Refer to section 9.2 y(t) and y(x) Plotters
y(x) Plotter This command is used to open and close the
y(x) Plotter window.
Refer to section 9.2 y(t) and y(x) Plotters.
z(x,y) Plotter This command is used to open and close the
z(x,y) Plotter window.
Refer to section 9.3 z(x,y) Plotter.
Component This command is used to insert Dynamic
Dynamic Measuring Measuring Instruments onto a component.
Instrument
Node Dynamic This command is used to insert Dynamic
Measuring Measuring Instruments onto a connection
Instrument junction, connection port, and node.
Differential This command is used to insert Differential
Measuring Dynamic Instruments.
Instrument
Power Measuring This command is used to insert Power Dynamic
Instrument Instruments.

Refer to Hydraulics & Pneumatics Workshops or to Multi-Lines Electrotechnical Workshop

guides in order to get more details about each measuring instrument associated with

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-49

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

these technologies.

“Troubleshooting” Group

Refer to Hydraulics & Pneumatics Workshops or to Electrotechnical Workshop guides for

more details.

This command group is used for simulation and circuit troubleshooting with realistic
measuring instruments.

Figure 2-57: “Troubleshooting” Group

Icon Command Description
Hydraulic Tester This command is used to display and hide the
hydraulic tester during simulation.
Manometer This command is used to measure pressure at a
connection port.
Thermometer This command is used to measure fluid
temperature at connection ports.
Disconnect This command is used to disconnect a fluid line in
order to measure the flow rate through the tester.
Reconnect This command is used to reconnect all the
disconnected links on the same diagram.
Repair Tool This command is used to fix a failure on a
component.
Failure Tool This command is used to analyze all types of
failure scenario tests without stopping the
simulation.

2.1.4.5 “Fluid” Tab

This tab appears under the condition of the active document type. In the case of a

2-50
 User Interface Description

standard document type, the tab is dedicated to specific fluid technology functions.
Please refer to the Hydraulics & Pneumatics Workshops guide for details on these specific
functions.

“Diagnostics” Group

This command group is used to identify the different error types or causes.

Figure 2-58: “Diagnosis” Group

Icon Command Description
Diagnostic Tools Please refer to the Hydraulics & Pneumatics
Workshops or Electrotechnical Workshop guides for
more details.

“Builders” Group

This command group creates a database containing hydraulic fluids, line type and
materials.

Figure 2-59: “Builders” Group

Icon Command Description

Fluid and Line This command is used to open the builder to
Manager manage fluid, line types and materials. Refer to the
Hydraulics & Pneumatics Workshops.

“Mechanics” Group

This group is used for mechanical simulations functionalities linked with fluid
components.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-51

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 2-60: “Mechanics” Group

Icon Command Description
Mechanism Manager This command is used to open the Mechanism
Manager. Refer to the Hydraulics & Pneumatics
Workshops User Guide.
Standards Manage the different standards related to a
mechanism. This commands link to the Mechanics
section of the project properties.

“Tools” Group

This command group is used to access specific tools according to the technology of the
active document.

Figure 2-61: “Tools” Group

Icon Command Description
Renumber This command is used to renumber all the
Components components identifiers from the top left corner to
the bottom right corner.

“Standards” Group

Figure 2-62: "Standards" Group

Icon Command Description

2-52
 User Interface Description

Icon Command Description

Fluid Manage standards applicable to hydraulic and
pneumatic circuits.
Hydraulics Manage standards applicable to hydraulic circuits.
This function leads to the Hydraulic section of Project
Properties.
Pneumatics Manage standards applicable to pneumatic circuits.
This function leads to the pneumatic section of
Project Properties.
Naming Rules Manage naming rules for lines, jumps and fluid
components.
Lines Manage line standards (Line Functions and Fluid Line
Appearance).

2.1.4.6 “Tools” Tab

This tab contains all the management tools.

“Management” Group

This command group is used to manage projects, variables and messages generated by
Automation Studio™ while editing or simulating.

Figure 2-63: “Management” Group

Icon Command Description
Project Explorer This command is used to display the “Project
Explorer”.
Refer to section 2.2.4 Project Explorer.
Variable Manager This command is used to display the “Variable
Manager”.
Refer to section 2.2.6 Variable Manager.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-53

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Icon Command Description

Accessory Manager This command is used to display the “Accessory
Manager”.
Refer to section 2.2.7 Accessory Manager.
Message Explorer This command is used to display the “Messages”
window.
Refer to section 2.2.12 Message Explorer.
Translation Manager This command offers a quick access to the
Translation Manager included in “Project
Properties”.
Refer to section 2.2.9 Translation Manager.
Workflow Manager This command offers a quick access to the
Workflow Manager. Refer to the Workflow Manager
User’s Guide.
Sizing Sheet Manager This command offers a quick access to the Sizing
Sheet Manager. Refer to section 6.3 Sizing Sheet
Manager.

“Viewer” Group

Figure 2-64: “Viewer” Group

Icon Command Description
Photo This command is used to display and hide the
component photos window, when applicable.

“Video Recording” Group

This command group is used to create MP4 files during project editing or simulation. This
tool is useful to create didactic materials on Automation Studio ™ or explanations on a
system done in Automation Studio™.

2-54
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-65: “Video Recording” Group

Icon Command Description
Asynchronous This command is used to start the recording of the video.
Recording
Synchronous This command is used to configure the recording of the
Recording video to synchronise with the beginning and the end of
the simulation.
Stop Recording This command interrupts the recording and prompts the
option to save the created .Mp4 file.
Pause Recording This command is used to pause during the two record
modes.
Recording This command is used to configure the different video
Options recording elements: compression rate, images per second,
visibility of the mouse cursor.

“Administration” Group

This command group is used to manage the application and projects rights, definition of
work standards and sharing.

Figure 2-66: “Administration” Group

Icon Command Description
Connection This command is used to define user groups and profiles.
Profiles Refer to Automation StudioTM Installation and
Administration Guide for more details.
Permissions This command is used to assign permissions and access
(Team Work) rights for each project to each profiles or users group.
Refer to Automation StudioTM Installation and
Administration Guide for more details.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-55

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Icon Command Description

Licenses This command is used to access the licence configuration
currently in use. Refer to Automation StudioTM Installation
and Administration Guide for more details.
Standard Tranfer This command is used to transfer and share standards
with other Automation Studio™ users.
Refer to section 2.2.15 Standards Transfer.

“Update” Group

This group consists uniquely of the “Update Components” option.

Figure 2-67 : “Update” Group

Icon Command Description
List of Display the list of project components that have newer
Manufacturer versions in their original catalogue.
Components
with available
update
Update This command is used to select components to be updated,
Components based on the information in the description.

Update Components

When a new fix or a new Version of Automation Studio™ is released, if any modifications
have been made to a component simulation model, the component version number is
edited by Famic.

When a project opens or the update component tool is launched manually, a comparison
is made between the component version number in the Automation Studio™ database
and the same component version number in the Project. If it is a different version, a
dialogue box will appear with a list of all components for which an update is available,
and the option to update.

2-56
 User Interface Description

It is recommended to keep the component library updated with the latest changes to
ensure project and simulation integrity.

 Files can be renamed.

Figure 2-68 : “Update Components Dialogue Box”

Zone Description
1 Workshop One workshop is selected among a list (if applicable); this
workshop includes components for which an update is
available in this project.
2 Checkboxes Select and unselect components to be updated. The first
checkbox selects or unselects all components in the current
workshop.
3 Internal If the component ID is clicked, the corresponding item will be
Identifier selected in red on the diagram.
4 Displayed Another way to identify the component on the diagram.
Identifier
5 Location Identify the location on the diagram.
6 Document The name of the diagram in which the component is located.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-57

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Zone Description
7 Description Information (in English only) about the component updates
content.
8 Original Identifies the original component version prior to the update.
Version
9 Current Version Identifies the component version after the update.
10 Disable If checked, the system bypasses the automatic update when a
Component project opens.
Update

2.1.5 Quick Access Toolbar

This toolbar is located at the top of the application window next to the Automation
Studio™ button. It is configurable to conveniently display commonly used commands.

Figure 2-69: Quick Access Toolbar

2-58
 User Interface Description

The arrow in the extreme-right of the bar drops down a menu of the following functions:
Command Description
Each of the commands in the customized toolbar appears with a checkbox to
temporarily remove the command from the bar. To remove permanently a command,
access the toolbar customization dialogue box.
More Commands… This command displays the toolbar customization
dialogue box, which is used to modify the contents
of the bar.
Show Below the Ribbon This command switches the customized toolbar
above or below the ribbon.
Minimize the Ribbon This command minimizes the ribbon.

The customize toolbar dialogue is used to modify the toolbar contents:

Figure 2-70: Customize Toolbar Dialogue Box

 To permanently remove a command from the customized toolbar, right-click on

the icon of this command in the toolbar, and choose “Remove from Quick Access
Toolbar” in the menu that appears.

 To add a command to the customized toolbar, right-click on the icon of this

command, and choose “Add to the Quick Access Toolbar” in the menu that
appears. (See section 2.1.4 Ribbon)

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-59

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

2.1.5.1 Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts

Define keyboard shortcuts by activating the “Customize…” command in the dialogue of

Figure 2-70: Customize Toolbar Dialogue Box.

Figure 2-71: Modification of Keyboard Shortcuts

Select the category, then the command in the appropriate lists; the “Current Keys” field
shows all the keyboard shortcuts currently associated with commands.

To remove a command, select a shortcut, and choose the “Remove” command.

In the “Press new shortcut key” field, select the new shortcut to associate with the
command.

 The key combinations are translated into character strings. For example, CTRL+F9
it will appear as Ctrl+F9.

 The field under the “Press new shortcut key” is the combination of keys already
assigned to a command or not. In this last case, the “Assign” command must be
activated in order to assign the combination to the command. The new
combination will then appear in the “Current Keys” field.

 The “Reset All” command is used to reset the shortcuts to the default commands
in Automation Studio™.

2-60
 User Interface Description

2.1.6 Contextual Menus

The Diagram Editor’s contextual menus have been created in order to facilitate access to
commands within tabs. With the exception of a few commands created for specific cases,
all commands found in the contextual menus are in the tabs.

2.1.6.1 Open a Contextual menu

A contextual menu appears upon the right-click of the mouse when the arrow is over an
element on the diagram. The contextual menu displays a list of available commands.

2.1.6.2 Specific Commands in a Contextual menu

Some commands are only available through contextual menus. They are neither accessed
in the tab, nor on the ribbon bar. These commands apply specifically to the selected item
or to the current context. Refer to the Guides to learn about specific contextual menus of
components according to technology.

Examples:
Function Description
Animated symbol
Animation This command applies to the components in the Diagram Editor
while in Simulation mode. It is used to open the window in order
to see the synchronized cross-section view of the component.
Setting Clicking on some components during simulation adjusts the
functional setting applied to components, such the pressure of a
valve opening. The component position or state can also be
modified. For example, making it a distributor, or shutting it off.
Symbol Area in the Library Explorer
Small/Medium/large This command applies to components in the Library Explorer. It
Icons modifies of the display size of the components within the
symbols library window.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-61

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Function Description
Rename This command applies to new components, libraries and
categories in the Library Explorer, and to projects and diagrams
in the Project Explorer. It is used to change the name of selected
elements. Therefore, it is possible to rename documents and
work tools according to specific needs.

2.1.7 Status Bar

The status bar shows descriptions of the selected menus and commands for all the
utilities. It contains information cells which indicate the Simulation or Edit application
modes, and the status of particular keys such as CAP, NUM, and SCRL. It also indicates the
position of the cursor on the diagram.

Figure 2-72: Status Bar

Information Mode Description
1 Information Zone: description of the menus
Message Status and commands, and the status of certain
keys.
2 Edit Indicates the cursor’s coordinates on the
Cursor Position diagram. The position (0, 0) corresponds to
the upper left corner.
3 Relative Simulation Simulation This time is relative to when the new
Time RST simulation is started.
4 Simulation This value is saved with a snapshot and is
Absolute Simulation
used as a starting point of a simulation when
Time AST
snapshots are used during simulation.

2-62
 User Interface Description

Information Mode Description

5 Simulation Simulation pace of the current circuit (0.1, 0.2,
Simulation Pace
0.5, 1, 2 or 10 ms).
6 Zoom Percentage Both Displays zoom percentage of the active view.
7 Both Used to modify the zoom with either the
Zoom
slider or the buttons and .

 Right-click on the status bar to display the contextual menu with the option to add
and remove sections of the status bar.

2.2 Floating Windows

Floating windows are windows that can be placed outside of the main window, or be
anchored inside the main window. Floating windows can have different purposes,
including projects management through the management utilities.

2.2.1 Floating Window Manipulation

Window Rolling

To optimize the workspace, floating windows can automatically roll up (minimize): when
the mouse cursor is not on the window, the floating point is minimized to its title bar. To
unroll (maximize), hover the mouse cursor over the window’s title bar.

Figure 2-73: Window Rolling

This function is activated and deactivated by clicking on the pin in the title bar of the
floating window.
Pin Description
Does not allow the utility window to roll. The window is always
completely open.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-63

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Pin Description
Allows the utility window to automatically roll. When mouse cursor moves
away, only the title bar remains visible.

Window Docking

When repositioning a floating utility window in Automation Studio ™, a ghost window and
positioning arrows appear. When the window hovers over one of the arrows, the ghost
window displays the positions where the window would anchor to the screen, if the
mouse click were released at that moment.

Figure 2-74: Window Docking Procedure

Note that the pins remain operational even if a utility window is docked.

To undock a floating window, drag and drop it out of its docked position.

2.2.2 Properties Window

Properties windows are used to view and modify the properties of a:

● Project (see section 4.2 Project Properties).
● Document (see section 5.2 Document Properties).
● Component (see section 6.2 Properties of Library Components).
● Report (see section 7.2 Report Properties).
● View (see section 2.2.4.3 View Management).

2-64
 User Interface Description

The first four Properties windows can be opened using the “View”  “Properties” group
commands of the ribbon. The properties window can be opened from the Project Explorer
Window.

 The Document, Component, or Report Properties window can also be opened from
the contextual menu when the mouse cursor is on the appropriate element.

These windows are composed of a tree view on the left and of a “Data” zone on the
right.

Figure 2-75: Properties Window

The following elements are available in all properties windows:

Zone Description
1 Button Show or hide the tree view.

or
2 Tree View The tree view is used to navigate through the different groups
of properties.
3 Data The content of the Data zone is determined by the selected
group of properties in the tree view.

The categories consist of component properties. Click on “Show Details” to view the
details of the component properties, which appear in the lowest part of the “Data” zone.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-65

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

The visible fields in the details zone can be modified.

The default name of the property can be changed in the Alias field, according to specific
needs.

Display the property name (or alias) and its value directly on the diagram by checking
one of the first two checkboxes, or in a tooltip by checking the third box.

Modify the appearance of an element on the diagram, by double-clicking on it to open

the “Fonts” dialogue box. Define the format settings as for a text object.

Figure 2-76 : Customize Font Window

2-66
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-77: Property Detailed View

 Areas defined by a horizontal blue line are shrinkable.

 Each icon has a tooltip to indicate its use.

2.2.3 Library Explorer

The Library Explorer contains the main Automation Studio™ libraries and allows the
management of custom libraires. The main library contains all the generic component
symbols for hydraulics, pneumatics, electrical controls, etc. These components are
organised by workshop. All of these generic components have default values, unlike the
catalogue components contained in the manufacturers catalogues. The user must modify
the library component parameters in order to model a system.

The Library Explorer can be opened with the following command: “Home” 
“Components”  “Library Explorer”, or by the F9 function key.

The library is arranged in a tree view, through which the user can navigate by opening
and by selecting branches. The available component symbols in the currently selected
branch appear below the tree view. The standards available for the selected component
are shown below the symbols. A component can be inserted into a compatible document
by simply dragging it onto the page. The following diagram shows the general outline of
the main library.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-67

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 2-78 : Structure of the Main Library

2-68
 User Interface Description

2.2.3.1 Areas of the Library Explorer

Figure 2-79: Areas of the Library Explorer

The elements of the Library Explorer are as follows:

Area Description
1 Toolbar Used to manage standard and custom libraries.
2 Tab(s) These tabs are used to select libraries according to diagram
requirements in order to facilitate the creation of circuits. The
“Generic components” tab is the main library of Automation
Studio™.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-69

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Area Description
3 Library Tools specific to the currently open library, namely the search
Functions filter and standards and display configuration.
4 Library Tree- Used for navigating across different specialised workshops such
view as hydraulic, pneumatic etc. by expanding branches and sub-
branches. Each type of library contains the components
associated with that type.
5 Location Indicates the current level in the tree structure, making it easier
to navigate: clicking on the previous level goes up to that level,
and clicking on the arrow between two levels gives access to
other locations at the same level.

6 Sizing of Opens a slider which can be used to change the size of the
symbols symbol previews in the library.
7 Components Used to display and select the desired component.
area
8 Standards Displays all the available standards for the symbol currently
area selected in the symbols area. The button “Hide Standards” can be
used to hide this area in order to simplify the interface, as shown
in the image on the right of figure Figure 2-79: Areas of the
Library Explorer.

2.2.3.2 Using the Library

Within each workshop of the main library, the symbols are grouped by category and sub-
category. Two types of display are possible (see section 2.2.3.3 Library Functions for
more details).

2-70
 User Interface Description
Standards

Many of the components in the library are available under different standards. For each
group, the first components shown are those available in the standard selected for the
workshop, followed by the symbols from other standards. If a symbol is from another
standard, this is indicated below the symbol.

Figure 2-80 Grouping which contains one Symbol from the default standard for the Workshop
and one Component from another standard

 For reasons of uniformity and standardisation, it is recommended that only one

standard be used per workshop. This standard should be selected by default (see
Configuration section). It is possible to hide the standards area so the user will
then insert symbols directly from the components area and will use only symbols
from the chosen standard. If a symbol is unavailable for a given standard, the
counterpart from other standards will be available. For example, in the following
image the Electrotechnical workshop is set up to use the IEC standard and the
standards area is hidden. The user will only be able to use the components in the
components area, which are all IEC symbols.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-71

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 2-81: Electrotechnical Workshop using the IEC Standard with the Standards Area
Hidden

Inserting Components

Components can be inserted from the components area using the default standard for
the workshop (see Configuration section for more information on standards), or from the
standards area to select the same component but with a representation (or symbol) from
a different standard.

2-72
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-82 Inserting a Component from the Components Area or from the Standards Area

Selecting Multiple Components

It is possible to select multiple components within a library folder using the CTRL and
SHIFT keys and to insert all of the selected symbols in one operation. The components
must be selected in the components area, so the symbols will all be from the default
standard for the workshop.

Figure 2-83: Selecting Multiple Components and Inserting them into the Diagram

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-73

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

2.2.3.3 Library Functions

Figure 2-84: Library Search and Configuration Options

Function Description
Search filter Used to filter the library tree-view. The
wildcards (*) and (?) can be used.
Configuration Used to configure the standards for the
display of the components in the
different workshops.

Search Filter

This field can be used to filter the library using the entered text so as to find the desired
component more easily.

The asterisk (*) and question mark (?) wildcards are supported by the filter.

Figure 2-85: Using the Search Filter in the Library.

As soon as text is entered into the filter, the tree view will show all of the branches
which contain symbols which satisfy the search criterion. The symbols contained in each
branch are also filtered.

2-74
 User Interface Description

The filter is available for the default library containing the generic components as well as
for custom libraries, created with this version of Automation Studio ™, which have the
extension PRLX.

 Note that when opening a PRL library (older library format), Automation Studio™
will ask to convert to the PRLX format, which will make the search function
available.

Configuration

The “Configuration” dialogue is unique to the main library and allows the control of the
structure and display of the different symbol standards available.

Figure 2-86: Library Standards Configuration Dialogue

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-75

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Function Description
1 Can be used to hide or display completely a library workshop
2 Used to hide or show the name or the reference to a standard beside
the name of the workshop.

3 Allows the splitting or the merging of some equivalent workshops.

See the section Merging Workshops for more information.
4 List of standards in the workshop which contain at least one symbol.
5 Hide or show all of the symbols of the associated standard in the
workshop. This has the effect of removing not only library
components from a deselected standard, but also any branches that
contain only removed components.
6 Set the default standard for the workshop.
7 Customize the colours for the different symbol standards present in
the workshop.
8 Activate or deactivate the colour coding of the standards of the
components in all the workshops.
9 Activate or deactivate the display of similar components in the
components area. See the “Display similar components” section
below.
10 Accept the modifications.

Examples

In the following figure, the standard ISO 1219-1:2012 is selected as the default for the
Hydraulic workshop, as shown by the name of the workshop. The symbol shown in the
components area is therefore the symbol which respects this standard and the standards
area shows all of the standards which are available. Additionally, the symbols from each
standard use the colours chosen in the configuration.

2-76
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-87: Symbol Shown with the Available Standards using Different Colours for Each
Standard

When a component is not available in the default standard, it is in a grey square in the
components area and the available standards are still displayed in the standards area. For
these components, the name of the standard is displayed.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-77

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 2-88: Components not Available in the Selected Standard for the Workshop

It is possible to hide or show an entire workshop in the library:

Figure 2-89: Library with some of the Workshops Hidden

It is also possible to hide or show all of the components of a given standard within a
workshop. This has the effect of filtering the library components and branches. In the
following figure, the standard ISO 1219-1:1991 is hidden in the Hydraulic workshop:

2-78
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-90: Workshop with one Standard Hidden

Display Similar Components

Within a workshop, similar components are grouped by category and sub-category, as

seen in the tree view. Two types of display are possible.

When the “Display of similar components in the components area” is activated, the
groups are displayed as folders in the components area and one symbol is shown as a
representative for the folder. When deactivated, similar components are grouped as sub-
branches in the tree-view.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-79

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 2-91: Display showing the Grouping of Similar Components with a representative
Component in the Components Area

2-80
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-92: Display of Similar Components in Sub-Branches of the Tree-View

When the “Display of similar components in the components area” is activated, a radio
button is available to select which symbol will be the representative.

Figure 2-93: Choice of Representative for a Folder

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-81

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Additionally, with this display mode, the representative of a folder can be directly
inserted into a drawing by dragging it either from the folder in the components area or
from the standards area.

Figure 2-94: Inserting a Component representing a Folder

Merging Workshops

The workshops “Electrical Control”, “Electrotechnical” and “Electrotechnical One-Line” can

be divided into individual workshops, with one workshop per standard, or they can each
be merged with their equivalent components grouped and available in the components
area.

The following figure shows the Electrotechnical workshop shown as three workshops,
one workshop per standard, followed by an image of the same workshop with the
components grouped.

2-82
 User Interface Description

a) b)
Figure 2-95: Electrotechnical Workshop Divided in 2 Equivalent Workshops (a) and Merged
(b)

When the workshop is merged, its contents are available through the different standards
in the standards area and the options such as choice of default standard colour for each
standard are available. When the workshops are not merged the equivalent symbols are
nonetheless available in the standards area.

Colours

It is possible to use colours to differentiate the standards in each workshop. These

colours can be modified by the user. For example, in the standards area of the following
figure, the result of a modification of the colours for the Electrical Control workshop is
shown.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-83

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 2-96: Customization of Colours for the Standards of a Workshop

Non-Standard Symbols

As well as the standard symbols which are available in the different workshops, there are
also some library symbols which are not standardized. In some cases, the appearance of
the symbol is taken from a reference publication which is not standardized or is based on
the commonly used manufacturer symbols. These types of symbol are classified as
“No Standard”. For example, the following figure shows a symbol respecting the
standard ISO 1219-1:2012 as well as another non-standard commonly used symbol.

2-84
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-97: Example of a Symbol which has a Non-Standardized Appearance

Some other symbols have a single representation which doesn’t belong to any standard.
These are symbols which by their nature must appear regardless of the standards filter
configured for the workshop.

Figure 2-98: Examples of Symbols with No Named Standard

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-85

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

2.2.3.4 Library Explorer Toolbar

The “Library Explorer” toolbar contains of the following buttons.

Figure 2-99: Library Explorer Toolbar

Command Description
New Library Creates a new library that can be modified by the user

Open Library Opens one of the available libraries, either a standard

library or a custom library.
Save Library Saves the selected custom library.

Close Library Closes the selected library.

Export Library Export the selected library as PRLX format (Automation

Studio™ 6.2 custom library) or CTGX (Automation Studio ™
catalogue).
New Category Creates a category of components in a custom library.

Delete Category Deletes a category of components in the custom library.

This option is only applicable to user-created categories;
categories provided with the Automation Studio™
standard library cannot be deleted.
Locked/Unlocked Locks and unlocks a library which may be password-
Library protected. This option is used to prevent a library from
being accidentally deleted.

If you click on the icon to open a new library, the browser opens a window where
you can select a custom library from amongst the Automation Studio existing libraries.
For a new installation of Automation Studio ™ (6.3 for instance), the standard path is:
C:\ProgramData\Famic Technologies\Automation Studio P6.3\Libraries. For an upgrade
from Automation Studio™ 6.1 to 6.3, the path from 6.1 will be kept:
C:\ProgramData\Famic Technologies\Automation Studio P6.1\Catalogues and Libraries.
Here we find components with older configurations and curves (these libraries contain
the expression “Previous Modeling”) and also some more recent components (these

2-86
 User Interface Description

libraries begin with the word “Manufacturer”). See the figure below:

Figure 2-100: Additional libraries supplied with Automation Studio™

The user can also add components to a custom library by dragging and dropping a
symbol from a schematic to the components area of the library window.

2.2.3.5 Contextual menu – Tree View Zone

In the main library, the contextual menu for the tree-view gives the following options:

Figure 2-101: Contextual Menu – Library area – Main library

Function Description
1 Change the default standard of the workshop.
2 Hide or show the default standard next to the name of the workshop
in the tree-view.
3 Open the “Configuration” dialogue

For custom libraries, the context menu in the tree view of the library explorer provides
the same functions as the toolbar

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-87

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 2-102: Contextual Menu – Library Area – Custom Library

2.2.3.6 Contextual menu – Symbol Area

This contextual menu is available in the component area of the Library Explorer.

Figure 2-103: Contextual Menu – Symbol Area

Function Description
1 Changes the size of the symbols. This function is also available by
clicking on the button located between the tree-view and the
symbol area. This button displays a slider which gives more precise
control over the size of the components.
2 Opens the group of similar components:

3 Shows the help window at the section concerning the Library Explorer

In the case of a custom library, the component’s contextual menu gives the option to
rename or to delete the component.

2-88
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-104: Contextual menu – Component in a Custom Library

2.2.4 Project Explorer

The Project Explorer controls all functions related to the management of opened projects
and their documents. The toolbar and contextual menus make it easy to create, view,
save, send, simulate and print a document.

In multi-user mode, the Project Explorer provides information on the status and uses of
opened projects and documents by the other users. Herein, the term “Team Work” is
used to identify the functions of the multi-users mode. Disregard these functions if only
using the single-user mode.

To view the Project Explorer, click on “Tools”  “Management”  “Project Explorer”, or

press the F8 function key.

2.2.4.1 Project Explorer Zones

Figure 2-105: “Project Explorer” Window

The Project Explorer has 3 zones:

Zone Description
1 Toolbars Access to the frequently used commands. The toolbar
content can be customized.
The and arrows are used to alternate between the

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-89

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Zone Description
two view modes: simple and detailed (see below). On the
right of the status bar, the and icons are used to
open and close the tree view detail.
The Toolbar Commands section below describes the
available commands.
2 Tree View The tree view is used to see the hierarchic structure of the
projects, documents, views, etc. For each of these
elements, the tree view also provides useful information in
the form of icons. (See section Tree View Icons below.)
Right-click on the entity to open a contextual menu that
differs according to the type of the entity. For more
information on the contextual menu, refer to Contextual
menu Commands.
Double-click on the entity to (according to its type):
● Open and close projects, files or documents to
several views.
● Load the selected document.
● Start the simulation with data (see section 8.4.1
Snapshot of a Circuit State).
● Open the plotter with data (See section 8.4.2.4
Measurement Data Management).
The tree view offers two view modes:
● Simple Mode: Only the “Name” column is
displayed.
● Detailed Mode: The columns are displayed. See
section Tree View Columns below.
3 Status Bar The Project Explorer status bar displays certain information
according to the selected entity:

The status bar displays:

● The function mode indicated by an icon (Single
station or client ).
● Server’s name on which Automation Studio™ is
connected (in client mode).

2-90
 User Interface Description

Zone Description
● Connected user’s name.
● Settings’ information for the selected entity. This
information can be selected by user from the
configuration window. (See section 2.2.4.2 Project
Explorer Configuration Window).

 All the entities can be moved or copied in a same project or in a different project
by a Select-Drag-Drop. The copy is done by a Select-Drag-Drop with the CTRL key
pushed.

Toolbar Commands

A right-click on the toolbar displays a contextual menu with the option to change the
commands displayed in the bar. The “Configure” command in the contextual menu opens
the configuration window (See section 2.2.4.2 Project Explorer Configuration Window).

It is also possible to select the commands to be displayed in the toolbar using this
configuration window.

A tooltip associated with the toolbar’s icons offers details about the command.

The button accesses commands not displayed in the toolbar.

The following commands are available in the toolbar:

Command Description
New Project Creates a new project.

Open Project Opens a project.

Update Project Updates the selected project modified by other

(Team Work) users.

Save Project Save the selected project.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-91

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Command Description
Close Project Closes the selected project.

Close All Projects Close all selected projects and ask to save all them
or not.
New Standard Diagram Opens the dialogue box to start a new diagram
model.

New Electrotechnical Opens the dialogue box to start a new

Diagram electrotechnical diagram model, if applicable.

New One-Line Diagram Opens the dialogue box to start a new one-line
electrotechnical diagram model, if applicable.

New Electrotechnical Opens the dialogue box to start a new

Panel Layout electrotechnical panel layout model.

New Connection Diagram Opens the dialogue box to start a new connection
diagram model.

New Sequential Function Opens the dialogue box to start a new SFC model, if
Chart (SFC) applicable.

New Report Opens the dialogue box to start a new report

model.

New Web Page Opens the dialogue box to set parameters for a new
Web Page.

New link to External Opens the dialogue box with options to set the link
Documents to the external document.

Open Documents Opens the selected documents.

2-92
 User Interface Description

Command Description
Update Documents Opens the dialogue box to select documents in the
(Team Work) current project to update that have been modified
outside of Automation Studio™.
Save Documents Open the dialogue box to select and save
documents in the current project.

Close Documents Opens the dialogue box to select and close

documents that have not been modified.

Project and Document Opens the Project and Document Permissions.

Permissions (Team Work)

Project Print Preview Opens the dialogue box to select and preview
documents in the current project.

Print Project Opens the dialogue box to select and print

documents in the current project.

Copy Copies the selection.

Paste Pastes the selection.

Properties Opens the dialogue box of the properties of the

selected element.

Options Opens the set-up dialogue box of the data displayed

in the Project Explorer. (See section 2.2.4.2 Project
Explorer Configuration Window.)

Tree View Icons

Each item has three icons that display the following information:
1. First Icon
● Authorization to simulate the document
● Selection of objects for simulation

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-93

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

2. Second Icon
● Reading/writing authorization
3. Third Icon
● Type of object
● Status of object: open /closed
● Synchronized state in Client mode: up-to-date /not up-to-date
1st Status (Team Work)
Icon
Project/Folder (all documents are selected and authorized for simulation)
Or selected document authorized for the simulation.
Project/Folder (at least one document not selected and all documents
authorized for the simulation)
Or Document not selected and authorized for the simulation.
Project/Folder (at least one document not authorized for the simulation)
Or
Document not authorized for the simulation.

2nd Icon - Status (Team Work)

Open/Closed
Document

/ Does Not Exist Reading and writing not authorized.

/ Reading authorized (writing not authorized).

/ Writing authorized (reading authorized). Document reserved

by another person, Client mode.

/ Writing authorized (reading authorized). Document not

reserved by another person, Client mode.

/ Writing authorized (reading authorized), Single Station

mode.

2-94
 User Interface Description

3rd Icon – Display State Example Description

Grey
Closed Item. Exception : File
Colour
Open Item. Exception : File

3rd Icon – Synchronized State Example Description

Without Icon Single Station

With the Icon Object up-to-date (Team Work)

With the Icon Object not up-to-date (Team Work)

3rd Icon – Object Type (Open) Object

Project

Folder

Document View

Standard Diagram

Multiline Electrotechnical Diagram

One-line Electrotechnical Diagram

Panel Layout Electrotechnical Diagram

Process Diagram

3D Mechanical Diagram

SFC

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-95

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

3rd Icon – Object Type (Open) Object

Report

Web Page

Link to External Document

Data for Simulation Snapshot

Mechanism

Contextual menu Commands

Right-click on an object in tree view to display a contextual menu corresponding to the

selection.

The commands in the contextual menu correspond to the selection. Most of these
commands can also be accessed from the toolbar.

Figure 2-106: Project Contextual menu

The “Send To” command opens an email containing the selected project as an attached
document. Email software must be correctly installed and configured.

2-96
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-107: Document Contextual menu

The “Add Document View” command creates a new view of the document.

Figure 2-108: View Contextual menu

This menu offers the possibility to close a document view. In this example, the view will
continue to exist but it is closed. A document view can also be deleted.

The command “Add a Viewer for this Mechanism” is available only for the contextual
menu of a Mechanism and is used to open a window to view the selected mechanism.

Figure 2-109 : Contextual menu of a Mechanism

Tree View Columns

In detailed mode, the tree view can display different columns, customized by the user:

Right-click on a column header to display the contextual menu and switch to the simple
display (one column only). The “Options” command in the contextual menu opens the
configuration window (see section 2.2.4.2 Project Explorer Configuration Window).

Select columns to display with this configuration window.

 Columns can be moved by drag and drop.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-97

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

 Double-click on the vertical separation of the column to adjust column width.

The following columns are available for display:

Column Description
Read (Team Work) Shows the list of users who have the object open.
Write (Team Work) Shows the list of users who have the object open in
writing (a modification has been done, document has
not been saved).
Simulate (Team Work) Shows the list of users simulating the object.

The rest of the available columns correspond to the properties of the project, the
document, the view, etc.

 If the columns “Write”, “Read”, “Simulation” are selected by the user, they will
only be displayed if Automation Studio is in Client/Server mode. If Automation
Studio™ is in Single Station mode, these columns will not be displayed.

2.2.4.2 Project Explorer Configuration Window

The configuration window is used to set parameters:

● Columns displayed in the document list (Detailed mode).
● Commands displayed in the toolbar.
● Properties displayed in tooltips.
● Attributes displayed in the selected project.
● Attributes displayed in the selected folder.
● Attributes displayed in the selected document.

To access to the configuration window, click on in the toolbar or select the

“Configure” command in the contextual menu displayed with a right click on either the
toolbar or column header.

2-98
 User Interface Description
Using the Configuration Window

Figure 2-110: Project Explorer Configuration Window

The configuration window contains 3 distinct zones:

Zone Description

1 Sections This zone is used to select the objects to configure.

2 Available This zone shows all available elements not selected.
3 Selected This zone shows all the selected elements.

Each section can be modified:

Use the and arrows to move the selected element(s) from the “Available”
to the “Selected” zone, and vice versa.

 To make a multi-selection, use the CAPS and CTRL KEYS.

Use the and double-arrows to move all elements from the “Available” to
the “Selected” zone, and vice versa.

The and arrows are used to move a selected element up or down

respectively.

The and arrows are used to move a selected element in the “Selected”
zone in the upper or lower position respectively.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-99

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Once the configuration is done, activate the command to save and exit the
configurator. Use the command to cancel all modifications.

2.2.4.3 View Management

A document with a standard diagram type can have many views. Views are used to
display different areas of a single diagram without the need to zoom, pan or resize the
window. While the diagram is being drafted, it might be useful to have a unique view,
but when the system is done, the views are the best way to get the global picture of the
system in a snap.

For example, if a system has a hydraulic circuit, electrical command circuit, a control
panel and many animations, create a view for each of the following: the hydraulic circuit
split into functions, the electrical circuit, the control panel and every animation. It is
easier to navigate through these views instead of moving into a single window. The
management of views greatly facilitates the communication and team work among the
project’s contributors.

 View management combined with scripts makes it possible to create various

training scenarios from a single project. Refer to the API’s Guide for further details.

View Creation

When a document with a standard diagram type is created, a document icon with its
name and a sub-document “View1” appears automatically in the Project Explorer tree
view.

Create as many views as needed. To create a view, select “Add View” from the
contextual menu of the document, then a second view with the default name “View2”
will appear.

2-100
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-111: Tree of Views in the “Project Explorer”

View Properties

A view is characterized by the properties that control the appearance of the view (See
section 2.2.2 Properties Window).

Figure 2-112: View Properties Dialogue Box

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-101

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Category Property Description

General Name Assigns a name to the view.
The name of a view must be unique in a
document. The default view name is built using
the prefix “View” and a consecutive number.
However, it can be renamed have more
significance.
View Size Resizing Restriction Sets one of the following attributes:
Attributes
● None: No restriction on stretching for
the resizing of the view.
● Horizontal: The horizontal stretch of
the view is locked.
● Vertical: The vertical stretch of the
view is locked.
● Proportional: The vertical and
horizontal stretching is proportional.
Viewing Zoom and Pan Setting to enable and disable zoom and pan
Attributes functions.
Auto Zoom Setting to enable and disable automatic
proportional zoom of the view window size
regardless of the sizing attributes.
View Display Always on Top Setting to bring the view to the first layer.
Attributes

 If two views have this attribute, the last

one selected will be in front.
Never Maximize Setting to disable maximization of the view
window.

 In a Windows application with multiple

windows, all windows are maximized
when just one is maximized. This might
be inconvenient in some cases.

 Many of these attributes can be modified using a script that displays a control

2-102
 User Interface Description

panel when needed. This makes it possible to use a single project to create
multiple scenarios for training purposes.

2.2.5 Catalogue Manager

Refer to the Catalogue Manager Guide. Famic Technologies Inc. offers its customers to
download manufacturer’s catalogues through its client portal (Technical Support section
of the Automation Studio™ website). These catalogues are accessed from the Catalogue
Manager. Open the Catalogue Manager by the “Home”  “Components” group in the
ribbon.

The Catalogue Manager is a separate and external module of Automation Studio ™, but
can only be launched within this software. For further information on catalogues, refer to
the Catalogue Manager Guide.

2.2.6 Variable Manager

Components of the same technology are grouped together by technological links

(pressure lines, electric wires, etc.). However, the link between two incompatible
technologies is done by using variables (joystick on a valve, mechanical effort on
cylinder, etc.). When creating large projects with multiple diagrams, it is useful to be able
to know status of connections between variables at any given moment.

The Variable Manager is the utility tool that monitors all status communication between
variables and components, regardless of whether they are within Automation Studio™ or
external communication through OPC.

When a component is placed on a diagram, one or more variables associated to the

component behaviour are automatically created. The Variable Manager is used to filter,
modify, view, and link all the variables contained in the active project to OPC elements. It
is also used to create and delete internal variables. These variables are not directly linked
to a component.

To open the “Variable Manager”: Select “Tools” Tab “Management” Group  “Variable
Manager” or press the F12 function key.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-103

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

2.2.6.1 Variable Manager Zones

Figure 2-113: “Variable Manager” Window

The “Variable Manager” is composed of several parts:

Zone Description
1 Toolbar Offers easy access to frequently used commands. The
contents of the toolbar are customizable.
Section Toolbar Commands below describes the available
commands.
2 Variable Management To activate or deactivate:
Tree Zone
 Custom Filters
 Custom filters
 Custom selections
 Custom types
The choice affects the variables shown in the “Variables”
tab.

 Every item under “Custom Filters” has a tooltip

indicating the name and content of the filter.
3 OPC Client The OPC Client management tree corresponds to user’s
Management Tree rights. Refer to OPC Module User’s Guide.
Zone

2-104
 User Interface Description

Zone Description
4 OPC Server The OPC Server management tree corresponds to user’s
Management Tree rights. Refer to OPC Module User’s Guide.
Zone
5 Page Tabs The following tabs are available:
 “Variables” tab: to display the variables.
 “Custom Filters” tab: to manage the custom filters
displayed in the variables management tree zone.
 “Custom Selections” tab: to manage the custom
selections displayed in the variables management tree
zone.
 “Custom Types” tab: to manage the custom types
displayed in the variables management tree zone.
 “OPC Client” tab: refer to OPC Module User’s Guide.
 “OPC Server” tab: refer to OPC Module User’s Guide.
6 Selected Page According to the selected tab.
7 Status Bar Shows the number of found variables, followed by the
number of shown variables.

Toolbar Commands

Right-click on the toolbar to display a contextual menu that can switch the command in
the bar. The “Configure” command in the contextual menu opens the configuration
window (See section 2.2.6.2 Variable Manager Configuration Window).

Choose commands to display in the toolbar using the configuration window.

 A tooltip associated with the toolbar icon provides more details on the command.

 The button provides access to commands that are not displayed in the toolbar.

 The tools may be disabled, depending on the selected object.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-105

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

The commands available in the toolbar are:

Icon Name Description
New Variable Create a new variable.

Delete Variable Delete a new variable.

Import Variables Open an import dialogue box

to import variables.
Export Selected Variables Export selected variables.

Print Preview Displayed Variables Open a screen of how the

displayed variables will
appear when printed.
Print Displayed Variables Print the displayed variables.

Copy Make a copy of the selected

variable.
Paste Insert the copied variable.

New OPC Server Add a new OPC server.

Delete OPC Server Delete the selected OPC

server(s).
New OPC Group Add a new OPC Group.

Delete OPC Group Delete the selected OPC

group(s).
New OPC Item Add an OPC Item.

Delete OPC Item Delete the selected OPC

Item(s).

2-106
 User Interface Description

Icon Name Description

Options Display configuration options.
See section 2.2.6.2 Variable
Manager Configuration
Window.

“Variables” Tab
The Variables tab has 3 zones:

Figure 2-114: “Variables” Tab

Zone Description
1 Filter Zone To filter variables, choose a column in the scroll down
menu, enter a value in the adjacent field, and select one of
the two options.
 “Filter”: filters the list.
 “Mark”: identifies the corresponding variables.
2 Variable List This is a list of the variables that correspond to both the
selections made in the “Variable Manager Tree” zone, as
well as the filter options above.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-107

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Zone Description
3 Details Zone
Display the details of the selected variable.

 Switch the display of the Details Zone by clicking on

the “Hide details”/”Show Details” option at the
bottom of the window.

The choice of columns in the Variable List is customizable: right-click on a column header
to access the contextual menu option to switch the display of a column. The “Configure”
command in the contextual menu opens the configuration window. (See section 2.2.6.2
Variable Manager Configuration Window).

The selection of displayed columns can also be done in the configuration window.

 The columns can be moved by drag-and-drop.

 Double-click on the vertical separation of the column to adjust the width of the
column.

The available columns are:

Name Description
Alias Another name assigned to the variable using any kind of characters.
It can be modified.
Access Indicates whether the variable is in reading only mode , writing
only mode , or reading and writing mode .
Address Address of the variable.
Array Dimensions of the array of the variable.
Dimension
Description Basic description of the variable.
Exported Checkbox to export the variable.
External Link to an external variable (OPC).
Variable Link

2-108
 User Interface Description

Name Description
Internal Link to an internal variable (Assignment between variables that are
Variable Link internal to the project).
Location Location of the variable. It can belong to the project, one of its
document or one of its inserted components.
Measure Measurement of the variable.
Name Name of the variable. It cannot be changed.
The “Name” column displays a tree view of the variables in relation
with the selected filters: custom filters and tool filters. Filters only
apply at the first level.
The name of a type of listed variable is preceded by the icon. The
name of a structured variable or of an array is preceded by the
icon or icon and is displayed in a tree view (there can be several
levels).
Plottable Checkbox to verify whether the variable can be plotted.
Precision Number of decimals to display in the value of the variable.
Style Display format (Decimal, Binary, Hexadecimal, …), for DINT type
variables only.
Type Type of variable (conform to the IEC 1131 norm).
Unit Unit of the given variable.
Value Value of the given variable.
User Translated If this attribute and the customized translation option are selected,
Text Value the variable’s value will be translated according to the existing value
displayed in the table of the translation manager.

 Select multiple variables simultaneously by using the CTRL key to select non-
consecutive items or SHIFT to select consecutive items.

 It is possible to display a selected variable’s corresponding component in the

diagram. To do so, right-click to display the “Follow the link” function.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-109

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

To add a variable: Click on the icon of the toolbar and complete the fields of the
“Add variable” dialogue box.

Figure 2-115: Add Variable Window

Field Description
Type Drop-down menu allowing the selection of the variable’s type.

 A filter exists and is applied by default on the variables’ types.

It allows displaying only three types: « BOOL », « DINT » and «
LREAL » when the user clicks on the arrow of the drop-down
list.
To deactivate the filter in order to be able to see all the types of
variables, the user can simply click on the “More Types” command at
the bottom of the drop-down list.
If the filter is deactivated, the user can click on the “Less Types”
command at the bottom of the drop-down list to reactivate it.
Measure Type Drop-down menu allowing the selection of the variable’s measure
type.
Localization Drop-down menu allowing the selection of the variable’s localization.
Name Field to enter the variable’s name.
Alias Field to enter the variable’s alias.

Once the variable is added, set other parameters in the variable details.

2-110
 User Interface Description

 A new variable is automatically filtered by the active “Custom Filters” and by the
active “Custom Selections” and also by the local filter.

To delete a variable: Select the variable in the “Variables” tab and click .

To modify a variable: Select the variable in the list to access the details of the variable
in Details Zone at the bottom of the window.

“Custom Filters” Tab

Custom filters are used to filter the variables displayed in the “Variables” tab. Once
created, the filter is displayed in the Variables Management Tree View zone and can be
applied.

Figure 2-116: “Custom Filters” Tab

To create a custom filter: Right-click on “Custom Filters” in the Variables management

tree view, and choose “New Filter”.

Figure 2-117: Creation of a New Filter

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-111

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

The filter is created and can be renamed via the contextual menu.

Figure 2-118: Contextual menu of a Filter

The checkbox preceding the custom filter indicates whether the filter is activated or not.

 Filters are cumulative (custom filters + custom selections): it is possible to select

different filters, to obtain a result that takes in consideration the results of the
different filters.

To modify a filter, select it in the Variables management tree view, and go to the
Custom Filters tab.

Click on the button to add a condition to the filter, and modify the filter’s conditions
by the three drop-down menus at the bottom of the screen.

 When adding a new condition, the filter applies the conjunction (“AND”) by default
with the previous conditions. Click on the “AND” to choose another logical
operation.

 Modify an already existing condition by selecting it.

After modifying a filter, activate the “Apply Filter” command to validate.

Delete a filter’s condition by selecting the condition and clicking on .

The “Reset” command deletes all conditions.

“Custom Selections” Tab

The Custom Selections are used to filter the variables displayed in the “Variables” tab.
Once created, the selections are listed in the “Variable Tree View” zone and can be

2-112
 User Interface Description

applied.

 The principle of the Custom Selections is to modify the “Variables” tab to show the
variables of the project that are specific to the needs of the user.

Figure 2-119: “Custom Selections” Tab

To create custom selections:

The procedure is the same as for custom filters:

Right-click on the “Custom Selections” in the variables management tree view, and
choose “New Selections”, etc.

 The “Custom Selections” tab displays all the variables: simply make the
appropriate selections. For multi-selection, use SHIFT and CTRL.

 Once a selection is created, it can be renamed via the contextual menu.

 The checkbox preceding a custom selection indicates whether the selection is

activated or not.

To modify custom selections, select the options in the variables management tree
view, and go the “Custom Selections” tab. Modify the selection of variables.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-113

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide
“Custom Types” Tab

Create custom types of variables: Enumerations, Structures and Arrays. Once created, the
custom type can be used with a variable.

This tab is used to edit the custom type. There is one control per custom variable type.

Figure 2-120: “Custom Types” Tab

To create a custom type, right-click on one of the three types under “Custom Types” in
the Variables management tree view, and choose “New T type…” (T is the type name
that is chosen).

The “Custom Types” tab is displayed automatically:

● To add an identifier to an Enumeration type, click on and modify the

identifier name as well as the constant value.
To delete an Enumeration type identifier, click on the corresponding .
● To add a field to a Structure type, click on and modify the field name as well
as its type.
To delete a Structure type field, click on the corresponding .
● Once an Array type is created, choose its type.
Then, add or delete dimensions via the and buttons, respectively.

Finally, activate the command to accept and validate the new type. This entry will
appear under the appropriate type in the variables management tree view. It can be
renamed via the contextual menu.

2-114
 User Interface Description

Once a custom type is created, it is not possible to modify it.

2.2.6.2 Variable Manager Configuration Window

The configuration window sets the parameters of the Variable Manager. The elements
that can be set are:
● The commands to display in the toolbar.
● The columns to display in the variables list of the “Variables” tab.
● The displayed information in the tooltip appearing when the mouse is on a
variable in the “Variables” tab.
● The displayed attributes in the toolbar.

The icon is used to access the configuration window, if it is displayed in the Variable
Manager toolbar. Otherwise, right-click in the toolbar to choose the “Configure”
command in the contextual menu.

The use of the configuration window is already described in section Using the
Configuration Window.

 In the configuration window, you can for instance add the commands required to
connect to an OPC server.

2.2.6.3 Monitoring Variable Values in Simulation Mode

It is possible to find that a circuit is not behaving as intended. Assuming simulation has
not solved the problem, use the Variable Manager for updates on the state or value of
variables. It will help to identify the components and variables that are not behaving
properly.

To view the variable values:

1. Start simulation.
2. Filter and sort variables, if necessary.
3. Adjust the size of the Variable Manager window as needed.

2.2.6.4 Export/Import Variables

It is possible to export and import variables from the Variable Manager:

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-115

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Importing Variable(s):

1. Click on the (“Import variable(s)”) icon, if it is displayed in the Variable Manager

toolbar; otherwise select it from the contextual menu of the toolbar.
2. A dialogue box opens with choice between the CSV or XML import formats. Select,
and click on the “Next”.

:
Figure 2-121: Variable Importation Dialogue Box
3. Choose the file that contains the variables for importing from the file selection
dialogue box that appears.

Exporting Variable(s):
1. Click on the (“Export variable(s)”) icon, if it is displayed in the Variable Manager
toolbar; otherwise select it from the contextual menu of the toolbar.
2. Follow the steps of the windows that open.

If the icon is grey (by default) , it means that the variables you want to export are not
checked in the list under the column “Exported” . This is mandatory to display the
export tool in blue. The tool is compatible with many extensions for the export.

2.2.7 Accessory Manager

The Accessory Manager is used to create, and manage accessories for standard,
electrotechnical and one-line circuits in every project that is open.

This manager associates accessories to components in a diagram. Accessories can be

represented with or without symbols; accessories without symbols are called “virtual

2-116
 User Interface Description

components”.

To display the Accessory Manager: Choose “Tools” tab  “Management” group 

“Accessory Manager”.

2.2.7.1 Accessory Manager Zones

Figure 2-122: Accessory Manager Window

The Accessory Manager is divided into parts:

Zone Description
Tabs To make sure a complete management of the accessories
in the current project is available, the “Accessory Manager”
contains three tabs:
● “Associations”.
● “Accessories with Symbol”.
● “Accessories without Symbol”.
Tab’s Toolbar Corresponds to the selected tab, offering easy access to the
frequently used commands.

View Accessories Zone Corresponds to the selected tab.

Properties Available only in the “Accessories without Symbol” tab.
Management Zone

The accessories list presented in the window can be updated using the button that is
accessible through the dialogue toolbar.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-117

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide
“Accessories with Symbol” Tab

This tab lists all the components labelled “Accessories” of a project in table form. Each
line is a unique item of the project.

Figure 2-123: “Accessory Manager” Window, “Accessories with Symbol” Tab

Description of the columns:

Column Description
Part Number Value of the accessory’s part number from the
manufacturer.
Catalogue Description The accessory’s description in the manufacturer’s
catalogue.
Identifier Value of the accessory’s identifier.
Document Name of the document where the accessory is located in
the project.
Link Status Indicates with the icon whether the accessory is
connected to a component of the project.

In the toolbar, the delete button ( ) cancels “Accessory” labelling for a component. To
filter the variables, select the column to filter in the drop-down menu, enter a value in
the adjacent field, and then choose one of the two options: “Filter” or “Mark”.

The functions that add, move and create links with the parent components are described
further in section 6.5 Accessories Management.

2-118
 User Interface Description
“Accessories without Symbol” Tab

This tab is used to create and list templates of an accessory without a symbol that can be
used to create copies (instances) that will be linked to components of the project or
linked globally to the project. An accessory model without a symbol will contain basic
properties and may contain customized properties. These properties can be edited at the
bottom of the tab similarly to data of any component.

Figure 2-124: “Accessories Manager”, “Accessories without Symbol”

Description of the columns:

Column Description
Part Number Value of the accessory’s part number from the
manufacturer.
Catalogue Description The accessory’s description in the manufacturer’s
catalogue.
Manufacturer Name of the manufacturer of the accessory.

Toolbar:
Icon Name Description
Add an Accessory model Adds a new template in the list of accessories
without Symbol without symbol.
Delete an Accessory Deletes an item from the list of templates of
without Symbol accessories without symbol.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-119

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Icon Name Description

Copy an Accessory Copies an item to the list of templates of accessories
without Symbol without symbol.
Paste an Accessory Pastes an item from the list of templates of
without Symbol accessories without symbol.
Link an Accessory Adds instances of the selected line in the current
without Symbol project. A copy of the selected accessory without
symbol becomes an instance linked globally to the
project.

“Associations” Tab

This tab comprises a list the associations between the accessories and components of a
project. These are the accessories associated with a parent component (a product or part)
or with an open and active project.

Figure 2-125: “Accessory Manager” Window, “Associations” Tab

Description of the columns:

Column Description
Part Number The accessory component part number.
Catalogue Description The accessory’s description in the manufacturer’s
catalogue.
Identifier Value of the accessory’s identifier.
Symbol Icon representing that the accessory.
Document Name of document in the project where the accessory is

2-120
 User Interface Description

Column Description
located.
Parent Identifier Value of the identifier of parent component linked to the
accessory.
Quantity Total number accessories. For accessories with symbol,
this field cannot be edited. For accessories without
symbols, this field can be edited.
Unit Price Cost price of one unit of the accessory. For accessories
with symbol, this field cannot be edited. For accessories
without symbols, this field can be edited.
Discount (%) Percentage value of the rebate offered on the accessory.
For accessories with symbol, this field cannot be edited.
For accessories without symbols, this field can be edited.

2.2.8 Layers Manager

The Layers Manager is used to create various layers in standard and electrotechnical
diagrams (not available for SFC).

Access the Layers Manager via Ribbon: “Edit”  “Editing”  “Layer Properties” in the
ribbon or press F5.

The creation of layers can be very useful when inserting many elements into a diagram.
It allows the user to define layers according to the different elements’ types. Being able
to activate or deactivate certain layers for simulation provides another tool for validating
system function behaviour.

2.2.8.1 Managing Layers in Editing Mode

Each layer is independent. Selecting one makes it the active layer. Any inserted
component automatically goes onto the active layer.

Also, to increase project flexibility, it is possible to control visibility of layers in simulation

and editing mode.

The Figure 2-126: “Layers” Manager Window shows an example of layers definition. It
shows hydraulic components, drawing objects and text zone layers. It is possible to hide

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-121

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

some layers or even block them for editing considerations, or to facilitate visualization
and manipulation of specific objects.

Here, the “Hydraulics” layer is selected, so it is visible, unlocked and active. It means that
the inserted objects are assigned to this layer. The “Drawings” layer is visible but
protected whereas the “Texts” layer is hidden.

Figure 2-126: “Layers” Manager Window

 By default, the maximum number of layers for each diagram is eight. This number
can be modified in “Project Properties”  “General Standards”  “Layers”.

The following table describes the “Layers” Manager’s different columns:

Zone Description
Active Layer Select the active layer.
Order Change the layers list order with arrows or editing the order
numbers.

 The arrows allow the user to modify the layers

list order. The layers are then automatically renumbered.
 The list order numbers can also be edited manually. The
layers are automatically relocated according to their new
numbers.
Name Name given to the layer. Each layer’s name must be unique.
Visible Indicates whether the layer is visible or invisible. .

Select the checkbox to make the corresponding layer visible.

If a layer is invisible, it cannot be printed or exported.

2-122
 User Interface Description

Zone Description
Locked Indicates whether the layer is locked or not.

Select the checkbox to lock the corresponding layer.

It is not possible to select, insert or modify elements on a locked

layer.

Simulated Option to select or deselect the layer(s) to be simulated.

The user can perform certain operations from the toolbar:

Figure 2-127 Toolbar of the Layer Manager

Command Description
Add a new layer.

Delete a layer after selecting it.

Select the components of the active layer.

Move the selected layer up and renumber it according to its new

location.
Move the selected layer down and renumber it according to its
new location.
Access to options. This command opens the layers section of the
project properties.
Edit Title Block layers

 This command is available only if a title block is present in

the page setup standards.

A layer can be searched with a filter:

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-123

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 2-128 Search a Layer with a Filter

The user can filter according to the layer’s name, order or description.

Only layers that matches the filter are displayed in the list for the user to quickly visualize
it.

Clicking on any of the column headers (Name, Order, Description) sorts the layers by that
column. Furthermore, if the layers are sorted by a column and an attribute is modified in
this column, the list is automatically reordered.

Option “Preserve links and Detect Connectors”

Selecting the option “Preserve links and Detect Connectors” allows the user to connect in
editing mode components located on unlocked layers with components located on locked
layers.

This option is also used to keep the connection between components. If it is not selected,
connected components located on locked and unlocked layers will be disconnected when
displaced.

 This option is deactivated by default. Please make sure to select it in the project
properties if needed (General Standards → Layers → Edition)

2-124
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-129 Option "Preserve Links and Detect Connectors"

2.2.8.2 Placing an Element onto a Layer

When placing an element, either from the library or from another diagram, make sure
the desired layer is activated and unlocked before placing the element onto the diagram.

If the element is already on the diagram and you want to place it onto another layer, you
can simply select it and drag-and-drop it directly onto the layer manager on the desired
layer.

Figure 2-130 Drag-and-Drop to another Layer

 Make sure that the target layer is not locked.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-125

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

To move elements from one layer to another, there are three methods:
● Using Drag-and-Drag as shown above. The layer must not be locked or invisible.
● Using Cut-Paste: Cut the component (CTRL + X), select the desired layer in the
layer manager, click on an empty zone in the diagram and paste the component.
The layer must not be locked or invisible.
● Open the “Component Properties” dialogue box of a component or group, and go
to “Displayed Information”. The layers can be selected and modified in the drop-
down menu.

 If components that belong to different layers are grouped, the group and all its
components then belong to the active layer. If they are ungrouped, each
component returns to its initial layer. The satellites, which are the displayable
properties of a component, belong to the same layer as its corresponding
component.

2.2.8.3 Using Layers in Simulation Mode

Layers Simulation

Any layers for which the “Simulation” attribute is not selected will be hidden during
simulation and the simulator will not consider the components on these layers. When the
simulation has terminated, the visibility will revert to its previous state.

Selecting the option “Allow Setting of Components in Simulation” makes available the
setting of component properties in simulation, even though this component is on a
locked layer. The cursor placed over the component takes the form of a hand.

This option can be activated and deactivated in the project properties → General
Standards → Layers → Simulation.

2-126
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-131: Option "Allow Setting of Components in Simulation"

Layers Variables

Each layer, when created, generates a visible Boolean variable (“Hidden Layer1”, “Hidden
Layer2”, …) in the variable manager. These variables are “True” when the corresponding
layers are visible. They are compatible with all Boolean variables and can therefore be
used in simulation: for example, objects can be placed on a layer which can be visible or
invisible according to specific events.

 The layers manager can be useful for training purposes.

 Layer management (creation, deleting, editing of name or description, locking or

unlocking of layer) is disabled in simulation mode.

2.2.9 Translation Manager

Important aim of Automation Studio™ is to minimize the documents and projects’

duplication within the same system along one project’s life cycle. Documents of a system
often need to be translated into other languages. The Translation Manager allows you to
define and translate the texts displayed on a diagram or used in the project in other
languages, to afterward switch the display language of the same project in one click as
needed.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-127

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

 These languages are not related to the available interface languages of

Automation Studio™; their management is fully independent.

 The Translation Manager handles all user displayable texts in a project (tooltips
and properties).

The texts management and their display language can be defined via the “Translation
Manager” located in the “Tools” Tab → “Management” Group.

Figure 2-132:“Translation Manager” in the “Tools” Tab

The Translation Manager is used to manage the translations of texts displayed in multiple
languages and save them to a local dictionary within a project. The texts can be also

saved into the global database and reused in other projects.

First Steps

In order to be able to translate the desired texts in other languages, the best practice is
to follow these few steps:
1. Make sure that the checkbox in the Translation Manager is active;

Figure 2-133 : Enable User Translations in a Project

2. Select your input language in the languages list (See “Languages” Tab );
3. When typing a new text that needs to be translated, activate the user translated text
or the “User Translated Alias” option;

2-128
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-134 : Example of User Translated Text and Alias Option in Component Properties
4. Click on the text value, and then click out of the box. This manipulation will add the
term to the translation table and see suggestions of existing translated texts;

Figure 2-135: Text Validation

5. Create desired languages in the language list (in the translation manager);
6. Translate the texts in the “Translations” Tab;
7. Modify the display language as needed.
8. Synchronize the new translations with the User Translation Database to reuse them
in future projects.

This way it is possible to create a project’s dictionary and, if needed, import its content to
other dictionaries or to the global User Translation Database.

Thus the Translation Manager allows to transfer the translations:

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-129

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

● From one entity to another (projects, documents, forms etc.);

● From one entity to the global database and vice versa.

 To use the Translation Manager, texts should have already been entered by the
user.

User translation database

The User Translation Database is a global dictionary in which the translations from
different projects’ dictionaries can be integrated. The opposite is also possible: the user
can transfer translations from the global database to a specific project, reusing this way
the previous translations and not having to redo the work each time.

Translation manager global toolbar commands

Figure 2-136 : Translation Manager Global Toolbar Commands

These commands are used to save, synchronize and transfer translations from a database
to another.
Symbols Name Description
Save database This button allows saving the User Translation
Database. Once the latest changes have been
saved, the icon turns grey: .
Synchronize database In the case that the Global Translation Database is
located on a network drive or it is remote. This
button allows synchronizing the User Translation
Database with the local project database.
Transfer Dictionaries This button allows transferring a database. It
opens the window Figure 2-137: Database
Transfer Window where the user can choose
which database is the source and which is the
target one.
Import Dictionary This button allows importing a database from a
.csv file.

2-130
 User Interface Description

Symbols Name Description

Export Dictionary This button allows exporting a database to a .csv
file.

 When importing or exporting a .csv file is needed, in order to preserve the special
characters the .csv file needs to be coded in Unicode format.

 When saving a file as .csv in Microsoft Excel a Unicode format file is not created by
default. The user has to save the file as “Unicode Text”, and then modify manually
the .txt extension to .csv.

Source and Target Selection

Figure 2-137: Database Transfer Window

In this window, the source and target database are defined to transfer the selected
terms. The following combinations are:
● Transfer from a local project database to the global User Translation Database;
● Transfer from the global User Translation Database to a local project;
● Transfer between two project databases.

Once the source and target databases are defined, the translation processing transfer
table opens.

Translation Processing Transfer Table

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-131

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 2-138 : Translation Processing Transfer Table

 Note that the pink colour indicates a difference between the source and target
dictionary terms. In the example above, all terms are highlighted in pink because
they do not exist in the destination dictionary.
Zone Name Description
1 Search and filter Allows to search and filter in the language
selected via the button.
The drop-down menu
determines the comparison language. Depending
on the selected language, the diagnostic will
return different results.

The command opens the list of available

languages to show or hide their column.

 All the visible columns will be transferred

while hidden languages won’t be
transferred.

2-132
 User Interface Description

Zone Name Description

2 Operation This column displays the chosen action (see point
5):
● the term and its translations will be
added to the target dictionary;

● the term and its translations in the

target dictionary will be modified with
the source dictionary term;

● no action will be performed.

3 Status This column allows to manage synchronisation
problems:

● the red icon means it is impossible

to transfer the term

● the yellow icon means the term is

duplicated. The user can then choose the
action to perform.
● By clicking on the icon, the user can
ignore the conflict and accept the action,
the icon will then become .

 The user can proceed with the

synchronisation even though warnings
remain.
4 Link This column informs the user about the
association between the term in the source and
the target dictionary.
5 Operation on term and The following actions can be performed on a term
its translations and its existing translations:
● Add a new term to the target dictionary
;

● Modify target term from source ;

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-133

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Zone Name Description

● No operation .
6 Operation on one cell The following actions can be performed on one
specific cell:
● Update target text from source text;
● Keep target text.
The user can decide if the target text has to be
replaced by the source one or will be kept as it is.
7 Legend The mark on a cell means it is the first
inserted text or the one used as reference for
other translations (see “Reference language” in
the “Translations” Tab section).
Pink colour indicates a difference between
the source and target dictionary terms.
Green colour indicates that the action has
been modified by the user.
8 Apply The button apply approves the transfer
process and run the term transfer to the
destination dictionary.

“Languages” Tab

In the translation manager “languages” tab, the user can enable or disable different
translation languages and choose which are the input language and the display language
depending on the case.

2-134
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-139: Languages Manager

Zone Name Description
1 Language list Listed languages can be enabled or disabled
using the checkbox.
The input and display languages are defined
here.
2 Identification Details about the selected language (type, name,
native name, code and alias).
3 States Status of the selected language.

The input language is the language under which all new terms will be placed and is
automatically defined as reference language for them. The tool uses this language while
the user is typing to search if the new text already exists in the user translation database
or in the local dictionary. If any correspondence is found, the input control will suggest it
to the user in order to minimize the work needed for translation.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-135

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 2-140 : Input Language and Similar Terms while Creating a New Term

The display language is the language in which texts will appear on the diagram. It gives
the user the possibility to change the project visualisation language. To display the same
project in a different language select the corresponding mark under the “Display
language” column.

The toolbar is used to add a new language ( ), or to delete an existing language (

). It also contains controls to filter or mark listed languages.

“Translations” Tab

Figure 2-141: “Translations” Tab in the Translation Manager

Once the languages are defined, the translation table under the “Translations” tab shows

2-136
 User Interface Description

a column for each language. In this table, translations can be inserted and modified. The
mark appears on the term called “reference language”. The right pannel allows to
identify where in the project a term is used: it has to be resyncronized to find all the
present associations.

The reference language is by default the input language when the text was first
entered into a dictionary. It is meant to represent the best text to use as reference for
translations.

It is possible to modify the reference language by selecting the checkbox “reference

language” in the details section at the bottom of the window for a selected cell. This
way, it will become the new reference text:

Figure 2-142 : Changing Reference Language

Supported Texts

Text objects supported by the Translation Manager are as follows:

Name Location Description
Properties “Data” Branch of a components Only text, alias and hyperlinks can be
and documents translated and sent to the translation
table.
Text Object “Home” Tab  “Drawing” Group All the text in the box can be sent to
(Text box) the translation table.
Field Object “Home” Tab “Drawing” Group The field value (text only) can be sent
to the translation table.
HMI Text “Text” Branch of all CAD objects
Object from the Home Tab, Drawing

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-137

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Name Location Description

Group
HMI “Hyperlink” Branch of all CAD The hyperlink value and its description
Hyperlinks objects from the Home Tab, can be sent to the translation table.
Drawing Group Launch different files according to the
selected language.
Sound Library – HMI and Control Panels The file path value and its description
Object* Workshop Control  Signaling can be sent to the translation table.
Devices  Buzzer. Launch different files according to the
selected language.
MMI Library – HMI and Control Panels The displayed label can be sent to the
numeric Workshop Measuring translation table.
display Instruments  MMI numeric
box* display box.
Component “Home” tab ”Component Select the user translated value check
tooltips tooltip” group box.
Accessories “Tools” tab  “Management” The catalogue description can be
description group ”Accessory manager” added to the translation table.
* Must have HMI and Control Panel license to access this function.

2.2.9.1 Using the Translation Manager for the Title Block

Use the following procedure to use the translation manager in the title block:

When creating the title block:

1. Create the title block for the project;
2. Add the terms to the translation manager using the sequence explained in the First
Steps;
3. Transfer the terms used in the title block to the Global Translation Database;

 The previous step (number 3) is very important; it has to be done before

transferring the page setup standard containing the title block to the enterprise
standards database.
4. Transfer the page setup standard containing the title block to the enterprise

2-138
 User Interface Description

standards database.

Using translations within the title block:

1. Select the page setup standard containing the title block in the new project, all the
terms utilized in the title block will be added automatically to the project translation
database;
2. When the terms are not part of the global translation database, the user will have to
edit the title block to add the term to the translation manager.

2.2.10 Communication Manager

The communication Manager is a tool used to manage interactions between Automation

TM
Studio features (Components, SFC variables, blocks diagram, set point devices, ...) and
an external device (PLC, CANbus components, ...) using required resources (OPC Server,
OPC Client, CANbus Communication).

Managing links and communication protocols is possible from the ribbon bar “Tools” tab,
“Management” group and by clicking on “Communication Manager”.

Figure 2-143: Access "Communication Manager" command

The communication manager allows the user to configure functions related to the
communication protocol to create interactions between external devices and application
TM
functions of Automation Studio .

Step by Step

Here are a few steps to select a communication protocol :

1. Select the « Tools » tab from the ribbon bar;

2. Click on “Communication Manager”;

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-139

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 2-144 : "Communication Manager" command

3. The communication manager window gives access to the communication

protocols available, according to your license inclusions;

Figure 2-145 : "Communication Manager" dialog

4. The “OPC Client” Tab allows to access to the configuration functions of an OPC
Client;

 All information related to functions configuration of an OPC Client are accessible in

“OPC Workshop” User’s Guide.

2-140
 User Interface Description

5. Click on “OPC Server” tab to access the OPC Server configuration functions;

Figure 2-146 : "OPC Server" tab

 All information related to functions configuration of an OPC Server are accessible in

“OPC Workshop” User’s Guide.

6. Click on “CANJ1939” to access to configuration functions of a CANbus J1939 link;

Figure 2-147 : "CAN J1939" tab

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-141

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

 All information related to functions configuration of a CANbus J1939 link are

accessible in “CANbus J1939 Workshop” User’s Guide.

7. Click on the arrow next to “CAN J1939” branch to open the communication tree;

Figure 2-148 : "CAN J1939" communication tree

8. Click on the arrow next to “OPC Client” in the upper left corner of the window to
reduce the communication tree;

Figure 2-149 : "OPC Client" communication tree

9. Click on the upper left corner arrow to hide all communications tree;

2-142
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-150 : Display/Hide communication tree

10. Click again on the upper left corner arrow to expand all communications tree
again;

11. Move the central slider to enlarge or reduce the size of the communications tree
in the window;

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-143

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 2-151 : Resizing communication tree sections

12. Move the horizontal sliders to resize the sections of communications tree.

Figure 2-152 : Communication tree sections layout

2.2.11 Display of Pictures

There are pictures for various hydraulic, pneumatic and electrotechnical components in
the main library. The image window displays these images both in edit and simulation

mode. Open the window via “Tools”  “Viewer”  “Photo” , or use the F4 key.

2-144
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-153: Picture Window

Zone Description
Title Displays the number of the displayed image / number of the
images, and the name of the component.
View by Click When this button is active, simply left-click on the desired
component to view its image. As long as the component
remains selected, and provided that an image is linked to it,
the image window remains open.
View by When this button is active, simply place the mouse cursor
Hovering over the desired component to view its image. If no image
is linked to the component, the window soon disappears.
Previous Displays the previous image, provided that it exists.

Next Displays the next image, if it exists.

Display Image zone. If an image does not exist, this window does
not appear.

2.2.12 Message Explorer

This window gives a list of events for the user to gain information about the totality of
errors occurred.

To open this window, go to “Tools”  “Management”  “Message Explorer” in the

ribbon, or press F7.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-145

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 2-154: Error Messages in the Message Explorer

If the Message Explorer is not open in Automation Studio ™ and an error occurs during
Simulation, a red flag blinks in the ribbon. A dynamic windows pops up also
automatically when the software finds some errors.

Figure 2-155: Dynamic Warning Window

These errors may appear as warnings (alerts). For example, if components are not
connected when the simulation is launched, the message window will show the numbers
of the free ports causing the error in the simulator. A list of all the components
concerned appears in the message window.

The message window displays the diagnostics results launched from the tab of each
technology. Refer to each specialized workshop guide.

 Double-click on the appropriate row to launch the display of the component in the
diagram.

2.2.12.1 Message Explorer Zones

The Message Explorer contains different zones:

2-146
 User Interface Description

Figure 2-156: Error Messages Window

Zone Description
1 Toolbar Offers easy access to the frequently used commands. The
content of the toolbar can be customized.
The Toolbar Commands section below describes the
available commands.
2 Logs Tree View List of logs. This zone can be hidden or displayed using the
and buttons, respectively.
3 List of Messages List of messages, errors and warnings.

Click on a line in the list of messages to view the concerned

component in the diagram.

4 Status Bar Displays the number of filtered and marked messages. To

filter the messages, choose the column to filter in the drop-
down menu, enter a value in the adjacent field, and then
select one of the two options:
 “Filter”: to filter the list.
 “Mark”: to highlight the variables satisfying the entered
criteria.

The message window is simple to use. Advanced functions are available when working
in Team Work mode.

Toolbar Commands

Right-click on the toolbar to prompt a contextual menu to switch the display of a

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-147

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

command in the toolbar. The “Configure” command in the contextual menu opens the
configuration window. (See section 2.2.12.2 Message Explorer Configuration Window).

Select the commands to appear in the toolbar via this configuration window.

 A tooltip associated with the toolbar icons gives more details on the command.

 The button is a drop-down menu of the commands that are not displayed in the
toolbar.

The following commands are available in the toolbar:

Icon Attributes Description
Open log Command to open the logs.

Close log Command to close the logs.

Delete all events Command to delete the list of messages.

Options Command to open the Options settings dialogue

box. See section 2.2.12.2 Message Explorer
Configuration Window.

List of Messages

The header of the list of messages window can be used to filter the messages: choose
the column to filter in the drop-down menu, enter a value in the adjacent field, and then
select one of the two options:
● “Filter”: to filter the list.
● “Mark”: to highlight the messages satisfying the entered criteria.

The choice of columns in the list of messages can be customized: by right-clicking on a

head of a column, a contextual menu appears with the option to switch the display of a
column. The “Configure” command in the contextual menu opens the configuration
window. (See section 2.2.12.2 Message Explorer Configuration Window).

Choose the columns that will appear in the toolbar via this configuration window.

 The columns can be moved by drag-and-drop.

2-148
 User Interface Description

 Double-click on the vertical separation of the column to automatically adjust the

column width.

Each message contains the attributes described in the following table:

Attribute Description
Event ID Displays the message’s unique identification number.
Description Displays the message description.
Date/Time Displays the date and time the message event appeared.
Log Displays the log name from where the message is extracted.
Type Displays the type of message: warning or error in editing or
simulation mode.
Username Displays the username to whom the event is related.

Status Bar
Attribute Description
Nb events Displays the total number of events in the list.
Nb Filtered Events Displays the number of filtered events in the list.

2.2.12.2 Message Explorer Configuration Window

The Configuration Window is used to set the parameters of the message window. The
elements to configure are:
● The columns of the list of messages.
● The commands displayed in the toolbar.
● The items displayed in the status bar.

To access the configuration window, click on the icon, if it is visible in the messages
window toolbar. Otherwise, choose the “Configure” command (available when right-
clicking on the toolbar).

The use of the configuration window is described in the section Using the Configuration
Window.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-149

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

2.2.13 Steady State Settings

With the “Steady State Settings”, it is possible to automatically trigger a snapshot

according to specified criteria. This data can be used to restart a simulation in a saved
state. This data can also be exported for analysis purposes. (Refer to Hydraulics &
Pneumatics Workshops User’s Guide).

2.2.14 Failure Builder

When the design and drafting of a circuit is done and the system is put into work, it can
be useful to evaluate consequences of some failures on selected components. In fact, it
is possible to create failures and analyse the effects on the system with the available
failure builder module in Automation Studio™.

Two types of failures exist for a component:

● Specific failures: These failures already exist in the component; for example, a
motor with a blocked rotor.

 Specific failures can be configured, however it is not possible to create or delete

them.
● Generic failures: These failures can be applied to any component of the same
technology; for example, a leak or a short-circuit between two connectors of a
component. It is possible to add, set or delete generic failures.

A failure is usually defined by the following attributes:

Attribute Comment Example
Declared This is a Boolean variable that makes the failure
Failure available or not during simulation. The failure as to be
declared and then activated.
Failure A brief description is given. The description of a External leak
Choice generic failure can be modified.
Failure A Boolean variable that defines the failure. The name
Activated cannot be modified.
Variable The alias is the name of the variable that can be Port Leak 1
Alias modified.

2-150
 User Interface Description

Attribute Comment Example

Fluid Parameters are directly dependent on the failure type. 0.1 l/min/bar
Parameter
Port Parameters are directly dependent on the failure type. Port 1
Association

When failures are declared in a component, there are three ways to activate them during
simulation:

Manually, by defining and activating the failure from the component properties dialogue
box.

By setting the variable to TRUE in a SFC diagram, control panel or any command
workshop. This is used to create failure activation scenarios for specific systems.

Automatically, when a limit value is reached – knowing that a failure usually occurs
when a parameter limit is exceeded (e.g. If a maximum pressure (P max) is reached on a
component connection port 1, then an external leak is triggered on port 1). For this
automatic failure trigger, the global automatic failure (project) or local automatic failure
trigger (component) option needs to be activated.

 The automatic failure trigger does not require the “Failure activated” option to be
set to TRUE.

In the main library, most of the fluid power and electrotechnical components have a
Troubleshooting branch that can be accessed from the component properties dialogue
box. Specific failures are already defined, but generic failures must be manually added.

This dialogue box is used to create, declare and set failures for a component.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-151

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 2-157: Failure Dialogue Box

Zone Description

1 Add Failure Adds or deletes generic failures.

Command
2 List Lists existing failures for this component. A failure must be
selected and declared from this table.
3 Visual Visual depiction about the failure’s main effect on the
Description component according to the selection made from zone 2.
4 Failure Field to edit the failure parameters according to the selection
Parameters made from zone 2.
The alias can be renamed. The parameter values can be
modified. Failures can be activated for the next simulation start.

2-152
 User Interface Description

Zone Description

5 Automatic The list of properties in this zone is used to trigger the working
Failure Trigger limits of the component at different levels. Selecting one or
many of these properties for the failure will automatically
trigger the failure if the limits are exceeded.
“Failure local activation” is used to automatically trigger the
failure for this component. This checkbox must be selected in
order to locally implement the automatic failure trigger.
The local checkbox can be overridden by the “Global automatic
failure” option, which will activate all the automatic failure
triggers if at least one item in the automatic failure trigger
parameter is checked and the failure is defined.

 Creating a failure does not necessarily make it active in the component or

accessible in simulation. To be able to activate a failure, it needs to be declared.

The “Global automatic failure” trigger option can be activated from the Automation
TM
Studio menu  “Project”  “Project Properties” and go to the section “Project”
 “Properties”  “Simulation” section  “Automatic Failure”.

2.2.14.1 Failure Management

A diagnostic utility tool has been created to easily find which components have defined
failures while editing. This tool provides a list of the components with one or more
failures defined. For each component, each defined failure is shown in the list indicating
if the failure is going to be activated at simulation start. The components listed are
shown in colour with a hyperlink (the Message window provides access).

To access the diagnostic utility tool, go to the “Fluid” or “Electrotechnical” tab 

Diagnosis.

2.2.14.2 Generic Failure Creation

When creating a generic failure using the command, a configuration dialogue box
opens. There are between 1 and 4 types of failures to choose from, depending on the

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-153

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

selected component. For fluid power components, these types are: internal leak, external
leak, restrictive port, blocked port. For electrotechnical components these types are:
internal electrical leak, external electrical leak, restricted connection, severed connection.

 The type “internal leak” is only possible when the passage is supposed to be
blocked.

 The type “external leak” is only possible when there is normally no leak out of the
component under normal operating conditions.

 The types “restrictive port”, “restricted connection”, “blocked port” or “severed

connection” are only possible when the passage is supposed to be open.

Figure 2-158: “Generic Failure” Configuration Dialogue Box

Zone Description
1 Failure Choice Selection of a failure type.
2 Failure Editing the selected failure parameters.
Parameters The alias can be renamed. The parameter values can be
modified.
3 Port Sets the association with the port(s) where the failure is
Association implemented.
Applies the changes and transfers the newly created failure into
the existing failures list.

2.2.15 Standards Transfer

The working standards are used to modify some options of a project. By sharing

2-154
 User Interface Description

standards within the company, there is a common ground and standard operation
concerning drawing rules, components and document naming, etc.

The “Standards Transfer” dialogue box is used to transfer standards from one project to
another or, from a project to the Enterprise Standard Data Base.

It is also possible to delete standards in this dialogue box.

To access this dialogue box, activate the following command: “Tools”  “Administration”
 “Standards Transfer”:

Figure 2-159: “Standards Transfer” Dialogue Box

To transfer a standard from a source project towards a destination project, proceed

as follows:

 To be able to proceed to the transfer, the source and destination projects must be
opened in Automation Studio™. To transfer a standard towards the Standard
Enterprise Data Base, only the source project must be opened.
1. In the left part of the dialogue box, explore the tree view to identify and select the
standard to transfer (only the standards included by the license are displayed).
2. In the “Source” drop-down menu, choose the project containing the standard.
3. In the “Destination” drop-down menu, choose the project towards which to transfer
the standard. Choose “Enterprise Options” to transfer the standard towards the
Standard Enterprise Data Base.
4. The list appearing in the “Source” drop-down menu displays the names of the
different standards that can be transferred. Select those to transfer, then activate the
“Copy the selection” command.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 2-155

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

A project can contain different standards with the same name. However, if the
destination project already contains a standard with the same version number, a
dialogue box will open asking to confirm the replacement of the destination standardTo
delete a standard from a project, proceed as follows:
1. Select the standard to delete in the tree view of the dialogue box.
2. In the “Destination” drop-down menu, choose the project from which to delete the
standard. Choose “Enterprise Options” to transfer the standard towards the Standard
Enterprise Data Base.
3. The list appearing under the “Destination” drop-down menu displays the names of
the different standards that can be deleted. Select the one to delete, then activate
the “Delete” command.

 The deletion of a standard is not possible if this standard is already in use in the
destination project.

2-156
3 Common Commands of the Dialogues
This chapter presents the common commands which are located in the different
dialogues and wizards and are used to create or configure specific functions. They can
also be found in some of the Pop-up Windows.

 Note that this chapter does not present the common commands of components,
documents, reports, views, projects or application properties dialogues. For more
details on the properties dialogues, please refer to chapter 2.2.2 Properties
Window.

Figure 3-1 Software Assistant Dialogue for Common Commands

© Famic Technologies Inc. 3-1

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Zone Command Description

1 Allows to open the current dialogue’s help.

2 Allows to close the current dialogue and exit the

wizard without finishing the task.
3 Reset Allows to find the default values of the current
dialogue’s options.

 Some wizards’ dialogues do not have this

command.
4 Back Allows to cancel current dialogue’s configuration
and bring the user to the previous dialogue of
the wizard.

5 Next > Allows to validate current dialogue’s

configuration and bring the user to the next
dialogue.

6 Cancel Allows to cancel the current dialogue and exit

the wizard without finishing the task.

Some wizards’ dialogues do not have this

command.

Some dialogues containing tree-like structured information may have commands for
controlling the dialogue’s information display.

3-2
 Common Commands of the Dialogues

Figure 3-2 Tree-like Structure Display Control in a Wizard

Zone Description
Allows to hide the information under the command.
Allows to show the information under the command.

 When there is a lot of information or options in a dialogue, horizontal or vertical

scroll bars may be displayed to facilitate access to information.

 Generally, wizards’ dialogues can be resized.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 3-3

4 Creation and Management of a Project
This chapter explains how to create and manage projects within the Project Explorer.

This chapter covers the following topics:

● Management of projects, which are the files created by Automation Studio™ and
of their associated documents.
● Management of documents from a project.
● Project Properties.

4.1 Project Management

A project is saved into a file and the extension of this file is .prx. This file can be handled
(copy, rename, save) as any other file in the Windows environment.

 For the versions preceding Automation Studio ™ 5.6, the file extension of the
project files is .pr5 or .pr4.

4.1.1 Creating a New Project

To create a new project, choose the menu  “New Project”, choose the desired
template or choose “None” if none of the available templates correspond.

A new project identical to the selected template is created, and opens on the screen as
well as in the Project Explorer. By default, a name is assigned to the project; this name
may be modified by those who have these rights. In addition, the software includes a
blank diagram within the new project.

 Documents can be now added to the new project. For more details on how to
manage diagrams, refer to section 6 Elements within a Diagram.

4.1.2 Opening

To open a project, choose the menu “Open Project…”.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-1

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

 It is possible to open other file types as can be done with an Automation Studio™
project file. In the menu “File type”, there is a list of all the supported file types.

Figure 4-1: Supported File Type by Automation Studio™

Extension Description
.pr4, .pr5 and .prx Original format of the different Automation Studio ™ versions:
.pr4 for versions 4, .pr5 for versions 5 and from the 6.0
version: .prx.
.backup, .autosave Backup: extension of the file created when openning a
project if the option has been activated.
Autosave: extension of the file created when auto-saving a
project if the option has been activated.
.pj Extension of the file corresponding to the project’s template.
.pkx Extension of files exported by Moduflex valve builders
(Parker).
.dxf Drawing file in .dxf format.
.hfx Extension of files exported by I-Design valve builders
(Hydraforce).
.hix Extension of files exported by Easy Valve valve builders
(Comatrol).
.cdsx Extension of files exported by CDS Studio Project (Eaton).
.chx Extension of files exported by Oil Control Choose Projects
(Bosh Rexroth).

4-2
 Creation and Management of a Project

4.1.3 Save a Project

When a project is created, it is given a default name (according to the current standard),
but it is not yet saved in any specific directory. When at least one component is added to
the new project diagram, then this project can be saved for the first time.

An existing project can be saved with a new name and put into another directory.

4.1.3.1 New Project .prx

To save the new project:

1. From the “Project Explorer”, display the project contextual menu (right-click on
project name).
2. Select “Save Project…” to save the name/location by default.

OR
1. Select “Save Project As” to modify the name or the project location.

The same saving commands are offered in the following menu: “Project”.

4.1.3.2 Saving a Derived File

To save a project generated by Automation Studio ™ and use it with Automation Studio™
Simulation, choose the .asr file extension. This file can only be opened with an
Automation Studio™ SIMULATION version with the same version (or previous version) as
the one in which the project has been created.

The files generated by Automation Studio™ and Automation Studio™ Design are
compatible.

The following figure summarizes saved file compatibility between derived Automation
Studio™ files.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-3

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 4-2: Saved File Compatibility

4.1.3.3 Saving a Template

Many project and diagram templates are offered by default with Automation Studio™.

However, if you frequently use the same project structures, diagram elements or
information in the reports, it is possible to build customized document and project
templates based on individual needs.

In order to ensure that all templates remain accessible, it is important to save them in
the …\Template directory of Automation Studio ™. The default path for this directory can

be set from the menu  “Automation Studio Options”.

The project template consists of a specific structure of preconfigured documents as well

as customized property fields.

To open a template: open a file with the extension .pj from  “Open Project…”

To save a project template: The project itself must be active.

1. Activate the command:  “Project”  “Save Template As”, and then enter a
name for the template.
2. Click on the “Save” button to validate.
3. A project template with the former name is created with the .pj extension.

4-4
 Creation and Management of a Project

4.1.4 Print and Print Preview

To print more than one document in the current project:

Figure 4-3 Access to Print Options through Automation Studio™ Menu

1. Choose menu “Print”  “Print…” (CTRL + P by default) and select the

documents you wish to print by checking their corresponding checkbox.

 To print the entire project, check the project box. The document checkboxes are
automatically selected.
2. Click on “Ok”.
3. Define printing options.

The same print command is offered in the project’s contextual menu, in the Project
Explorer.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-5

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 4-4 Print Options from the Project's Explorer

To preview a document in a project:

1. Choose menu  “Print”  “Print Preview…” and check the box of the
documents to preview.
2. Click on “Ok”.

Figure 4-5: “Item for Print Preview and Print” Dialogue Box

To preview the complete project, check the project box. The documents checkboxes are
automatically selected.

4-6
 Creation and Management of a Project

The same print preview command is offered in the project’s contextual menu, in the
project explorer.

4.1.5 Print Preview Page

The print preview page is now open. The pages of the selected document(s) are
displayed.

Figure 4-6 Print Preview of the Selected Document

In the ribbon, you find the usual options to modify the display and navigate across the
document’s pages. Choose the page you wish to print and click on “Print”.

Figure 4-7 Print Preview Ribbon

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-7

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

To exit the “Print Preview” window, click on the button or use the ESC key.

4.1.6 Send To Project

TM
To send the current project: Click on Automation Studio menu  “Send To” and
fill in the information to send along with the project.

The same “Send to” command is offered in the project’s contextual menu, in the Project
Explorer.

The email program must be installed and configured.

4.1.7 Closing a Project

TM
To close a project: Click on Automation Studio menu “Project”“Close
Project”.

If no modification has been made since the project was last saved, the software just
closes the current project. Otherwise, a message appears asking to save the
modifications.

 Selecting “No”, closes the project. The most recent modifications are lost.

When closed, the project is no longer visible in the Project Explorer.

The same closing command is offered in the project’s contextual menu, in the Project
Explorer.

TM
To close all projects : Click on Automation Studio menu “Project”“Close all
Projects”.

If no modification were made since the last save for all opened projects, then the
software closes all projects. If any of the project contains modifications, a message is
displayed asking to save the projects or not.

When a project is closed, it disappears from the project explorer list.

4-8
 Creation and Management of a Project

The same command is offer in the project explorer tools bar.

4.1.8 Exit the Application

To exit the application: Click on  “Exit Automation Studio™ ” or ALT + F4 (by

default).

If no modifications have been made since the project was last saved, the software closes
and terminates the exit procedure. Otherwise, the system prompts to save modifications
for every concerned project that is opened.

Selecting “No” closes the software without saving the last modifications and ends the
exit procedure.

If the project has previously been saved, selecting “Yes”, replaces by the modified
version. The software closes and ends the exit procedure. If the project has never been
saved, the “Save As” dialogue box automatically opens. (See section 4.1.3 Save).

Once all the projects treated, the software closes.

4.2 Project Properties

For each project, there is a properties dialogue box which contains the identification and
information related to the management of the project, accessible by “View”  “Project

Properties” or by menu  “Project”  “Project Properties”. A right-click on a

project in the Project Explorer displays also a contextual menu containing the
“Properties” command.

A project can contain many technologies. In the “Properties” dialogue box, the properties
and standards are regrouped for each technology. A property can be modified by the user
while the standard is predefined and therefore cannot be modified.

The following is a description of the items comprising the Project Properties:

Category Item Description
Project Naming Rules (Project To define naming rules standards for
Standards) projects and documents.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-9

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Category Item Description

Standards To create and select the standards
which apply to the actual project.
Properties To define parameters and information
for the actual project and its simulation.
History To define the project’s history.
Global variable Define global variables affected to all
project’s components.
General Standards Page Setup Standards To create page setup standards
according the page size. It is also
possible to create a title block for each
size.
Map Locator To create map locator standards.
Reference To create standards for references
displayed on the diagrams.
Dimensioning To create standards for dimensions
displayed on the diagrams.
Drawing Tools To create standards for drawing tools
(CAD objects) displayed on the
diagrams.
Plotter, Curve Editor, To create standards for the curve editor,
Oscilloscope and Sizing oscilloscope and sizing sheets.
Sheets
Label To create standards for component
labels.
3D Diagrams Create objects’ appearance standards for
the 3D Editor.
Layers Configure the layers’ parameters and
behaviors during edition and simulation.
Fluid System Regroups all the naming rules and
standards related to hydraulic and
pneumatic systems. Refer to the Fluid

4-10
 Creation and Management of a Project

Category Item Description

Workshop Guide.
Electrical System Regroups all the naming rules and
standards related to one-line and multi-
lines electrical systems. Refer to the
Electrical Workshop Guide.
Block Group all naming rules and standards
applicables to block diagrams. For more
details, refer to Block Diagram User’s
Guide.
Automation Regroups all the naming rules and
standards related to controlling
languages: SFC and Ladder Logic. Refer
to the SFC Workshop Guide.
Report To define standards for report naming
rules.

4.2.1 “Project” Branch

The « Project » branch is the first one in the tree of “Project Properties”.

4.2.1.1 “Naming Rules”

When new projects and documents are created, they are automatically given a default
name.

The “Naming Rules” branch is used to modify the rules by which to form default names.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-11

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 4-8: “Project”  “Naming Rules”

The toolbar is used to:

Command Description
Add Create a new naming rule.

Delete Delete the selected naming rule.

 A naming rule defined by a standard cannot be

deleted.
Copy the selection Copy the selected naming rule.

Paste the selection Paste (duplicate) the copied naming rule.

The toolbar also contains controls to filter or mark certain rules: first choose a column (as
criteria) in the drop-down menu, enter a string in the adjacent field, and select between
the two options:
● “Filter”: to filter the list.
● “Mark”: to highlight the rules satisfying the entered criteria.

When defining a new naming rule, give it a name (in the “Name” field). There is also the
option to add a description of the rule (in the “Comment” field). A default version

4-12
 Creation and Management of a Project

number is automatically assigned to the rule. This number is incremented after each
modification.

Every naming rule is a combination of variables (in green) selected from a drop-down list
and user added texts (in orange).

Select a variable from the “Variable:” drop-down list and click on to add it to the
name. There is also the option to add to the name in the “Literal” field. The formula that
defines the naming rule is automatically inserted into the dedicated area.

Each item can be dragged and dropped in this area in order to modify the formula. You
can also click on the item and then on to delete it.

A naming rule applied to a project or document becomes active when it is created or

when it is saved for the first time.

The available variables for building naming rules of projects and documents are derived
from:
● Project (Document) information accessible in the Project (Document) Properties.
For example: project approver, project or document category, different dates and
items relative to the document or project itself, and the project (document)
numbers with the amount of significant numbers desired.
● Project (Document) History information accessible in the Project (Document)
Properties. For example: name of different stakeholders, date of their
intervention and revision number with the amount of significant numbers
desired.

In Figure 4-8: “Project”  “Naming Rules”, the selected naming rule is from one project
and combines the 4 elements:
● Project category (there is only one category).
● Project number.
● Character string: “-“.
● Current revision number of the project.

4.2.1.2 “Standards”

As shown in the tabs in the figure below, a project standard is composed of editing
parameters and of simulation parameters.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-13

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 4-9: “Project”  “Standards”

This toolbar is identical to that of section 4.2.1.1 “Naming Rules”.

When creating a new standard, it must be given a name (in the “Name” field). It can also
be given a description (in the “Comment” field). A version number is automatically
assigned to the rule. This number is incremented after each modification.

The modifications made within a project or document can be taken into account different
ways, as indicated by the icon on the right side of the option.

Icon Name Comment

Immediate Option taken in account immediately, all projects
or documents with this option are automatically
updated upon modification.
Immediate if Option taken into account immediately, except for
not modified the option is not applied to the project, document
or component if the user has manually modified
the corresponding value.
At the next use Option taken in account the next time it is used.
OR At the opening Option only taken in account the next time the
of the application is launched.
application

4-14
 Creation and Management of a Project
“Edition” Tab

Figure 4-10: “Project Properties” Dialogue Box, “Properties” Branch, “Edition”

Hide or display the content of every category by clicking on the and icons
respectively.
Name Description
Update Type Manual or automatic update.
Project File Naming Rule To define the default project naming format for
new projects.
Documents Naming Rule To define the default document naming format
for each of the following document types:
Standard document, Electrotechnical Multi-line,
One-line, Panel Layout, Connections Diagram,
Harness, Report and SFC.
Units To set the default components units (Metric or

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-15

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Name Description
Imperial) monetary units, or units used in sizing
sheets.
Hyperlinks To define the display format of variable’s
hyperlinks.
Components Numbering To define the default naming rules for each of the
virtual electrotechnical components and
electrotechnical wire components.

Fluid Option To connect components from alternate circuits

with different fluids.
This feature makes it possible to simulate
different fluid combinations. However, it is the
user’s responsibility to properly configure the
fluid properties.

“Simulation” Tab

Figure 4-11: “Project Properties” Dialogue Box, “Project Standards”, “Simulation”

Name Description
Faulty Components To set the colour of faulty components.
Animated Components To set the colour of components that are
animated and can be animated.
Troubleshooting The option “Measurements Restricted to Quick
Connect Components “ is only used to measure
values on quick connect components considered

4-16
 Creation and Management of a Project

Name Description
as maintenance or test ports.
The Manometer and Thermometer
troubleshooting tools are compatible with the
pneumatic module.

4.2.1.3 “Properties”

In the “Project Properties”, the user can specify the simulation options and general
properties affecting the application’s behaviour in Editing and Simulation modes.

Figure 4-12: Simulation Options in Project Properties

Category Name Description
Standards Projects Standard These parameters correspond to

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-17

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Category Name Description

Plotter and Curve Editor the active project standard.
Standard
Mechanical Standard
Parameters Disable Component When this option is activated, no
Update component updates are done at
project opening.
In this case, the project is faster to
open.
It is always possible to launch and
update verification from the
“Update Components” command
of the ribbon bar in “Tools” tab,
“Update” group.
Disable Standards Update When this option is activated, the
automatic standards update is
disable and the standard will not
be updated at project opening.
Page Numbering by To renumber pages of a project
Project considering all documents in the
project.
Startup Script Allows to launch a script (rb), a
process (xamle) or a method (dll)
at project opening. It gives the
possibility to execute actions in
TM
Automation Studio that are not
executed by default.
Simulation Simulation Mode The default mode when starting a
simulation:
● Project: the entire project.
● Document: the current
diagram.
● Selection: a selection of
diagrams.

4-18
 Creation and Management of a Project

Category Name Description

Simulation Pace 1 & 2 Pace at which the calculations are
performed during simulation (0.1,
0.5, 1, 2, 10 ms). For more
information, see below section
Simulation Pace.
Simulation Slow Speed This value (≥ 2) identifies the
Factor speed at which the simulation is
animating. The greater the value,
the slower the speed is.
Thermal Evolution Pace Pace of thermal calculations during
simulation. This pace must be
greater or equal to fluid simulation
pace.
Display Faulty If some components have
Components properties to define their operation
limits, (Pmax, Umax, Imax…), this option
will display this fault as the limit
value is reached in simulation
mode.
Automatic Failures When this option is activated, all
defined failures triggered by a
fault (Pmax, Umax, Imax…) are
activated.
Delayed Snapshot To activate the snapshot with a
delay function or according to the
snapshot setting conditions.
Snapshot Delay To set a snapshot delay after a
simulation is started.
Steady State Evaluation The steady state settings defined
by the user are evaluated during
simulation. Refer to the Hydraulic
and Pneumatic Workshops User’s
Guide.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-19

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Category Name Description

Fluid Simulation Fluid Simulation Pace Allows to set the simulation time
pace according to the options set
in the “Simulation” group (1 or 2).
This property affects the
simulation of fluid schematics
(hydraulics and pneumatics).
Minimum Flow to Show If the flow is greater than this
Direction value, then the fluid lines are
going to be animated to illustrate
the flow direction.
Acceleration of Gravity To set the acceleration that results
from a gravitational force for the
simulation.
Open Path Detection Define a minimum flow for the
Threshlod open path detection tool to
consider the fluid in a line as
flowing.
Perfect Lines When this function is activated, the
fluid lines in the project will not
show pressure drops.
The flow direction and the lines
are not animated because the
simulation engine will totally
ignore the line calculations. With
less factors to take into account,
the calculation speed increases in
simulation mode.
Thermal Evolution The hydraulic simulation will take
into account the heat transfer
calculations which influence the
viscosity and the density of the
hydraulic fluid. Otherwise, the
temperature is considered
constant.

4-20
 Creation and Management of a Project

Category Name Description

Cavitation With this option activated, the
hydraulic simulation considers
cavitation. The hydraulic oil is
considered as aerated.
Electrotechnical Electrotechnical Allows to set the simulation time
Simulation Simulation Pace pace according to the options set
on the “Simulation” group (1 or 2).
This property affects the
simulation of electrotechnical
schematics
Perfect Wires The electrical wires in the project
will not experience voltage drop.
With less factors to take into
account, the calculation speed
increases in simulation mode.

Simulation Pace

In Project Properties > Project > Properties > Simulation Tab > Simulation Pace, multiple
values are available for the Simulation Time Step Value. This option corresponds to the
“Pace” at which the calculations for the selected technology are performed during
simulation. The simulation time paces for the different technologies are independent.

Pace
● Standard: 10 ms (milliseconds) ;
● Quick: 2 1 and 0.5 ms;
● Advanced: 0.1 ms.

A smaller Simulation Pace Value:

● Simulates with greater precision;
● Shows various Transitory Phenomena that may not be visible at a Normal Pace.
● May generate a longer Simulation Time than the Real Time, depending on the
size of the Project, because of the greater number of calculations required.

For the moment, this option is only used by the following Workshops: Hydraulics,
Pneumatics, Electrotechnical, One-Line and SFC.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-21

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

In the Electrotechnical Workshop, some Motors have a behaviour that adapts to the
selected Pace: Asynchronous Motor, Squirrel Cage, Three-Phase AC, Asynchronous Motor,
Squirrel Cage, Three-Phase, AC with 6 Connectors, Asynchronous Motor, Squirrel Cage,
Three-Phase, AC with NO Brake, Asynchronous Motor, Squirrel Cage, Three-Phase, AC with
NC Brake and Three-Phase Permanent Magnet Synchronous Machine.

In Hydraulics and Pneumatics, the behaviours of the dynamic components automatically

adapt to the various Paces, as in the case of Motors, Linear or Rotary Actuators, dynamic
mode Directional Valves, etc.

Note that for Components not dynamically computed (mostly pressure valves), the
Commutation Time value cannot be smaller than the Simulator Pace. If this is the case,
however, the Simulator will take the Pace as its default value. Generally, these Valves
will also have a proportionally shorter Transitory Delay to the Simulation Time Step, with
the fast and advanced Paces.

By selecting the Pace option in the Project Properties, all of the Diagrams of the Project
will be simulated at the selected pace.

“Information”
The “Information” category contains the information and identifiers in the active project.

Display the details of a selected item in the dialogue box with the command “Show
Details” directly below.

These fields can be used to create title blocks when inserting fields from the “Home” tab
 “Drawing” group  “Field” command.

Customize fields using the command. For more details on the toolbar, see section
4.2.1.4 “History” Branch.

4.2.1.4 “History” Branch

The “History” branch is used to enter comments and information at different phases of
the project’s progress. The user may assign sequential revision numbers to identify the
project phases. The first comment is automatically saved as are any subsequent revision
numbers, revision dates, comments, the author, and the company’s name.

 All the fields in the “History” dialogue box are available to create title blocks when

4-22
 Creation and Management of a Project

inserting fields from the “Home” tab  “Drawing” group  “Field” command.

Figure 4-13: “Project Properties”  “Project”  “History” Branch

Add / Remove Revision

In Project Properties, “Project” branch → “History”, a revision can be added or

suppressed with the commands from the toolbar.

These revisions are displayed in the list with revision numbers, comments and creation
dates.

Modify Revision

Select the revision in the list to modify it. Details relative to it are displayed in the section
underneath. See Figure 4-14: Revision Modification.

Search Revision

A filer can be used to search a revision from the date, revision number or comment.

Duplicate Revision

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-23

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

The command is used to create a new revision by duplicating the revision currently
selected.

Figure 4-14: Revision Modification

Field Description
Identification Revision Display the revision number. The numbers can be
modified.
Modified Display the date and time the project was last
modified. This field is updated every time the project
is saved.
Comment Display the comments associated to the revision.
Revision Revised by Enter the name of the person who did the revision
Information and the date of revision.
Verified by Enter the name of the person in charge of verifying
the project and the date of verification.
Approved by Enter the name of the person in charge of approving
the project and the date of approval.

4.2.1.5 Components’ Global Properties

In the project’s properties under the “Global Variables” sub-branch of the “Project”
branch, you can access to the dialogue box in which you can manage user-defined
variables created for all components. These variables are called “global” because they
affect all components.

4-24
 Creation and Management of a Project

Figure 4-15 "Global Variables" Sub-branch in the "Project" Branch

Global variables are saved in the project and project’s templates. They will be also
available for the components inserted into a catalogue.

To create a global variable, click on the command . You can either create a “User-
Defined” global variable or a variable “From Template”. If you select the “User-Defined”
option, you will be asked to select the variable type and give it a name and an alias.
Once the fields are filled with the desired information, click on to create the variable.

Figure 4-16 Add a User-Defined Variable

If you select the “From Template” option, another display with all the Automation
Studio™ variables allow you to choose the template you wish to use to create the global
variable.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-25

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 4-17 Add a Variable from Template

Once the global variable has been created, it will be added to the existing components in
the project and to all the components newly inserted into a project or copied and pasted
from another project.

Components affected by the global variables are all the simple components of the main
library, components belonging to a group, assemblies and their subcomponents, custom
components and black boxes. However, there are exceptions: CAD objects (rectangles,
ellipses etc.) and builders’ sub-components will not be affected by these variables.

Global variables and variables created locally will all be listed in the “User-Defined”
category of the component’s properties. Two different icons indicate whether the
variable is global or local .

Icon Description

Global variable

Local variable

 The global variables created from template will be added to the component’s

4-26
 Creation and Management of a Project

properties with all the other preconfigured Automation Studio ™ variables.

If you want to modify subsequently some attributes of a global variable within a project,
this modification will affect only the new components that have been inserted into this
project.

If you delete a global variable from a project, this variable will be removed from all
project’s components, except for the components whose same variable has been created
locally.

 The global variables of 5.7 projects will be imported and categorized as explained
above.

Figure 4-18 Dialogue Box for Variables' Management

Area Icon Description

1 Creates a new global variable and adds it to the
spreadsheet.
When creating the variable, the user may receive
additional information, as an example, a message
saying that a variable is already used locally by one
component of a project.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-27

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Area Icon Description

2 Deletes a new global variable.
When validating, the user may receive additional
information through messages.
3 Selection of the filter’s scope.

4
In the filter’s field, you can create a filter or a mark
for variables.
5
This area displays the main properties of the global
variables within the project.

The other attributes of the global variables are similar to the one locally created by user
on the level of the project, document or component. For more information, please see
section Properties Attributes.

4.2.2 “General Standards” Branch

These branches are used to define a set of standards relative to the page setup of the
document. These standards are generic and related to project documents and application
tools.

Under this standard, the data screens have a toolbar to:

Command Description
Add Create a new standard.

Delete Delete the selected standard.

Copy the Selection Copy the selected standard.

Paste the Selection Paste the copied standard.

The toolbar also contains controls to filter or mark certain standards: choose a column as

4-28
 Creation and Management of a Project

a criterion in the drop-down menu, enter a character string in the adjacent field, and then
select one of the two options:
● “Filter”: to filter the list.
● “Mark”: to highlight the standards satisfying the entered criteria.

The Preview zone displays an image summarizing the edited standard.

4.2.2.1 Page Setup

Figure 4-19: “General Standards”  “Page Setup Standards” Branch

Page setup standards of the project can be defined in this branch. Several considerations
are associated with the work page, such as setting the orientation, and adding a frame, a
title block, a report, revisions history, and/or a map locator, for example.

 The work sheet (white) corresponds to the print area of the diagram.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-29

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

 It is recommended to choose the document setup before working in it.

A new page setup standard must be assigned a name (in the “Name” field). A
description of the standard can also be added (in the “Comment” field). A version
number is automatically given to the standard. This number is incremented after each
modification.

The “Page Setup” branch of the “Project Properties” command is used to define all the
page setup standards that can be used in the project. However, to modify one of the
parameters while working from the actual standard, the standard number will change to
reflect that the standard has evolved.

4-30
 Creation and Management of a Project

Category Description
Document Size To define the paper format. The selected format corresponds to
the size of the work sheet.
Document To choose the orientation of the worksheet, either Portrait
Orientation (vertical) or Landscape (horizontal).
Printer Margins To define the worksheet margins: left, right, top, and bottom.
Additional Report These four margins define the area in which the report will be
Margins displayed on every page. This area is also defined by the other
margins relative to the page setup.
Title Block To define the title block: no title block, default or create a
customized title block with the command.
Miscellaneous To define the maximum number of layers in the same diagram,
the colour of the document’s grid, the document background
colour and shadow colour.

A Simulation Tab is also available for the “Page Setup Standards”.

Figure 4-20: “General Standards”  “Page Setup Standards” “Simulation” Tab

The “Title Block visible in simulation” checkbox is used to have the Title Block displayed
during simulation as a background, as in the following figure:

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-31

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 4-21: Title block visible during simulation

Title Block Creation

While defining the page setup standard, also define a customized title block. To create a
custom title block, select “Customized” and click on the command.

Automation Studio™ will open an internal document in which the user can create a new
title block. This document contains the same tools as the ones already described in
section 2.1.4 Ribbon.

At any time, cancel the title block edition by clicking on the “Cancel Edition” command in
the floating dialogue box. After the title block completion, save it to return to the normal
mode.

Figure 4-22: Floating Dialogue Box while Configuring the Title Block

4.2.2.2 Map Locator Standards

The “Map Locator Standards” branch defines different standards, including the
measurement units for the map ruler, the location of components, and the link’s display
format for the current diagram.

4-32
 Creation and Management of a Project

Figure 4-23: “General Standards”  “Map Locator Standards” Branch

 In order to maintain the coherence of diagrams, it is recommended to use the

same numbering method for the map ruler for all diagrams of the same project.
Category Item Description
Appearance Horizontal To set the map locators on the horizontal
ruler:
 Page Number: to display the page
number.
 Start Number or Letter: to choose
between an alphabetical or digital
numbering, as well as a starting value.
 Increment: to set the increment between
two consecutive divisions.
 Origin: to set whether the numbering
increases to the left or to the right.
 Width: to set the width of a division.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-33

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Category Item Description

Vertical To set the map locators on the vertical ruler,
which have the same options as the
horizontal ruler.
Areas To split the page into 1, 2 or 3 regions,
vertically or horizontally.
Miscellaneous Display Grid To show the grid that prolongs the map
locators.
Automatic Adjust To automatically adjust the width and height
Width and Height of the cartographic marks to complete the
map locators.
Colour To set the colour for the map ruler.
Grid Colour To set the colour of the grid that prolongs the
map ruler.

Figure 4-24: Horizontal Map Locators (numbered 01, 02…) and Vertical (numbered A, B…).
The grid is also visible

4.2.2.3 Reference Standards

A component’s reference on the diagrams is used to locate the principle circuit elements
from optional components. All of them are displayed on the diagram.

A reference is a label placed on the component to identify it and to include it in a bill of

materials or a report.

4-34
 Creation and Management of a Project

Figure 4-25: Example of Reference Details

Field Description
1 Main component
2 Option
3 Document name

Figure 4-26: “General Standards” ”Reference Standards” Branch

 The reference default options can be defined for the application, current project
and current document.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-35

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Category Item Description

Information Uniqueness To render the Reference standard unique to
the project or to the document.
Include Document To include the document name to all the
Name added references by default.
Appearance Shape To set the default shape of the reference
bubble.
Size To set the default size of the reference
bubble.
Adjustment Mode To set the default appearance of the
reference bubble and text:
 Auto - Text: to adjust text to the bubble
size.
 Auto - Bubble: to adjust bubble to the
text size.
 Manual: to adjust manually the bubble
and text size.
Link To set the default shape of the reference
arrows.
Typography To set the font and style of the reference
text.
Colour To set the colour of the bubble and arrows.
Background Colour To set the background colour of the bubble.

4.2.2.4 Dimensioning Standards

Please refer to the Electrotechnical Workshop Guide for these standards used to configure
default connection ports.

4-36
 Creation and Management of a Project

4.2.2.5 Drawing Tools Standards

This branch is used to set up the drawing standards.

Figure 4-27: “General Standards”  “Drawing Tools Standards” Branch

Zone or Element Description
Line Colour To set the line colour for the object.
Line Style To set the line style: solid, dotted, etc. Not available for arcs and
circles.
Lineweight To set line thickness.
Fill Pattern To fill with pattern. Not available for lines.
Foreground Colour To fill foreground with pattern colour. Not available for lines.
Background Colour To fill background with pattern colour. Not available for lines.
Line Begin To select image option for the beginning of a line. Not available
for rectangles and ellipses.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-37

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Zone or Element Description

Line Begin Size To set the size of the image for the beginning of a line.
Line End To select image option for the end of a line. Not available for
rectangles and ellipses.
Line End Size To set the size of the image for the end of the line.
Polygon Auto Close To automatically join the ends of the polygon shape if the lines
are close to one another.
Text Typography To set the font used in the text objects.
Text Alignment To set the default alignment of text object.
Text Word Wrap To set the automatic word wrap in a text box.

4.2.2.6 “Plotter, Curve Editor,Oscilloscope and Sizing Sheets”

Branch

The “Plotter, Curve Editor, Oscilloscope and Sizing Sheets” branch is used to define the
appearance of the plotters, the curves and the sizing sheets editor as well as, the
oscilloscope.

Figure 4-28: “General Standards”  “Plotter, Curve Editor, Oscilloscope and Sizing
Sheets” Branch

4-38
 Creation and Management of a Project

“Plotter” Tab
Category Item Description
Plotter The “Plotter” category contains all the
options regarding the appearance of the
standard plotter.
Background Colour To set the background colour of the plotter.
Grid Colour To set the grid colour of the plotter.
Values Colour Personalize the colour of the displayed
values.
Cursors Colour Personalize the colour of the displayed
cursors.
Annotations Colour Personalize the colours of annotations placed
on the plot area.
Markers Colour Personalize the colour of displayed markers.
Vertical Axes Layout Layout of the vertical axes and the associated
curves: with the option “Layered”, the curves
for each variable overlap on one plot area.
The option “Stacked” shows each curve
separately as a series of graphs stacked one
on top to the other.
Grid Strips Layout Configure the display of strips on the
background of the plot area: None, Vertical,
Horizontal, Both.
Horizontal Axis The time axis can be placed at the bottom or
Placement at the top of the graph.
Vertical Axes The vertical axes can be placed All left, All
Placement right, alternating Left then right, or Right
then left.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-39

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Category Item Description

Cursors Appearance The measurement cursors on the plot area
can be shown as either a vertical bar or as a
crosshair. The « Crosshair » option, with a
horizontal and vertical line, makes it easier to
follow the curves.
Background Image The background of the plot area can by
personalised by applying an image.
Show Legend Show the legend on the plot area. The
legend also allows the activation or
deactivation of any of the variables on the
plotter.
Initial Time Interval
This option is only available for the y(t)
plotter.

Max. Number of To set the maximum number of displayed

Measurements by points for a plot. Every two points are
Plot connected together with a segment of a line
to constitute the curve.
Number of Decimals To set the number of decimals of a curve(s)
for Export for exporting to an external file.

“Curves” tab
Category Item Description
Curve Editor The “Curve Editor” category contains all the
options regarding the appearance of the
curves displayed in the properties of certain
components.
Background Colour To set the background colour of the curve
drawing zone.
Grid Colour To set the grid colour of the curve drawing
zone.
Selection Colour To set the colour of the selected curve(s).

4-40
 Creation and Management of a Project

Curve Colour To set the colour of curves.

Constraint not met To set the colour of constraint not met.
Lineweight To set the line thickness of the curve lines.
Point Width To set the width of the points that appears
on the curves.

“Oscilloscope” Tab
Category Item Description
Oscilloscope Similar to the plotter and the curve editor,
the “Oscilloscope” category contains all the
options regarding the appearance of the
oscilloscope.
General Vertical/horizontal The default value of the vertical (voltage)
Parameters Scale and the horizontal (time) scale for all
channels.
Show Grid Allows you to display or hide the grid on the
oscilloscope’s screen.
Show Axes Allows you to display or hide the axes on the
oscilloscope screen. These axes are
horizontally and vertically centered on the
oscilloscope’s screen.
Background Colour Allows you to select the colour of the
oscilloscope’s screen.
Grid Colour Allows you to select the colour of the grid
when it is displayed.
Axes Colour Allows you to select the colour of the axes
when they are displayed.
Lineweight Allows you to select the thickness of the plot
lines. It applies to all channels.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-41

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Category Item Description

Channels Channel 1 Sensor Allows you to select a multiplication factor
Parameters Ratio for all Channels. For example, if the sensor
ration is 10X, a measured voltage of 5 V is
displayed on the screen as 50 V.

“Sizing sheet” tab

Category Item Description
Curve editor The “Curve Editor” category contains all the
options regarding the appearance of the
curves displayed in the edition and
visualization dialogs of time based curves
(profile curve) regarding some variables in
the sizing sheets.
Curve colour Allows you to select the colour of the line.
Time Axis Colour Allows you to define the colour of the time
axis (abscissa).
Background Colour Allows you to set the background colour of
the graphic zone.
Grid Colour Allows you to select the colour of the grid in
the graphic zone.
Label Colour Allows you to select the colour of the
numerical values displayed in the graphic
zone.
Limit Marker Colour Allows you to set the colour of the marker of
a point defined at the x-axis limit
(corresponding to the “Cycle duration” in the
sizing sheet).
Marker Colour Allows you to set the colour of the marker of
a point defined at a lower value than the x-
axis limit (corresponding to the “Cycle
duration” in the sizing sheet).

4-42
 Creation and Management of a Project

Category Item Description

Out of Range Marker Allows you to set the colour of the marker of
Colour a point defined outside the x-axis limit
(corresponding to the “Cycle duration” in the
sizing sheet).
Lineweight Allows you to select the thickness of the line.
Limit Marker Shape Allows you to set the shape of the marker of
a point defined at the x-axis limit
(corresponding to the “Cycle duration” in the
sizing sheet).
Marker Shape Allows you to set the shape of the marker of
a point defined at a lower value than the x-
axis limit (corresponding to the “Cycle
duration” in the sizing sheet).
Out of Range Marker Allows you to set the shape of the marker of
Shape a point defined outside the x-axis limit
(corresponding to the “Cycle duration” in the
sizing sheet).
Line Pattern Allows you to select the style of the line.
Precision of Exported Allows you to set the precision (the number
Measurements of decimals) of the curve coordinates when
copying the values.
Scale Allows you to define the type of axis for the
ordinate axis (y-axis).
Grid Strips Layout Allows you to set the appearance of the grid
strips.
Horizontal Axis Allows you to define the horizontal axis
placement position.
Vertical Axis Allows you to define the vertical axis
Placement position.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-43

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

4.2.2.7 “Label” Branch

This section of the document will explain the “Label Standards” main window, label types
and their configuration.

Figure 4-29: “General Standards”  “Label Standards”

This window is used to define and configure label standards that will be used in the
Project.
Number/Step Description
1 Create a new label standard. Note that other buttons are
available (delete, copy, paste).
2 Assign a relevant name to the label standard.

4-44
 Creation and Management of a Project

Number/Step Description
3 The preview zone is updated according to the label type or its
properties defined in the following steps.
4 Selection of the label type (letter, note or show card). The
selection should be same type in the section below. As in the
example in Figure 4-29, the Label Type is “Show Card” and the
section configuration below corresponds accordingly.
5 Text, line or colour properties according to the label type
selected (properties vary depending on the label type selected
at step 4).
6 Save changes.

Label Types

Three label types are available:

● Letter:

Figure 4-30: “Letter” Label Type

● Note:

Figure 4-31: “Note” Label Type

● Show Card:

Figure 4-32: “Show Card” Label Type

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-45

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide
Configuration

For a One-Line document: the detailed label configuration is presented in the One-Line
User Guide. For One-Line documents only, the label configuration is based on the
component type and a component could be associated with many labels (of different
types).

For all other document types, the “Label Standards” configuration is first defined in the
Project Properties (as shown above) and a Label Standard should then be selected in the
Document Properties (see next figure).

Figure 4-33: “Document Properties” “Label Standard”

When a standard is selected for a specific document, all components will use the same
label type: the default label type of the label standard. For instance, if the default label
type is a “Note”, then all the component labels of the document will appear as a “Note”
label type.

To add a label to a component (in editing or simulation mode), use the component
contextual menu (right-click). A label can also be deleted using the right-click on the
component or with the “Delete” key on the keyboard.

Figure 4-34: Add or Delete an Associated Label on a Component

4-46
 Creation and Management of a Project

The label text can be edited two ways: a) select the label and press F2, or b) select the
label and left-click.

4.2.2.8 3D Diagrams Standards

The “3D Diagrams” branch is used to define the different options involving the
appearance of 3D Diagrams.

Figure 4-35 3D Diagrams Standards

4.2.2.9 Layers Standards

The “Layer” branch gives access to the Layers Manager’s options.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-47

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 4-36 "Layer" Branch in the General Standards

« Edition » Tab

Figure 4-37 Editing Options for the Layers Manager

Category Item Description

General Maximum Number of Setting of the maximum number of layers
Parameters Layers within a same project.
Locked Layers Preserve Links and Connect components from locked and
Detect Connectors unlocked layers and maintain this connection
when components are moved.

 This option must be activated for the

components ports to be available for
connection.

4-48
 Creation and Management of a Project
« Simulation » Tab

Figure 4-38 Simulation Option for the Layers Manager

Category Item Description

Locked Layers Allow Setting of Allows to display and set a component’s
Components in dynamic properties while the component is
Simulation on a locked layer during simulation.

For more details, see section 2.2.8 Layers Manager.

4.2.3 “Fluid System” Branch

For all the details of this dialogue box, refer to the Hydraulics and Pneumatics Workshops
User’s Guide.

4.2.4 “Electrical System” Branch

The electrical system contains the following workshops: One-Line, Multi-Line, Electrical
Command and Digital.

For electrotechnical One-Line and Multi-Line workshops, please refer to the One-Line and
Electrotechnical Workshop User’s Guide.

4.2.4.1 Electrical Control Standard

The electrical circuit should be drawn in the standard editor, as their standards are
described there. This workshop is a simulation with simplified binary control and few
symbols, while standards are kept to a minimum.

Electrical Control Symbol

Zone or element Description

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-49

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Zone or element Description

Component Item To set the naming rule for these components.
Identifier Naming
Rule
Component Colour To set the colour of the component’s symbol to be inserted into
the diagram.
Component To set the line thickness of the component symbol to be
Thickness inserted into the diagram.
Wire Colour To set the colour of the wires while in editing mode.
Wire Thickness To set the line thickness of the wire to be inserted into the
diagram.
Wire Style To set the style of the wire to be inserted into the diagram.
Component To set the font and format of components properties displayed
Satellite on the diagram.
Typography

Electrical Command Wire Simulation appearance

Zone or element Description
Wire Thickness To set the wire thickness during simulation.
L1 Voltage Colour To set the voltage colour of L1.
L2 Voltage Colour To set the voltage colour of L2.
L3 Voltage Colour To set the voltage colour of L3.
DC Voltage Colour To set the voltage colour of wires.
Null Voltage Colour To set the colour of wires when the voltage is null.
Undefined Voltage To set the colour of wires when the voltage is undefined.
Colour
Active State To set the colour of components when they are active.
Component Colour

4-50
 Creation and Management of a Project

4.2.4.2 Digital Electronic Standard

The digital electronic circuits should be drawn in the standard editor, as their standards
are described below. This workshop is a simulation with simplified binary control and few
symbols, while standards are kept to a minimum.

Digital Electronic Symbol

Zone or element Description
Component Colour To set the colour of the component’s symbol to be inserted into
the diagram.
Component To set the line thickness of the component symbol to be
Thickness inserted into the diagram.
Wire Colour To set the colour of the wires while in editing mode.
Wire Thickness To set the line thickness of the wire to be inserted into the
diagram.
Wire Style To set the style of the wire to be inserted into the diagram.
Component To set the font and format of components properties displayed
Satellite on the diagram.
Typography

Digital Electronic Link Simulation Appearance

Zone or Element Description
Wire Thickness To set the wire thickness during simulation.
Logical State 1 To set the colour of a component when its logical state is TRUE
Colour (1).
Logical State 0 To set the colour of a component while its state is FALSE (0).
Undefined Logical To set the colour of the wires when the logical state is
State Colour undefined.

4.2.5 “Automation” Branch

Automation systems represent logical and command languages. They include the SFC and
the Ladder Logic diagrams.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-51

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

This toolbar offers the same controls as in section 4.2.2 “General Standards” Branch.

4.2.5.1 SFC Standards

For SFC standards please refer to the SFC User’s Guide which is an independent editor of
the standard editor.

4.2.5.2 Ladder Standards

Figure 4-39: “Project Properties”  “Automation”  “Ladder Standards” Branch

The ladder logic diagrams should be done using the standard editor. These standards are
used to define the appearance of components in both editing and simulation modes.

“Edition” Tab
Category Item Description
Components Component Satellite To set the typography used for the display of
Typography texts in the ladder diagram components.
Ladder Logic To set the appearance of AB ladder diagram
AB Appearance in edit mode.

Component Colour To set the colour of components inserted on

the diagram.

4-52
 Creation and Management of a Project

Category Item Description

Component Thickness To set the thickness of the component
symbol.

Link Colour To set the colour of the link.

Link Thickness To set the thickness of the link.

Link Style To set the style of the link.

Ladder Logic
IEC Appearance To set the appearance of IEC ladder diagram
in edit mode.

Numbers Colour To set the colour of numerical values.

Variables Colour To set the colour of the variables.
Addresses Colour To set the colour of the addresses.
Display To set whether the address and/or the
variable are displayed.
Component Colour To set the colour of components inserted on
the diagram.

Component Thickness To set the thickness of the component

symbol.

Link Colour To set the colour of the link.

Link Thickness To set the thickness of the link.

Link Style To set the style of the link.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-53

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Category Item Description

Ladder Logic To set the appearance of Siemens ladder
Siemens diagram in edit mode.
Appearance

Numbers Colour To set the colour of numerical values.

Variables Colour To set the colour of the variables.

Addresses Colour To set the colour of the addresses.

Display To set whether the address and/or the

variable are displayed.
Abbreviation To set whether the acronyms’ abbreviation
on the symbol is in English or in German.

Component Colour To set the colour of components inserted on

the diagram.

Component Thickness To set the thickness of the component

symbol.

Link Colour To set the colour of the link.

Link Thickness To set the thickness of the link.

Link Style To set the style of the link.

“Simulation” Tab
Category Item Description

4-54
 Creation and Management of a Project

Category Item Description

Ladder Logic
AB Appearance

Link Thickness To set the thickness of the links in simulation.

Logic High Colour To set the colour of the logic high value in
simulation.
Logic Low Colour To set the colour of the logic low value in
simulation.
Ladder Logic See the Ladder Logic AB.
IEC Appearance
Ladder Logic See the Ladder Logic AB.
Siemens
Appearance

4.2.6 “Report” Branch

The “Report” branch is accessible via the “Project Properties” window.

4.2.6.1 “Naming Rules (Report Properties)”

The reports are not graphical documents, but they are automatically generated according
to filters and user’s criteria. Therefore, only the document names can be modified.

The only aspect of the reports from the project properties in the “Report”  “Naming
Rules (Report Properties)” branch that can be configured concerns the rules of reports
naming. This window is identical to the one described in section 4.2.1.1 .

© Famic Technologies Inc. 4-55

5 Document
This chapter presents the necessary instructions of the creation and management of
documents. The document properties are presented in section 5.2 Document Properties.

5.1 Document Management

It is possible to include different types of documents within a project. These various
document types integrate components from both standard and non-standard workshops,
reports, and documents that come from external applications such as web pages, word-
processing documents, spreadsheets, etc.
Document Description
Diagram A document that integrates standard workshop
components: hydraulic, pneumatic, ladder diagram,
electrical control and HMI.
3D Diagram A document that integrates 3D workshop
components.
Sequential A document that contains sequential function chart
Function Chart workshop components.
Block Diagram A document that contains mathematic blocks
components.
Report A report that may vary according to the user’s
needs.
Web Page A link to a Web page.
Linked A link to another document and its application.
Document…
Folder A subdivision of a project.
May also contain documents, or other folders.
Électrotechnical Diagram
Electrotechnical A document that integrates electrotechnical
Diagram workshop components.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 5-1

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Document Description
Electrotechnical A document that integrates one-line electrotechnical
One-Line workshop components.
Electrotechnical A document that contains cable descriptions as they
Connection are defined in an electrotechnical document.
Electrotechnical A document that contains the panel layout diagram.
Panel Layout

5.1.1 Creation

To create a new diagram, go to “Home” tab  Documents group and select the
document type from the drop-down list.

Another way is to go to the menu and click on “New diagram”.

It is also possible to use the functions available in the Project Manager.

The new document is opened and inserted in the Project Explorer in the current project.

 Create a new diagram that is compliant with the user’s needs and standards, and
save it as a template. See section 4.1.3.3 Saving a Template for the procedure.

 A document template is created according to the general standards defined by

default in the project. Refer to section 4.2.2 “General Standards” Branch.

The creation of another type of Automation Studio™ Document is similar to the creation
of a standard diagram. To get more information on how to create and manage other
typical Automation Studio™ documents, refer to various guides listed in the following
table.
Document Reference
Electrotechnical Diagram Electrotechnical Workshop User’s Guide
One-Line Diagram One-Line Workshop User’s Guide
Connection Diagram Electrotechnical Workshop User’s Guide

5-2
 Document

Document Reference
Panel Layout Electrotechnical Workshop User’s Guide
Electrotechnical Report Electrotechnical Workshop User’s Guide
SFC SFC Workshop User’s Guide
Report Chapter 7 Reports of this guide.

The new document opens and is inserted in the “Project Explorer”.

To insert a Web page: click on  “New”  “Web Page” and type the name and
URL of the Web page in the appropriate fields.

The Web page opens and is inserted into the Project Explorer at the desired location.

To link a document and its application to Automation Studio™: click on 

“New”  “Linked Document…”, and then choose the document in the dialogue
that opens:
The document is inserted in the Project Explorer at the desired location.

 Note that linked documents open in their respective applications in a new

window, and not in Automation Studio™.

To create a new folder: click on  “New”  “Folder”.

The new folder is created and inserted into the Project Explorer’s tree structure.

To create snapshot and measures documents, refer to the following sections

(respectively):
● Section 8.4.1 Snapshot of a Circuit State

© Famic Technologies Inc. 5-3

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 5-1: Saving a Snapshot Document

● Section 8.4.2 Dynamic Measuring Instruments.

Figure 5-2: Save Measures Document

5.1.2 Import

SFCs generated by the Graphite software as well as GIE format files can be imported.

Choose  “Import” and follow the steps.

Figure 5-3: Import Dialogue Box

5.1.3 Save a Document Template

The specific document template saving is used to save general standards for page setup
parameters and document properties. Therefore, it is possible to create documents from
a template respecting the same standards as the original. The templates that can be
saved are:

5-4
 Document

● Diagram (.sc)
● Electrotechnical Diagram (.se)
● Electrotechnical Panel Layout (.sie)
● Electrotechnical One-line Diagram (.seu)
● Electrotechnical Report (.re)
● SFC (.sf)
● Report (standard) (.re)

 The diagram to be saved as a template must be active.

To save a template of an active document, choose the command:  “Document” 

“Save [..] Document Template”, depending on the active document. In the dialogue box
that opens, assign a name and a description (optional) to the template, then activate the
“Save” command.

A diagram template with the assigned name is created in the directory specified in the
Automation Studio™ options (refer to section 2.1.3.2 Automation Studio™ Options) with
the appropriate extension.

5.1.4 Export

Automation Studio™ has different types of export options:

● Graphical export under .dxf, .emf, .pdf, .svg, or .tiff format.
● SFCs can be exported in .GIE, Siemens Step 7 S7-Graph formats and in certain
format compatible with PLCs (Allen Bradley).
● .xml export is used to export the graphic connectivity between the different
components of one or more circuits, in all technologies used by the symbol
libraries supplied with Automation Studio™. The resulting file is named according
to the project’s name and the target directory can be selected by the user.
● .asr Format: exports a project in a format that can be simulated with the
Automation Studio™ Simulation Edition.

To export documents:

1. Click on  “Export”, choose the desired format, and then activate the “Next”
command.
2. A dialogue box opens with the selection of compatible documents to export.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 5-5

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 5-4 Export Window

3. Make a selection, and activate the “Next” command.
4. Depending of the export type, other dialogue boxes may be presented (see below),
before the final export file location selection.

 For the SVG export, the Crisp-Edges selection box can improve the depiction of the
image in the “Internet Explorer” browser.

 For the PDF export, the user can select the option “Formatting of Each Page”
allowing him to select a format for each page. If this option is unchecked, the
same format will be applied to the whole document.

Export in format DXF:

The title block can be included or exluded in/from the DXF.

The user can also choose between two options relating to the lineweight: “Equivalent
Lineweight” or “Precise Lineweight”.

Equivalent Lineweight

The option “Equivalent Lineweight” allows the correspondence between the Automation

5-6
 Document

Studio™ lineweights and the standard DXF lineweights. In the DXF generated with this
option, the lineweights will be different than the one in Automation Studio ™ but the
proportions will be kept.

 This option is recommended in the cases the DXF size must be minimized, the
lineweights are not relevant for the printing and a rounded effect at the end of the
lines is intended.

Here is the cross reference table used to convert the Automation Studio™ values in
standard DXF values (in mm):
AutoCAD 0.05 0.09 0.13 0.15 0.18 0.2 0.25 0.35 0.4 0.5 0.53 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.06 1.2 1.4 1.58 2 2.11 2.11 2.11 2.11
AS 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 1.9 2 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5

Figure 5-5 Cross Reference Table between Automation Studio™ and DXF Values (in mm)

Precise Lineweight

The option “Precise Lineweight” generates a DXF with exactly the same lineweights than
the one in Automation Studio™.

Disadvantages of this option in comparison to the “Equivalent Lineweight”:

● Only the DXF Polygon primitive will be used. All the Automation Studio ™ graphic
elements will be converted in polygons and this will generate a bigger file.
● The ends of the lines are square.

 This option is recommended when the lineweight is essential for both display and
printing and the file size is not important.

Line Breakdown

The option “Line Breakdown” transforms the lines in dotted segments in order to
reproduce the same appearance than the original document. This generates a very
precise DXF with precise lines. The file size will be big.

This option is recommended in the cases:

● The target CAD does not show the same line appearance than in Automation
Studio™;
● The line appearance must be precise;
● The line appearance cannot be modified from the target CAD;

© Famic Technologies Inc. 5-7

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

● The components’ blocks shouldn’t be broken down from the target CAD in order
to modify their style or colour.

Exporting SFC:

 to get access to this option (otherwise greyed out), you must have at least one
SFC document opened.

If you export a SFC to a GIE format or to a “Siemens Step S7-Graph” format, a wizard will
guide you through dialogue boxes to edit export parameters.Detailed information on SFC
export is available in the online Help accessible by pressing F1 when your mouse cursor
is positioned in the ribbon, exactly below the “Sequential Function Chart” tab. (If you do
not see this tab in the ribbon, it means that no SFC is currently opened). See chapter 8 of

the user’s guide Sequential Function Chart (SFC), click on  “Support”  User’s Guide
“SFC”.

Figure 5-6: Example of an SFC Export Dialogue Box

When exporting to XML format, the following dialogue box opens to set export options:

5-8
 Document

Figure 5-7: Dialogue Box “Export -XML Options”

Zone Description
Include Components on Lists the connectivity of all the components in the project,
Invisible Layers on visible and invisible layers.
Include Links To include links (conductors, electrical wires …), but will
create a larger report.
Show Internal Assembly To consider the assemblies as groups of components, so all
Connections internal connections will also be exported.
Show Free Connectors To list free connectors, i.e. without connectivity with other
components.

Technical Parameters not used by the simulator.

Simulated Parameters used by the simulator, either in the behaviour
model of the component or in a diagnostic or breakdown
function.
Commercial Parameters usually from catalogues, to be used for
commercial purposes.
User-Defined Customized properties created by the user.

5.2 Document Properties

It is possible to see and edit the properties of every document of a project. Access the
document properties dialogue of the active document by activating the command:

© Famic Technologies Inc. 5-9

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

“View”  “Properties”  “Document Properties” of the ribbon or by the menu 

“Document”  “Document Properties”.

The document properties tree view is composed of 2 branches:

● Document Properties.
● History.

5.2.1 “Document Properties” Branch

Document properties contain the standards applied to the document as well as the
values of the different editor attributes on this document.

Figure 5-8: “Document Properties” Data

5-10
 Document

5.2.1.1 “Standards” Category

For every standard, choose from the drop-down list, one of the standards defined in the
project. The displayed buttons at the right of the drop-down menus are used for the
following actions:
Command Description
Open and Modify This button opens the project properties dialogue and
displays the concerned standard.
This command always appears with the following
one.
Import a Copy and This button imports a copy of the selected standard:
Modify the imported standard is therefore placed in the
document properties tree, under “Document
Properties”.
The imported standard is local to the document.
Modify it by selecting it in the tree.
When this command is activated, the corresponding
drop-down list is deactivated, and the “Open and
Modify” and “Import a Copy and Modify” buttons are
replaced by the following one.
List of Used This button is used to delete the local copy of the
Standards imported standard, and to choose one of the
standards defined in the project from the drop-down
list.
When this command is activated, the corresponding
drop-down list is activated, and the button is replaced
by the “Open and Modify” and “Import a Copy and
Modify” buttons.

For more details on standards listed below, please refer to the section 4.2 Project
Properties and search for the relevant standards.
Name Description
Page Setup Standard Displays the page setup standard of the active
document
Map Location Standard Displays the map locator standard of the active

© Famic Technologies Inc. 5-11

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Name Description
document
Fluid Standard Displays the fluid standard of the active document
Hydraulic Standard Displays the hydraulic standard of the active document
Pneumatic Standard Displays the pneumatic standard of the active
document
Electrical Standard Displays the electrical standard of the active document
Digital Electronic Standard Displays the digital electronic standard of the active
document
Ladder Standard Displays the ladder standard of the active document
References Standard Displays the references standard of the active
document
Drawing Tools Standard Displays the drawing tools standard for the active
document
Label Standard Displays the label standard that defines the type and
appearance of one label type that will be used
throughout the document. All labels associated to any
component in that document will use that default label
type (except in a One-Line document in which label
association depends on the component type instead of
the document label standard).

5.2.1.2 “Default Values” Category

Name Description
Default Installation/Circuit Default value of installation and circuit for all the
components that are going to be inserted on the active
document.

5.2.1.3 “Appearance” Category

All of the properties described below can also be modified for the current document and
all of its views under the “View” tab  “Show” group and in the Home tab  Snap
group. These functions are used to set the document’s visual aspect and their goal is to

5-12
 Document

help the user draw with ease and accuracy.

Name Description
Display Mechanical Contacts This command is used to view or hide the contact
points of each symbol on the diagram.
Display Connection Ports This command is used to view or hide the
connection ports of each symbol on the diagram.
Display Connection Ports Names This command is used to view of or hide the names
of all the connection ports of each symbol on the
diagram.
Display Highlighted Lines This command is used to view or hide the
highlighted lines on the diagram.
Display Component Tooltip This command is used to view or hide the
component tooltip when the cursor is moved over
the component symbol.
Display Margins and Pages This command is used to view or hide the margins
Breaks and page breaks of a diagram.
Display Rulers This command is used to view or hide the vertical
and horizontal rulers.
Display Grid This command is used to view or hide the grid used
to snap symbols into place.
Component and Drawing Scale This command is used to select the drawing scale
percentage from a drop-down list.
Component Snap This command forces the component symbols to
snap on the grid. Otherwise, the component
symbols can be located anywhere in the workspace.
This is not recommended for technical diagrams.
When selected, this command ensures that symbols
from the libraries snap to the grid on the diagram.
Drawing Snap This command forces the CAD elements (Circle, line,
square, etc.) to snap on a virtual grid according to its
precision setting.
Display Hyperlinks This command is used to display assigned tag
names or assigned variables with a hyperlink format

© Famic Technologies Inc. 5-13

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Name Description
or as normal text.
Display References This command is used to display component
references.

5.2.1.4 Information

Similar to the project properties, the information branch of a document contains

information about the document along the different steps of its creation and the
identification of its contributors.

Display the details of a selection in the dialogue box using the “Show Details” command
at the bottom of the box.

These fields can be used in the automatic fields: “Home”  “Drawing”  “Field”.

Add custom fields by the command. For more information on the toolbar, refer to
section 6.2.1.1 Toolbar.

5.2.2 “History” Branch

The “History” branch of a document works the same way as that of the project: refer to
section 4.2.1.4 “History” Branch.

5-14
6 Elements within a Diagram
6.1 Elements Management
6.1.1 Inserting/Creating

6.1.1.1 Components’ Insertion and Use of a Library

Components to be inserted in a diagram must be selected from the main library, a

custom library or a catalogue. Occasionally, when inserting some types of components,
the “Component Properties” dialogue box automatically opens. This is particularly the
case for components that communicate together through mnemonics in simulation
mode. An example of this is a coil and its contacts.

The component properties are used to define the component’s behaviour parameters
during simulation. Properties may relate to the components in and out sizes, to its
internal behaviour, or its dimensions.

Component properties are described in detail in the specific workshop’s user-guides, in

the online help files available from the component properties dialogue box, and in the
contextual help (accessible by the F1 function key by default). The detailed description of
properties for each component can be found in the online help of symbols, which can be
accessed through the Help button of the various property branches.

The parameters of all components in the Hydraulics and Pneumatics workshop are
preconfigured so as to feature a realistic simulation with few user interventions.
Communication variables from the Control workshop are the only exception to this rule.

 Automatic sheet displacement occurs when there is an action that extends beyond
the visible zone of the screen (component insertion, power line layouts, object
drawing, object expansion using its selection handles, etc.)

To insert a component in a diagram:

1. Display the Library Explorer or the Catalogue Manager.
2. Search for the desired symbol.
3. Click on the symbol without releasing the button, slide the cursor to the location to

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-1

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

insert the symbol on the diagram.

4. Release the button.
The symbol is placed on the diagram.

If needed, define the parameters in the component’s properties dialogue box (see
section 6.2 Properties of Library Components).

When a component that possesses an “Emitter” variable is inserted on the diagram, the
“Modify Variable” dialogue box (see figure below) opens automatically. An “Emitter” is a
variable where the value is assigned to a “Receiver” variable of another component. The
“Modify Variable” dialogue box is used to give an alias, a default value, and a description
of the component “Emitter” variable. This data makes it easier to locate the variable
during the variable assignment.

Figure 6-1: “Modify Variable” Dialogue Box

6.1.1.2 Links

Like electrical wires or circuit lines, links are used to connect components. The following
method is valid for all the editors. However, refer to the electrotechnical guide to
discover how to simultaneously edit multiple wires.

To set up a link:
1. Click on one of the symbol’s connection ports.

The mouse cursor takes this shape .

2. Simply click on the position to create elbows so as to avoid going over other
elements already in place.

In this situation, the mouse cursor takes this shape .

6-2
 Elements within a Diagram

The link is traced with the cursor.

3. Click again at the second connection port. The cursor takes this shape again.
4. The connection is established between the two components.

Alternatively, to end the link, double-click on an existing link to insert to it a bifurcation

and to connect it to the link under creation.

Double-click on an empty space: the created link will have one open end.

 To cancel the creation of a link, right-click with the mouse.

 This procedure is easier if the connection ports are visible. Make sure the following
command is checked: “View”  “Show”  “Connection Ports”.

 When a 3-link junction is created, a black connector is automatically created at the

junction, as stated in the ISO standards.

Modify the shape of a link once it’s inserted using the mouse.

To modify a link:

Occasionally the layout of elements on the diagram requires moving a link to avoid
overlapping.

 Moving any type of links or wires where they intersect is possible without having
to redesign all the links.

Figure 6-2: Example of Moving an Intersection

1. Select the link to modify.

The link appears in coloured dash line with grips and two types of handle are visible:

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-3

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

● Handles of rhombus shapes are placed on each of the link’s elbows.

● Handles of square shape are placed in the extremities of the link, and in the
center of each of the segments.
2. Approach the mouse cursor of one of the link’s handles.

In this situation, the mouse cursor takes one of these shapes .

3. Left-click on the handle.
4. Without releasing the mouse button, slide the cursor to its new location.
5. Release the mouse button. The link is modified.

 To change a link into a direct link, select the link to modify and select the “Direct
Link” option in its contextual menu using the right-click.

To move a link:

1. Select the link to move.

The link appears in dotted line, with the handles described above.
2. Approach the mouse cursor to a part of the link without handles.

The mouse cursor takes the following shape .

3. Left-click on the link.
4. Without releasing the mouse button, drag to the desired place.
The link moves while dragging.
5. Release the mouse button.
The link is moved; a new link is created to each of its ends, to establish the
connection with the ports (connectors).

 To avoid the creation of links at the ends, maintain the SHIFT key during the
procedure.

To set a line’s jump:

6-4
 Elements within a Diagram

Configure the representation of two lines jumps. To do so: go to “Project Properties” 

“Fluid System”  “Fluid standards”  “Links” category  “Connecting and Crossing
Lines Appearance” option, and select the appearance.

 For electric wires, go to “Project Properties”  “Electrical System”  “Multi-Lines”

 “Electrotechnical Standards”  “Wires” category  “Wires Connecting and
Crossing and Bundling” option, and select the appearance.

All lines connecting and crossing in the corresponding document are modified.

Locally modify the line’s jump layout by the contextual menu of a jump.

Figure 6-3: Contextual menu of a Line Jump

Type Layout
Horizontal Jump to Top

Left Vertical Jump

Horizontal Jump to Bottom

Right Vertical Jump

No Jump

To insert a bifurcation:

It is possible to insert a fork in an existing link by using the Link button:

1. Click on the “Link” command under the “Home” tab  “Links” group.

The mouse cursor takes this shape .

2. Click on the location of the link to insert a connection port or a fork and move the
cursor.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-5

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

A new connection port is created and a new link is drawn.

3. Click to draw the shape of the link.

To avoid connecting the other end of the link, click anywhere in the diagram. If the other
end of the link is to be connected to a connection port, click once on the connector to
terminate the link.

To divide a link:

A link may be cut so as to obtain two distinct links. Two criss-crossing links can also be
cut into four distinct links. Dividing links are used to cut a link at a specific location.
1. Click on the “Break Link” command under the “Home” tab  “Links” group.

The mouse cursor takes this shape .

2. Click on the spot where the link is to be divided.

Figure 6-4: Example of a Divided Link

The link is cut in two.
The mouse cursor reverts to its initial shape.
Each part of the new links can be separately selected.

 If the connection ports display is activated, then a new port is displayed between
the two new links.

To join two links:

Join two distinct links into a single one.

1. Select the consecutive links while pressing the SHIFT key.
2. Click on the “Join Links” command from the “Home” tab  “Links” group.
The connection port disappears and the two links merge into a single one. The
properties of the first link selected are transposed to the newly created link.

6-6
 Elements within a Diagram

To modify the link’s properties:

Each link property (pressure line, pilot line, electrical wire, etc.) that is available in the
software can be modified. Refer to the fluid standards of the project properties. When
connected to hydraulic, pneumatic, electric, numeric, or ladder diagram components,
these links adopt that technology’s properties.

Choose the “Component Properties…” command in the contextual menu that appears
when right-clicking on the link; or double-click on the link, or select the link and activate
the “Component Properties” command in the “View” group  “Properties” of the ribbon.

The “Component Properties” dialogue box opens and the link’s properties can be
modified.

Figure 6-5: Example of a “Component Properties” Dialogue Box to Modify a Link’s

Properties

 Refer to the contextual help of the link for further information on its properties.

 Using the commands from the “Line” group to modify the thickness and colour of
a link will locally override the display standard for this link.

To layout components on links

Condition of use: this function is only operational if a single ungrouped component is

moved on the link.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-7

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Case #1: Inserting a component directly from the library, from a different diagram, or by
copying one of the diagram’s components.

Simply select the component and insert it on the link making sure that the connector(s)
is (are) placed precisely on the link when releasing the mouse button.

Case #2: Moving a component on a link when both items are on the same diagram.

Simply move the component to the link while ensuring that the connector(s) remains on
the link, and that the SHIFT key is pressed down when releasing the component.

 The SHIFT key is used to automatically insert or to disconnect a component on a

link.

Verifying Links and Connections

Many diagnostic tools are available for every editor, so as to verify connection errors on
diagrams. These tools are launched by activating the “Diagnostic Tools” in the
“Diagnostic” group of the dedicated tab of each editor (Electrotechnical, SFC, One-Line,
and Fluid). Please refer to the relative user’s guide for detailed explanations on these
tools. The results of these diagnostics are displayed as text in the message window and
the faulty components will be in different colours highlighted.

Figure 6-6: Example of a Connection Verification in the message explorer

6.1.1.3 Graphic Elements

Insertion procedures are similar: lines, rectangles, and ellipses are inserted in the same
manner; however the insertion procedures for text boxes, pictures, and fields slightly

6-8
 Elements within a Diagram

differ in the last few steps. Link, arc, and polygon insertions are based on a distinct
procedure.

To insert an ellipse, rectangle or line:

1. Click on “Home” Tab “Drawing” Group “Ellipse” (“rectangle”, “line”).
The cursor takes on the shape of the selected object.
2. Left-click and hold the mouse button and drag the cursor to the opposite direction.
While dragging, the shape of the object appears and changes in accordance with the
moving mouse.
3. Release the mouse button when the object has reached the desired dimensions.
The graphic object is displayed on the diagram.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for every graphic object to be inserted in the diagram. It is not
necessary to repeatedly select the shape of the graphic object in the “Insert” menu
when several similar objects have to be created.
When all objects have been inserted, simply right-click on the mouse. The cursor
reverts to its original shape.

 Contrary to technology related links, a line does not transmit signals during
simulation. Hence, it cannot be used to join elements.

 For the ellipse and the rectangle, use the CTRL key for a circle or a square,
respectively.

To insert a text box:

1. Select the “Text” tool and repeat steps 1 to 3 of the previous procedure.
2. In the “Text” area, type in the text to be included in the diagram.
3. To stop inserting graphic objects, simply right-click on the mouse.
The cursor reverts to its original shape.

To insert a picture:
1. Select the “Picture” tool and repeat steps 1 to 3 of the previous procedure.
The “Insert Picture” dialogue box opens.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-9

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

2. Select the picture to be inserted in the diagram.

3. Click “Open”.
The picture appears in the diagram.

 An image can be copied from software and pasted directly on the diagram.

To insert an arc:
1. Select the “Arc” tool and repeat steps 1 to 3 of the previous procedure.
The initial shape of the arc corresponds to ¾ of a circle. To create an arc:
2. Click on one of the handles which are located on the left and top (9 and 12 o’clock),
and holding the mouse button, drag the cursor to either lengthen or shorten the arc
as needed.
3. To stop inserting graphic objects, simply right-click on the mouse.
The cursor reverts to its original shape.

 To modify an arc, select the object then click on the corresponding button in
“Home”  “Drawing”: the control handles appear on the arc to move it.

To insert a polygon:
1. Select the “Polygon” tool and repeat steps 1 to 3 of the previous procedure.
As soon as the mouse button is released, the second anchor point is created.
2. Change direction and click to fasten the third anchor point of the polygon in the
diagram.
3. Repeat the previous step as often as necessary.
4. To finish drawing the polygon, right-click anywhere.
The polygon closes.

 By double-clicking, a final point is inserted; and the polygon does not close (poly-
line).

 To update the layout of polygons and arcs, select them on the diagram and click
on the corresponding button “Home”  “Drawing”. The handles appear on this
element which can then be manipulated as needed.

6-10
 Elements within a Diagram

To insert a polypolygon:

 Repeat the steps of a closed polygon as needed.

To insert a spline:

 Repeat the steps of an opened polygon, but select the “Spline” tool.

To insert a reference:
1. Click on “Home” Tab “Documentation” Group  “Reference”.

The cursor takes this form .

2. Choose the object by moving over it.

The element will be highlighted if it can be referenced:

 A reference can be associated with an element, a group, an assembly or a sub-

component of an assembly.

3. Click on the element.

The cursor takes this form .

4. Click and hold the cursor exactly where the reference is to be and slide the mouse to
determine the location of the bubble in the document.
The reference is added to the document, respecting the actual standard in the project
(see section 4.2.2.3 Reference Standards).

 To update the layout of a reference, select it on the document and move its
handles.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-11

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

To insert fields on a diagram:

1. Click on. “Home” Tab “Drawing” Group  “Field”.

The mouse cursor takes the following shape .

2. Left-click to define a region for inserting the field.
The “Component Properties” dialogue box of the field opens. Make sure the “Fields”
branch is selected.

Figure 6-7: “Component Properties” Dialogue Box of a Field

3. Click on the “Current Project” or “Current Diagram” branch in the “Categories” zone.
The list of available fields appears in the Field Name zone.
4. Click on a field to select it in the “Field Name” zone.
The selected field and its value appear in the “Field Value” zone.

5. Activate the command to validate.

The field value is displayed in the field zone, on the diagram.

 Fill in the active project and/or diagram properties in order to display a value for
the selected fields to create title blocks in templates.

6.1.1.4 Bill of Materials and Revisions History

The Bill of Materials (B.O.M.) is displayed, in a tabular form, the list of components
present in a diagram/project. Different filters can be applied.

6-12
 Elements within a Diagram

The revision history is displayed in same way, listing relevant information in the stages
of revision of a diagram.

One or many Bills of Materials/Histories can be inserted in a diagram.

Figure 6-8: Part of a “BOM”

It is possible to add fields to the Bill of Materials in order to access more relevant
information and display additional data (see Reports chapter). It is now possible to insert
several BOMs on the same diagram.

To insert a BOM or a history:

1. Click on. “Home” Tab “Insert” Group  “Bill of Materials” (or “History”).
2. Click on the diagram where the first handle of the BOM is to be inserted and without
releasing the mouse button, drag the cursor to the opposite direction.
3. Release the mouse button to finish the insertion.
The BOM contains the list of components that are in the diagram.

To edit a BOM or a history:

1. Double-click on the BOM in the diagram in order to open its properties dialogue box.
2. Use the “Filter” and “Layout” branches the same way as a report:

 For the “Filter” branch (“Filters”, Fields” and “Options” tabs), refer to section 0 .

 For the “Layout” branch, refer to section Error! Reference source not found.
Error! Reference source not found..

 The same idea applies for the editing of a history.

As with all components in Automation Studio™, the BOM and revision history have data
that can be classified by category or in an alphanumeric order. The data of the
“Appearance” category can be used to modify the colour and the thickness of lines and

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-13

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

the text typography, just as the “Identification” category can be used to modify the
identification attributes.

Figure 6-9: Bill of Materials “Data” Branch

6.1.2 Component Search

It is possible to launch a search for a component that belongs to a specific installation or

an essential subdivision.

To search components:
1. Choose “Edit” Tab  “Editing” Group  “Find” (CTRL + F); and select installations or
subdivisions to search for components.
2. The “Component Search” appears dialogue box opens: select the pair(s) of circuit /
installation.

Figure 6-10: Searching Components of a Circuit.

3. Click on the “Search…” button.
All components that belong to the installations or subdivisions are selected on the

6-14
 Elements within a Diagram

diagram.

6.1.3 Find and Replace Text

It is possible to search specific text in different items of a project and to replace it

depending on the text localication.

To Search Text :
1. Choose “Find & Replace Text” command from “Editing” group of the “Edit” tab or hit
directly CTRL +F ;

The search dialogue opens up to “Find” tab;

2. Write the text to find in the editable text zone named “Find what:”;
3. Define the search scope by choosing between the options in the “Within:” dropdown
list:
● Entire Project
● All Opened Documents
● Current Document
4. Restrict the search area to one of the choices in “Look in:” dropdown list :
● All
● Variables
● Expressions
● References
● Accessories

You can also ask to search :

5. Only fields with identical text then the researched term;
6. Only Fields containing the entire word;
7. To respect capital letters;

And finally :

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-15

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

8. Click on “Find All” Command or hit ENTER on your keybord.

Search Results

During a search, results are updated continuasly and are displayed in the bottom area of
the dialog window.

You can stop the search process at any time by clicking on “Stop” command.

 You can continue working in your project while the search process is on going.

The result area is a table containing the following columns :

Texte : display the complete text, where the string was found;

Type: it gives the type of item where the string was found;

Location: it gives the component location of where the text was found as a hyperlink;

Replaceable : This column specify if the text is replaceable or not by an icon ( ).

Restricictions for text replacement

The following items are not replaceable :

● A user translated variable alias;
● A user translated value of a variable;
● The alias, the value, the name and the description of a locked variable;
● A variable value that is not editable by the user;
● The current value of an ENUM variable;
● A variable alias in read only mode;
● A variable value in read only mode;
● A variable name in read only mode;
● A variable description in read only mode;
● Connectors expressions of a customizable bloc.

6-16
 Elements within a Diagram

 Be aware that no restriction or validation exists for text replacement in a SFC step
or transition and for the expression editor.

For text replacement :

You must have the “Replace” tab opened.

Two commands are possible:

● Replace All: while this command is active, the search specified in “Find what”
field will be replace by the text specified in “Replace with” field and this
everywhere it is found.
● Replace: This command is active only when a line is selected in the results list
and will replace the text (if replaceable) only for this location. Once it is replaced,
the line is higlighed in green and the selection goes to the next line.

6.1.4 Element Selection

Manipulating components becomes difficult on diagrams with many symbols, especially

when zoomed out. For example, symbols may be resized instead of moved. In order to
solve this problem, the selection of small components is made easier in Automation
Studio™.

To select an element:

 Simply click on the required element to select it.

To select several elements:

 Hold the SHIFT key down when selecting elements.

 An element selected inadvertently, can be removed from the multi-selection by

being clicked again while holding the SHIFT key.

To select several elements by framing:

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-17

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

The framing method is used to quickly select several consecutive elements.

1. Click, and hold down the left button of the mouse, and drag the mouse in the
opposite direction.
2. While dragging, a rectangle appears and sizes with the movement of the mouse.
3. Release the mouse button when the rectangle is the desired dimension.
4. All the elements inside the rectangle are selected.

To select all the elements of the diagram:

Choose “Edit” menu  “Edition” group  “Select”  “All” (CTRL + A).

The “Select” command of the “Edition” group can also be used to select different
elements on the active diagram: refer to section “Editing” Group.

 If you do your selection from the bottom right corner to the top left corner, all
components are selected even if they are partially included inside the rectangle.

6.1.5 Relocating Elements

This procedure applies to the relocation of all elements: a component, a link, or an object.

To relocate an element:
1. Select the element to be relocated.
2. Click on the element, and without releasing the mouse button, slide the cursor to the
new location of the element.
The element follows the mouse cursor.

 If several elements are selected simultaneously, they are assembled inside a

frame and relocated as a group.
3. Release the mouse button when the relocation is complete.

 If a linked component is relocated, the links remain active. To disconnect the links,
press the SHIFT button when sliding the cursor.

6-18
 Elements within a Diagram

6.1.6 Duplicating Elements

An element can be duplicated in order to obtain an identical copy of it in the diagram.

The “Duplicate” command does not use Windows Clipboard function. It is used to
duplicate elements while leaving the contents of the Clipboard intact.

To duplicate an element:
1. Select the element to duplicate, choose “Edit”  “Clipboard”  “Duplicate” (CTRL +
D).

2. Move the cursor to the location where the duplicated item is to appear and click.
A copy of the selection is inserted onto the diagram.

 Duplicate elements simply by selecting the element to copy, holding the CTRL key
down, and dragging the copy anywhere on the diagram. The copied element
follows the cursor to the new location or until the mouse button is released.

6.1.7 Deleting Components

To delete an element (component or selection):

1. Select the element to be removed from the diagram.
2. Choose “Edit”  “Delete” (DEL).
The selection is removed from the diagram.

6.1.8 Modifying Components

To modify the orientation of an element:

When creating a diagram, modify the orientation of elements in order to organize the
graphic representation of the circuit.

Select the object to be reoriented and choose the appropriate command in the “Edit”
menu  “Layout” group  “Position” that corresponds best (see “Layout” Group).

To modify the display order of a graphic object:

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-19

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Just like actual sheets of paper, the objects drawn first are obviously placed underneath
the more recently drawn ones. It is, however, possible to modify the display order.

Select the object to modify and choose the appropriate command in the “Edit” menu 
“Layout” group: “Bring to Front”, “Send to back”, “Bring Forward”, and “Send Backward”,
to modify the display order as needed.

To group elements:

It is possible to group several elements such as components, graphic objects, etc., so

they behave as one single element. Afterwards, they may be relocated simultaneously
simply by selecting the group.

Select the elements to group and choose “Layout”  “Group” (CTRL + G).

To modify the properties of a component in a group: select the group and double-click on
the desired component.

Figure 6-11: Selection of a Group and a Component

 To use several instances of a set of components linked together by variables,

group these components before duplicating them. Otherwise, assignment of the
variables will have to be redone manually. This mechanism is valid with a
controller.

For example, to create the following circuit, group it and duplicate it, the assignment of
the variables is still defined in each group.

6-20
 Elements within a Diagram

Figure 6-12: Group using Variable Assignment

To ungroup elements

Select the group and choose “Layout”  “Ungroup” (CTRL + U by default) in the “Edit”
menu.

6.1.9 Modifying a Group or an Assembly

In the following chapter, when speaking of a group it includes assemblies unless

specified otherwise.

It is possible to manually edit a group as it is for a circuit built of independent

components. However, an edition mode exists for components group or assembly.

When a group is selected, a contextual tab appears in the ribbon bar.

Modify a group

13. Select a group to modify it.

A contextual tab appears on the ribbon bar when a group is selected. This tab is
named « Group » or « Assembly » according to the nature of the element
selected.

Figure 6-13 : Contextual « Edit » tab for group edition (or assembly)

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-21

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Command Description Shortcut

Begin Group Edition Switch to edition mode for the selected CTRL + K
/ Begin Sub-group group or sub-group.
Edition
Go Up One Level Allows to go up of one level in embedded CTRL +
groups. SHIFT + K

End Group Edition Exit Group Edition mode. ENTER

14. Click on « Begin Group Edition » from « Manager » group of the contextual tab.

 You can also use CTRL+K as a shortcut to go in group edition mode or by right-
clicking on the group and choose the command “Begin Group Edition”.

In group or assembly edition mode, components from the group are represented in their
original color as when other components are grayed out. Only components from the
group are editable in this mode.

Figure 6-14 : Group edition with axis visualization

A coordinate system is displayed for each element selected to indicate if the layout of

6-22
 Elements within a Diagram

those components was previously modified (Flip, rotation,…)

Figure 6-15 : Appearance of coordinates system of a component not modified and modified

15. While editing the group diagram, you can add, move or delete components like
you would do it with a circuit of independent components (not grouped).

Some functionalities are not available while editing a group. However, you can access
those functions after leaving the group edition mode (ENTER).

To edit an embedded group (sub-group) in a group, steps 1 to 3 are applicable.

In this case, we name this an embedding level. To navigate through the different levels
or to go back to the diagram editor, you can use the functions “Go Up One Level” or “End
Group Edition”.

Select Sub-components in a Group

Select a sub-component in a group by a left click on the desired component and use
SHIFT key for a multiple selection.

 Both multiple selection types CTRL + A and the selection rectangle are not
available.

Insert Components in a Group

Drag and drop a component or copy and paste a component to insert it in the group in
editing mode.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-23

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Not Supported Functions

The following functions are not supported during group edition mode :
● Dynamic Measuring Instruments
● Select All
● Component Search
● Select by component type
● Open/Close Embedded Component
● Create a Custom Component
● Create a Concept Diagram
● Generate a Cross Section View
● Pump Conversion
● Create a Black box
● Generate a Spool Position
● Extract Symbol

Other Limitations

It is not possible to insert in a manipulated group a component that cannot receive the
same manipulation.

For example, it is not possible to insert :

 A component for which the size is locked in a resized group. To insert it in the group,
you must unlock the component size first.
 A component that is not resizable in a resized group. The BOM component for
example.
 A component Limited to an orthogonal rotation in a group rotated from a non
orthogonal angle. For example, an hydraulic line.

6.1.10 Transferring Elements between Diagrams

The clipboard is a function of Windows used for the temporary storage of data for an
information transfer.

This function can be used to transfer or copy elements from one diagram to another.

6-24
 Elements within a Diagram

To transfer a selection or its copy in another diagram:

1. Select the element to transfer.
2. Depending on whether to transfer or copy the selection, choose either the “Cut” (CTRL
+ X) or “Copy” (CTRL + C) function in “Edit”  “Clipboard”.
Based on the previous choice, the selection is removed or copied from the diagram
and stored in the Clipboard.
3. Open the diagram on which to transfer or copy the selection.
The second diagram appears on the screen.
4. Choose the “Edit” menu  “Clipboard”  “Paste” (CTRL + V).
The content of the Clipboard is inserted on the diagram.

To Transfer a Diagram into Another Diagram:

The transfer procedure for a diagram is identical to the transfer of elements; please refer
to the previous section. Simply choose the Select All command (CTRL + A) to execute the
selection before transferring or copying the elements to another diagram.

6.1.11 Using Jump-to-Label Instead of Links

The Jump-to-Label is used to create a link between distant components connection ports
or when the components are drawn on separate pages. Two possible methods can be
used to create jump-to-label connections:
1. Create a usual line between components and then right-click to access the contextual
menu into which the function “Convert Link to Jump” can be used to automatically
convert the existing line into two separated jumps. In this case, the association
between the “Input” Jump to Label and the “Output” Jump to Label is automatically
created with the default name “R#”.
2. Manually take an “Input” Jump to Label from the library and under the “Association”
branch, type the desired name for that jump. Then, take an “Output” Jump to Label
and open it under the “Association” branch where the given name to the “Input”
Jump to Label must be selected in order to create the link between the two jumps.
Make sure to use only one “Input” for each “Output”, regardless of the flow
direction.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-25

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

6.2 Properties of Library Components

Since Automation Studio™ is able to document, simulate and communicate with other
hardware via the OPC protocol, the two following terms are used to characterize the
attributes of a component: “properties” and “variables”.

To edit or modify the properties of a component or a selection:

Choose the “Component Properties” command in the “View” menu  “Properties” group,
or, use the ALT+ENTER shortcut (by default), or choose the “Component Properties…”
command in the contextual menu when right-clicking on a component.

The component properties window was introduced in section 2.2.2 Properties Window.
These are the “Data”, “Accessories”, “Curves”, and “Variable Assignment” branches.

The “Sizing” branch is treated in details in section 6.3 Sizing Sheet Manager. The
“Troubleshooting” branch is explained in section 2.2.14 Failure Builder. The other
branches are local to each component.

 For more details on the properties of a specific component, see the help
associated with this component (accessible from the contextual menu of the
component, or by the F1 function key by default). Also, refer to the guide of the
concerned workshop for specific information on every component.

Modification and Creation of Properties for a Multiple Selection

When several components are selected, the common properties will be displayed in the
properties window, and can be modified. A value will not be displayed for a property,
unless this value is common to all the selected components.

For the Boolean attributes of multiple selection properties, if all the components display
the property, the box will be checked; if none of the components display the property,
the box will be unchecked. If some components display the property and some don’t, the
check mark will be grey.

In a multiple selection, if one of the fields to modify is not available, it is probably about
a field which is not editable or that this last one is not common to all the selected
elements.

The custom properties creation function is available for a single selected component as

6-26
 Elements within a Diagram

well as for a multi-selection of components. Specific properties can be added to all the
components of a diagram or a project.

 The custom properties created this way remain properties that are local to
components, as opposed to global properties (See section 4.2.1.5 Components’
Global Properties).

6.2.1 “Data” Branch

Each symbol in the main library represents a component. Each of these components is
defined by its numerical or text properties. Some of these components have specific data
settings. These specific properties are explained in the component’s contextual help and
inside the User’s Guide of its respective technology. The following section describes the
“Data” Branch in the dialogue box which contains the list of alphanumeric properties.

Figure 6-16: “Component Properties” Dialogue Box of a Single Component or Group

The “Data” branch of a component properties dialogue contains 4 zones:

Zone Description

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-27

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Zone Description
1 Toolbar For easy access to the frequently used commands. The
content of the toolbar is customizable.
Section 6.2.1.1 Toolbar below describes the available
commands.
2 Component Image This zone can contain an image to better understand the
meaning of certain data relative to the component.
If several images are available, use left and right arrows to
move from an image to the other one.
This zone can be displayed or hidden by activating the
or button, respectively.
3 List of Properties This zone displays the list of properties. The properties are
the main functions that make Automation Studio™ an
efficient product:
● They enable system simulation.
● They feed reports and bill of materials.
● They contain information about the components’
symbols on the diagrams.
● They identify the components and their
connectivity.
● They provide information on the use in the editor:
layer, taken into consideration in reports or
excluded.
4 Details When a property is selected, this zone contains all the
details or attributes of the property. These details can be
modified.
This zone can be displayed or hidden by activating the
or button, respectively.

6.2.1.1 Toolbar

A right-click on the toolbar displays a contextual menu to switch the display of a

command in the bar. The “Configure” command in the contextual menu opens the
configuration window (see section Configuration Window below).

6-28
 Elements within a Diagram

It is also possible to choose the commands to be displayed in the toolbar via this
configuration window.

 A tooltip associated with every toolbar icon provides more details on the
command.

 The button is used to access the commands that are not displayed in the
toolbar.

The following commands are available in the toolbar:

Command Description
Show Alphabetical List / To switch the properties display between
Categorize alphabetical and category modes.
In category mode (see Figure
6-16: “Component Properties” Dialogue Box of
a Single Component or Group), a click on the
“+” or “-“symbols allows respectively showing
or hiding the contents of the category.
Display only favorite This command display or hide some of the
properties / Display all properties based on favorites.
properties

Add Variable To create a custom property.

Delete Variable(s) To delete customized properties.

Print Preview To obtain a preview of how a table of the

properties will appear when printed.
Print To print a table of the properties.

Lock / Unlock the component To lock or unlock the editing capabilities of the
component properties.

Find in the catalogue To search a component in a catalogue –the

checkbox is used to select certain properties as
search criteria.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-29

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Command Description
Component sizing from the Open the sizing sheet manager to the
sizing sheet manager appropriate page for sizing the component.
From this function, some component properties
are linked to the sizing sheet and can be
modified from the sizing sheet manager.
Options Opens the displayed data configuration
dialogue box (see section Configuration
Window below).

Configuration Window

The configuration window is used to set:

● The commands to display in the toolbar.
● The columns to display in the list of properties.
● The information displayed in the tooltip that appears when the mouse cursor is
on a property in the list of properties.

To access the configuration window, click on the icon, if it is visible in the toolbar.
Otherwise, choose the “Configure” command available in the contextual menu that
appears when right-clicking on the toolbar, or anywhere in the list of properties.

The use of the configuration window is identical to that described in section Using the
Configuration Window.

6.2.1.2 List of Properties

The list of properties displays the component properties: it is possible to modify certain
attributes of these properties, and create own custom properties.

Properties Attributes

The choice of columns in the list of properties is customizable via the Configuration
Window. Every column corresponds to an attribute of the properties. The available
attributes are:
Attribute Description

6-30
 Elements within a Diagram

Attribute Description
Name Name of the property. This name cannot be modified.
Alias The user-defined name of the property assigned by the user.
Display Value To display or hide the variable value on the diagram.
(Boolean)
Display Alias To display or hide the alias of the property on the diagram.
(Boolean)
Display in Tooltip To display or hide the property name and its value in the
(Boolean) component tooltip.
Value The value of the property.
Unit The unit of a measurable property can be modified.
Variable State Visual indication of whether the property value comes from a
catalogue, has been modified, or is locked with the toolbar
command.
Refer to the state attribute tooltip if the icon representing the
state does not seem familiar.
Description Description of the variable.
Location The diagram name, component identifier, and variable name.
Measure The type of measure for the property.
Precision The specified number of significant decimals in the variable
value, if it is numerical.
Type The type of the property. Reserved to internal use and for the
Control workshop users, this attribute gives an indication on
the type of variable: integer, real, text, hyperlink.
User translated If this property is checked, the name and the value (if it is a
text(Boolean) text) will be entered in the custom translation table of the
project. Refer to section 2.2.9 Translation Manager.

 The used units are those of the configured system during the installation of the
software. They can be converted automatically to the proposed unit type in the
drop-down list and with the desired display precision.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-31

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide
Properties Categorization

When the list of properties is displayed in the Category mode, properties are grouped by
categories:
Category Description
Technical - Physical parameters used in the model of analogic or graphic
Characteristic behaviour of the component. The values of these properties
are estimated and injected in the calculation of the system
resolution constituted by the diagrams to be simulated. In a
general way, it is data found easily in the manufacturers’
specifications. The properties of “Enumerate” type have the
icon at the first column from the left in the list of
properties.
Some of these properties can be edited, while others cannot.
The properties that cannot be modified are calculated
automatically from other properties, and have the icon in
the first column from the left in the list of properties. For
example, if the diameter of a section is modified, the surface
can be automatically calculated.
Technical – External These properties are external to the component. They are
Data used to model certain physical parameters influencing their
behaviour. They are present, generally, for actuators and
power elements. They can represent for example the efforts
which will apply to actuators during the simulation.
Technical – These properties are necessary for the Automation Studio™
Automation Studio simulator in order to better represent the component’s
behaviour.
Technical - Plotter The values of these properties are calculated in simulation.
Some of these variables can be plotted in the plotter, while
others cannot. The variables that can be plotted have the
icon in the first column from the left in the list of properties;
on the other hand, the variables that cannot be plotted have
the icon.

6-32
 Elements within a Diagram

Category Description
Operating Condition Most of these properties define the limits of use of the real
component (maximal pressure, maximum flow, etc.). They
are generally extracted from the industrial catalogues. When
the “Display Faulty Components” or “Automatic Failures”
options are activated, it is these properties which activate
their effects.
These properties can also define the extreme values of the
physical parameters supported by the component and are
suggested to limit the values of the user in agreement with
the underlying mathematical modeling.
Description These properties provide additional information on the
function of the component within the system.
Identification These properties identify:
● Component’s functional location (installation, circuit).
● Component’s ports.
● Commercial or production origin, useful for the
reports (see section 6.1.1.4 Bill of Materials and
Revisions History and chapter 7 Reports).
Commercial These properties are associated with a symbol and are used
to generate various types of reports: BOM, commercial and
technical reports, etc.
Miscellaneous These are properties that cannot be classified according to
previous categories. They are related to editing
functionalities, such as the component layer, for example.
User Defined This category is visible only for the first user-defined
(custom) property. The variables of “Table” type have the
icon in the first column from the left in the list of properties;
and the variables of “Structure “ type have the icon.

 The alias of the properties used by the simulator is displayed in blue in the
component properties dialogue box. The simulator can use them to evaluate the
component’s behaviour, to detect a maximum value reached, or to scale certain
sensors (cylinders, motors, etc.).

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-33

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

 The available manufacturers’ catalogues on the www.automationstudio.com

website contain products preconfigured according to the manufacturers’
specifications. Refer to the Catalogue Manager User’s Guide for more information
on this feature.

All the symbols used in a circuit do not necessarily correspond to a unique component:
for example, an assembly of symbols often represents a single product. Therefore, every
component of the library contains the property “Disregarded in B.O.M.” (In the
“Miscellaneous” category) for the option to exclude the component from reports and
lists. To exclude a symbol from the bill of materials, check this property for this symbol.

Properties Edition

It is possible modify certain attributes of properties directly in the list of properties.

 To modify a property value, the component must be unlocked.

It is also possible to edit the attributes of the current selected property in the “Details”
zone, when the latter is visible. For example, if the name by default of a property can be
associated with an alias.

When a modification is brought to a property, it is immediately taken into account and

without validation. To cancel a modification, apply the “Cancel” (CTRL+Z) function
accessible by default in the application’s customized toolbar.

It is also possible to add custom (user defined) properties:

To add a custom property, first make sure the component is not locked. Then, activate

the command (“Add Variable”) in the toolbar, and fill the required fields in the “Add
Variable” window.

Figure 6-17: “Add Variable” Window

6-34
 Elements within a Diagram

Field Description
Variable Type Drop-down list to choose the variable type.
Measure Type Drop-down list to select the variable measure.
Variable Name Field to enter the variable name.

The following table lists the different types of variables in Automation Studio ™ (IEC
61131-3 or IEC 60559\IEEE_754):
AS VARIABLES TYPE Description Min / Max
BOOL Boolean False = 0 or True = 1
SINT Short Integer -128 to 127
INT Standard Integer -32 768 to 32 767
DINT Double Integer -2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647
LINT Long integer -9 223 372 036 854 775 808 to
9 223 372 036 854 775 807
USINT Unsigned Short 0 to 255
Integer
UINT Unsigned Standard 0 to 65 535
Integer
UDINT Unsigned Double 0 to 4 294 967 295
Integer
ULINT Unsigned Long 0 to 18 446 744 073 709 551 615
integer
REAL Real Number 3.4 E+/-38 (7 digits)
LREAL Long Real 1.7 E+/-308 (15 digits)
TIME Time N/A
DATE Date only N/A
TIME_OF_DAY Time of the day N/A
only
DATE_AND_TIME Date and time of N/A

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-35

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

AS VARIABLES TYPE Description Min / Max

the day
STRING String (8 N/A
bits/character)
BYTE Byte 0 to 255
WORD Word 0 to 65 535
DWORD Double Word 0 to 4 294 967 295
LWORD Long Word 0 to 18 446 744 073 709 551 615
WSTRING String (16 N/A
bits/character)
CURRENCY Currency 922337203685477.5807 to -
922337203685477.5808 (263-1 to -
263)
DECIMAL Decimal +/-
79228162514264337593543950335
(+/- 296) * times 10 to the power of 0
to 28
ENUM Enumeration N/A
STRUCT Structure N/A
ARRAY Array N/A

By order: 16 bits reserved, 8 bits for the scale (exponent 10, from 0 to 28), 8 bits for the
sign (+ or -), 64 for the value.

It is possible to add related information to a symbol or an assembly on a diagram by

assigning hyperlinks properties.

Once added and edited, these hyperlinks are found at the bottom of the component’s
contextual menu (Figure 6-18: Contextual menu “External File”) or its tooltip, and are
accessible by simply clicking on the desired file. There are endless possibilities to work
with. Point to a manufacturer’s PDF file, play a video on the behaviour of a machine or
anything else using a hyperlink.

6-36
 Elements within a Diagram

 When working with hyperlinks, it is very important to remember that the link
between the source and the destination can be broken. It can be a permanent
break, if the file has been moved or deleted, or it can be a temporary break if the
Internet site or area network that hosts the file is down.

Figure 6-18: Contextual menu “External File”

To delete a custom property, select it and activate the command (“Delete

variable(s)”) in the toolbar.

6.2.2 “Accessories” Branch

For more information on this branch, refer to section 6.5 Accessories Management.

6.2.3 Graphical Data

Certain branches in the component properties window contain graphical data: for
example the Fixed Displacement Pump has the “Characteristic Curves” branch (Figure
6-19: “Component Properties” Dialogue Box, “Characteristic Curves”), and the Double
Acting Cylinder has the “Driving Force Curve” and “Resistive Force Curve” branches.

Characteristic curves are used during simulation for components with templates that are
defined by graphic modelling. Usually, a curve is defined for a specific value of a
parameter, which is based on one entry from the “Basic Technical Data”.

Refer to the Hydraulics and Pneumatics Workshops User’s Guide for the explanations of
pump behaviour curves, pressure drop in the pressure valves curves, actuator force
curves, ambient temperature generator curves, set point device curves, etc.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-37

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 6-19: “Component Properties” Dialogue Box, “Characteristic Curves”

The “Characteristic Curves” dialogue box contains the following areas:

Area Description
1 Functionality Bar To access many curve related features.
2 Axis of the The value of abscissa defined in the installation unit of the
Abscissa (X-Axis) software.
3 Graphical Display Graphical display zone for different curves.
Zone
4 Axis of Ordinate The value of ordinates defined in the installation unit of the
(Y-Axis) software.
5 Curve Editable parameter value depending on the curve type.
Parameters
6 To zoom in on specific parts of the curve. A rectangle framed
by left-clicking with the mouse defines the zoom zone.
To access all available curves.

7 Point The values of the selected curve in points (abscissa, ordinate).

Coordinates The table header contains the name of the parameter
displayed in abscissa, (1st column) and in ordinate units (2nd

6-38
 Elements within a Diagram

Area Description
column).
8 To access specific tabs (which number vary according to the
component) containing curve parameters. Help is available
under the button at the right top of the window called
“General Settings”.

Most hydraulic and pneumatic components behave in a way that can be graphically
portrayed. Each component in Automation Studio™ includes a set of standard curves
reflecting the manufacturers’ measures. For a specific component, each curve is
associated with a specific parameter with a differing value depending on the selected
curve. This parameter can be edited in its corresponding field. This parameter is also
visible in the component basic technical data. The value of the parameter visible in the
Technical Data can be modified, although it does not imply that a curve will be defined
for that specific value. However, the simulator automatically creates a curve based on the
component parameter using the in-between method. This curve is constructed
dynamically by the simulator and is not visible.

To edit a curve:
1. Select the curve to be modified.
The selected curve appears in a different colour.
2. Modify the value of the curve’s parameter if needed.

 Look at the value of the component’s parameter in the “Technical Data”, and then
associate the value with the curve. Therefore, the edited curve is used by the
simulator instead of the in-between method.
3. Modify the values of the points’ coordinates that are displayed in the chart.

Or
4. Drag the curves’ points directly in the chart area.
During modification, points that do not comply with the constraints appear in a
different colour. These points should be changed prior to applying the changes.

5. Validate modifications by clicking on the button or by selecting a different

curve.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-39

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

While validating, constraints are applied in relation to the curve’s growth rate.

 The simulator considers that a pressure curve based on flow is strictly increasing or
decreasing if the variation rate in absolute value is higher than 1 bar for 1000 LPM,
either dp/dq > 0.1 bar/LPM or dp/dq > 5.5 psi/GPM.

 These curves simulate realistic performance of components.

6.2.4 “Variable Assignment” Branch

Some component properties can be dynamically modified during simulation; this is the
reason they are called “variables”. Automation Studio™ uses these component variables
and internal variables which are not linked to components to allow communication
between components. This communication link is called “Variable Assignment” which
doesn’t have any visual representation on the diagram. The Variable Manager is used to
visualize the variable’s assignment state (see section 2.2.6 Variable Manager).

Using this variable communication link, create:

● Command circuits (SFC, Ladder Logic, Electrical Control) which communicate with
the operative circuit.
● Animations with the HMI workshop which moves the CAD elements using the
component variables.
● Control panels. Refer to the HMI and Panel Control Workshop Guide.

It is essential to know the unit of both the output variable of the transmiter and the input
variable of the receiver. The following tables list the unit associated to each type of
variable according to their measurement type.

éFor Transmitters Variable

An output variable is in writing mode. The output variable value is transmitted to an

other variable or used in a equation of a SFC diagram, a controller, a block diagram,…

For example: from the following table, if you assign the “Output Signal Position” of a
cylinder to a controller, the controller read the value as meters even if the value is
displayed in a different unit on the editor.

6-40
 Elements within a Diagram

Measurement Transmitter variable unit

Percentage %

Length m
3
Volume m
Angle rad
Linear Speed m/s
Angular Speed rpm
2
Acceleration m/s
2
Angular Acceleration rad/s
Time m:s.ms
Output Signal Without unit

3
Hydraulic Flow m /s
3
Pneumatic Flow m /s (Atm)
Pressure kPa
Temperature °C
Torque N.m
3
Displacement cm /rev
Fluid height m

Current A
Voltage V
Resistance Ohm
Frequency Hz
Energy J
Power W

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-41

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Measurement Transmitter variable unit

Active Energy Ws
Apparent Energy VAs
Reactive Energy VAR
Active Power W
Apparent Power VA
Reactive Power VAR

For Receivers Variable

An input variable is in reading mode. The input variable reads the value of an output
variable. For example : if the input variable is the resistive force of a cylinder, the
associated output variable will be read as kN.
Measurement Output Variable Unit
Force kN

Torque kN.m

External Load kg
Angular Speed tr/min
Dissipation Power kW
Power W
Inclination rad
Resistance Ohm
Inductance H
Capacitance F
Active Power W
Apparent Power VA
Reactive Power VAR
2
Inertia Drive kg.m

6-42
 Elements within a Diagram

Measurement Output Variable Unit

Input Signal Without unit

Examples of communication between components:

● Coil State (Boolean variable)  ON/OFF Directional Valve Electrical Command
State (Boolean variable).
● Joystick Position (Real variable)  Proportional Valve Coil Position (Real
variable).
● Electrical Internal Contact  Coil.
● Boolean Sensor  SFC.

Component variables are automatically created when inserted onto diagrams. Logical
internal variables must be created by the user in the dialogue boxes of components’
properties or in the “Variable Manager”.

Some components act as transmitters in that they are transmitting their status or value
to other components or variables. For example, a relay coil transmits its status to
contacts that refer to it.

Other components act as receivers in that they receive their status or value from a
transmitting component or internal variable. For example, a relay contact receives its
status from the coil to which it refers.

Some components have several variables, some of which act as transmitters and others
as receivers.

Internal variables can act as transmitters and as receivers.

The assignment of variables allows the creation of a Read or Write link from a specific
variable to a compatible variable or to an external variable, such as an element from an
OPC server. These links are used by the simulator to evaluate components’ status as well
as those of internal and external variables during simulation.

The options in the “Variable Assignment” branch differ depending on whether the
component is a transmitter or a receiver.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-43

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 6-20: “Component Properties” Dialogue Box, “Variable Assignment” Branch for
Transmitter and Receiver Components

The following is a description of the fields that make up this dialogue box:
Zone Description
1 Toolbar This toolbar contains commands to:
● Add a variable to the component.
● Modify the dialogue appearance.
● Configure the displayed attributes and the variables
in the columns.
A right-click on the toolbar displays a contextual menu to
switch the display of a command in the toolbar. The
“Configure” command in the contextual menu opens also the
configuration window.
2 Table of the The component variables listed here are variables that can
component be linked (read or write) with other variables.
variables The displayed columns in this table can be chosen in the
properties configuration dialogue.

3 Compatible The variables listed in this table correspond to the available

Variable Table variables in the project and they are compatible with the
component variables listed in the table above. They can be
linked to read or to write and receive or transmit their state.

6-44
 Elements within a Diagram

Zone Description
4 Associations This list presents the associations that have been created.
List
5 To create a link between the component variable and its
compatible variable.
6 To delete all the links of the selected variable.

7 To select the type of link. If the selected component is a

transmitter/receiver, the user can select the desired type of
link, either Read or Write. Compatible variables are displayed
based on this selection. If a link exists, the compatible
variable to which the link is attached is selected.
8 OPC Link This button prompts the OPC Settings dialogue box for the
creation of links on OPC items from an API or other sources.
See the OPC user guide for further details.

 It is possible to link different kinds of variables as Automation Studio ™ can

automatically convert them. For instance, a real number or an integer X, if linked
to a Boolean variable is considered false if X=0 and true if X is different from 0. A
real number X will be truncated to be interpreted as an integer. A Boolean is 0 or 1
when linked to a numeric variable.

To create an internal link:

1. Select a variable from the table of component variables.
2. Select the required type of link based on the context (Read/Write).
3. Select a variable from the table of compatible variables.

4. Click on the “Link” button .

5. Click on the “Delete All” Links to remove all internal and external links of the
selected variable.
The “Read Link” or “Write Link” column is updated.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-45

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

If variable assignments exist between transmitters and receivers of a group, the

assignments are saved when the group is duplicated, sent to a library or inserted from
the library on a diagram. This is used to create user-defined libraries with assignments
that can be used as needed.

To create an OPC link (External):

Refer to OPC User’s Guide.

6.3 Sizing Sheet Manager

The sizing sheets are located in the « Tool » tab, in the « Management » group.

Figure 6-21 Access to Sizing Sheet Manager

The “Sizing Sheet Manager” window contains all the Automation Studio ™ technology
sheets. The available technologies and component groups are listed on the dialogue’s left
side. On the right side, the user can create different sizing scenarios, save and associate
them to the project’s component.

6-46
 Elements within a Diagram

Figure 6-22 Sizing Sheet Manager's Window

The sizing sheets are used to perform the calculations that are required to select and size
a component within a circuit. The sizing sheets calculate component requirements in
terms of capability, and apply certain properties to the components found in some
Automation Studio™ projects.

The sizing sheets use a computing engine to calculate unknown values with the available
values. They use theoretical equations to calculate some parameters and function
according to an equation resolution system used to vary some parameters and observe
their effects on other parameters. The following figure shows the tool’s interface.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-47

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 6-23 Sizing Sheet Manager Description

Description

1 Tree-like structure of technologies and components’ groups like defined in

Automation Studio™. A physical image of a component’s example from the
selected group is displayed at the bottom of the library.
2 List of different sizing sheet scenarios of same type than the selected component.
In the “edition” toolbar, some new sizing sheets can be created and locked.
3 List of the “Input” and “Output” calculations parameters.
 The two check box columns are used to set a parameter as “input”

(known value) or “output” (unknown value) .

 Parameters that can be transferred to the component’s Technical Data
appear in bold.
4 Identification, calculations and equations tabs
● Field for the sizing sheet name and description.
● Field for sizing parameters values.
● List of available units for parameters computing.
● Description of equations used in sizing.

The “Calculations” tab contains the following toolbar:

6-48
 Elements within a Diagram

Figure 6-24 Sizing Sheet "Calculation" Tab

Icon Description

For pre-visualization and printing the results’ table.

To launch a search on the products that correspond to the
calculated values in the opened catalogues.

To recharge other sizing sheets values related to current

sheet.

Tools for transferring component’s parameters to the

sizing sheet and sizing sheet values to the associated
component.

Project component associated to the current sizing sheet.

6.3.1 Working with sizing sheets

To launch a calculation, the user needs to select the right technology and component’s
category. Then, he can access the sizing sheets on the tool’s right side. This tab contains
the default calculation sheets whose scope is Automation Studio ™ and the custom ones
whose scope is the project. The sizing sheets that are delivered with the application
cannot be modified (“Unlock Sizing Sheet” is disabled).

Figure 6-25 Sizing Sheets List for Double-Acting Cylinder

When a sizing sheet is selected, some values already appear in the “Calculations” fields

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-49

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

where two types of parameters are displayed:

“Output” parameters: those parameters are taken from equations and stand for
researched (calculated) values.

“Input” parameters: those parameters are also taken from the equations but their value
has to be entered by user.

Figure 6-26 Sizing Sheets Parameters

The parameters in bold (ex. Piston Diameter (D)) are the parameters whose values can
be exchanged with technical data of the component of the diagram associated to the
sizing sheet.

Making Calculations

To make calculations, the user has to select the sizing sheet corresponding to its search.
In the “Calculations” tab, “Input” parameters values can be modified with your project
Data. “Output” parameters values will then appear and be automatically calculated
(disabled fields).

 If a parameter is measurable its unit can be chosen.

6-50
 Elements within a Diagram

 The default units are those selected in the project properties (branch
“Project”“Standards” tab “edition”). They can be converted into any other unit
automatically with the drop list. If the default unit system is modified the new
sizing sheets created from that moment on will use the new units.

Sizing Sheet Example from the Hydraulic Workshop

Let’s use the sizing sheet for the hydraulic double-acting cylinder in order to calculate the
piston and rod diameters of a specific cylinder in a system.

In the “Input” parameters:

1. Enter general cylinder’s data:
● Rod side area: 40 cm2.
● Inclination: 45deg
2. Enter force and pressure information:
● Gravity acceleration: 9.8 m/s2
● External load: 1000 kg
● Push external force: 150 kN
● Piston side pressure: 100 bar
● Rod side pressure: 1 bar
3. In the “Output” Parameters, you get following results:
● Rod diameter: 122.2247 mm
● Piston diameter: 141.5339 mm

To print calculated Values

In the “Calculation” tab’s toolbar, this button generates, in an independent window

from which printing can be launched, a print preview of calculation results. To print

directly, you simply have to use the button.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-51

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 6-27 Print Preview of Calculation Results

To visualize equations

To visualize equations, select the “Equations” Tab and scroll the whole equations that

have been used. The “Print Preview” and “Print” buttons allow you to print
this page content.

The equations cannot be modified and are meant for calculating units in International
System (IS). Some constants have possibly been added to equations for conversion
purposes.

6-52
 Elements within a Diagram

Figure 6-28 Equations List Example for an Hydraulic Cylinder Sizing Sheet

Sizing Sheet Example from the Electrotechnical Workshop

Let’s use the sizing sheet for the 3-Phase AC Motor to compute the required voltage for it
to work.

In the “Input” Data:

1. Enter following data:
● Rated Frequency: 60 Hz.
● Number of poles: 12.
● Slip (%): 1.8.
2. Enter the following mechanical torque and power supply data:
● Mechanical Torque Available: 150 N.m.
● Line Current: 46 A.
3. In the “Output” parameters, you get following results:

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-53

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

● Assigned Voltage: 118.2913 V.

Figure 6-29 : Sizing Sheet Result for a 3-Phase AC Motor

To visualize additional information

The sizing sheets offer some additional information on certain parameters that are more
difficult to obtain. This information is for your reference only. It can vary according to
using conditions of components. It is important to be able to interpret these data and
understand what they represent before using them.

Figure 6-30 : Additional information in the Sizing Sheet

6-54
 Elements within a Diagram

To visualize additional information, click on the icon located on the right of

parameters unities.

6.3.2 Adding a new sizing sheet

You can configure your own sizing sheets after the current list of a component category.
For example, you would like to know the displacement and inlet flow required by your
application for a hydraulic motor.

To create your sizing sheet, follow these steps:

1. In the “Sizing Sheet Manager”, select in the tree-structure the “bidirectional motor”
category from the “Hydraulic/ Pumps and Motors” branch.

2. Click on the icon to add a new sizing sheet.

Figure 6-31 Adding a new Sizing Sheet

3. In the “Identification” tab, edit sizing sheet’s name and description. (Ex.:
“Displacement (Method 2)” and “Calculation of the required motor displacement”).

To accept the values entered in the editable fields click elsewhere on the sizing sheet.

Adding “Method 2” only helps to distinguish between this new sizing sheet with the

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-55

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

existing sizing sheet “Displacement” in the list.

4. Select “Calculations” tab and, on the left, in the “Output” column, select the
“Displacement” variable to give it as an output parameter.

Figure 6-32 "Output" Parameters’ Configuration of a Sizing Sheet

 For each sizing sheet, certain parameters must be known in advance. The
checkboxes allow you to set known and unknown values.

Once they are selected, the icon indicates that calculations cannot be completed
with current data, appears on the left of the “input” and “output” checkboxes columns
and on the right of the variables in the “Calculations” tab. Then, you have to decide
which variables will be given as “known” by selecting the mathematical relative

equation. A click on the icon on the right of the variables unities displays an equation
selection dialogue in order to set the calculations source. In this dialogue, additional
equations are specified together with their variables and their current status in the sheet.

6-56
 Elements within a Diagram

Figure 6-33 Equations selection specifying the Sizing Sheet Source

 To know the meaning of an icon, place mouse cursor on it to display its tooltip.

5. Click on the icon on the right of the “Displacement” variable unities and select
the equation of the torque at the motor shaft.

The “Differential Pressure”, “External Torque” and “Mechanical Efficiency” variables are
added to the “Required Unknown” category and appear in gold.

6. In the “Input” checkboxes column, select the 3 variables with the icon .

The sizing sheet is now completed.

 In case the icon would appear in front of a parameter, this would indicate an
incompatibility between some “input” and “output” parameters. In that case, you
have to unselect the variables and review the sizing sheet.

Figure 6-34 Sizing Sheet of an Hydraulic Motor Displacement

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-57

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

7. Select the units of each parameter.

 When the cursor is moving above the parameters, an image of the component’s
symbol and calculation variables appear.
8. In the “input” parameters, modify the default values to compute a new
displacement:
● System Maximum External Torque: 100 daN.m.
● Differential Pressure : 350 bar.
● Mechanical Efficiency: 80%.
3
We get a displacement of 224.3995 cm /rev.
9. To know the motor’s flow, select “Input Flow” as “output” parameter.

Figure 6-35 Adding the Flow to Sizing Sheet of the Hydraulic Motor’s Displacement
10. Repeat step 5 to 7 as for the “Displacement” parameter by selecting the equation of
the rotation speed at the motor shaft.

11. To lock the sheet, click on the icon.

6-58
 Elements within a Diagram

Figure 6-36 Locked Sizing Sheet for Displacement and Flow of an Hydraulic Motor

With a nominal speed of 800 RPM and a volumetric efficiency of 85%, the sizing sheet
shows that the motor will require an input flow of 211.1995 L/min.

Input Parameters Determination Mode

An input parameter value can be determine by different way from the following list:
● Manual entry
● Associated to the result of an other sizing sheet
● An utilisation profil
● Manual selection from a standard chart
● Manual selection in a table of standard data.

By default, the parameter determination mode is manual entry unless a specific

mode as been specified.

Linking sizing sheets with each other

In case the sizing sheets already exist in the category of the selected component, you
can add some more and use the results of other sizing sheets as « input » values. In that
case, if the sizing sheet is linked to other sizing sheets, the icon used to reload
values of other sheets will be activated.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-59

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

If we take the previous sizing sheet as an example, the input flow value could be
calculated in a new sheet. To link sizing sheets with each other, follow these steps:

1. Add a new sizing sheet and inform the “Identification” tab like the following
figure.

Figure 6-37 “Identification” tab, second Sizing Sheet

2. Edit the “Calculations” tab like the following picture and select the “Input Flow”
variable as output parameter.

Figure 6-38 Adding a second Sizing Sheet

3. Select “Displacement” as input variable.

The icon appears in the list, on the left of “Displacement”. This shows that this
variable is not used at this point in the calculations.

4. In the “Calculations” tab, click on the icon, on the right of the “Input Flow”
variable. Specify the nominal speed equation as calculation source.
5. Select “Nominal Speed” and “Volumetric Efficiency (%)” as input parameters.

6. In the “Calculation” tab, on the right of “Displacement”, click on the icon.

6-60
 Elements within a Diagram

Like represented in the following dialogue, the icon indicates that the parameter
value should be entered manually.

Figure 6-39 Dialogue to specify the Value Source of an Input Variable

At this step, it is possible to select the bottom checkbox indicating that the value can be
taken from another sizing sheet already present in this component category.

7. Click on this field then on the button which appears next to the parameter
“Displacement” to specify the sizing sheet that will give the displacement value.

8. The icon on the right changed into to show that this information can be read
from a linked sheet. Moreover, under the “Calculations” tab in the tools bar the icon
, which allows to update the values from linked sizing sheets, is now active.
Like shown in the following figure, a sizing sheet selection dialogue appears for you to
select the source that will give the value to the “Displacement” parameter.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-61

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 6-40 Locked Sizing Sheet for a Motor’s Displacement and Flow
9. Select the “Displacement” unknown in the “Displacement (Method 2)” sizing sheet
previously created from the “Bidirectional Motor” category. Then, click on the
button to close window.

The icon on the right of displacement becomes which indicates that this data can be
taken from another sheet linked to this sheet. Furthermore, in the toolbar “Calculation”
tab, the icon used to reload values of other sheets is now active.

10. Click on the icon to reload the displacement value of the linked sheet.
3
The value 224.3995 cm /rev is applied to the “Displacement” parameter of the current
sheet and the “Input Flow” gives as result: 211.1995 L/min for a nominal speed of 800
RPM and a volumetric efficiency of 85%.
11. Lock the sizing sheet in order not to lose its configuration.

6-62
 Elements within a Diagram

Figure 6-41 Sizing sheet linked to another sheet

Input variable defined by a profile curve (time dependent curve) and energetic
evaluations

Some input variables can be defined by a profile curve, i.e. by a curve function of the
time with a specified “cycle duration”. These variables can be useful for an energetic
evaluation of the components.

Let’s take as an example a hydraulic orifice to calculate the lost energy over a cycle of
the passing flow. The following steps show how to use variables with a profile curve to
obtain an energetic evaluation.
1. In the “Sizing sheet manager” select the “Orifice” under “Hydraulic / Valves” in the
tree.

2. Add a new sizing sheet and edit its name and description under the
“Identification” tab (e.g. “Lost energy” as name and “Flow cycle” as description).
3. Select the tab “Calculations”, on the left under the “Outputs” column select the
“Dissipated hydraulic energy”. This will be the result of the calculation.

4. Click on the icon on the right of the variable units of the “Dissipated hydraulic
energy” and select the proposed equation.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-63

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

5. The energy is calculated as the integral of the power over the cycle piriod. The
parameters “Cycle duration” and “Dissipated hydraulic power” are shown as
“Required unknowns”. Select the “Dissipated hydraulic power” as an output and the
“Cycle duration” as an input.

 The variable “Cycle duration” cannot be used as an output. It is used to evaluate

the energy and in the definition of the profile curve of a variable.

6. Click on the icon on the right of the “Dissipated hydraulic power” units and
select the given equation (product of flow and differential pressure across the
orifice).
7. Select in the output column the “Differential pressure” and under the input the
“flow”. Change the flow unit for l/min.

8. Click on the icon on the right of the “Differential pressure” and select the
equation “Head loss”.
9. Select all new requested unknown in the input column. Set an opening area greater
than zero.

Figure 6-42 Sizing sheet to evaluate the lost energy across an orifice

Most input variables are a constant numerical value over time, but some when used as
an input can be defined by a profile curve. This applies, for instance, to the “Flow”. In the
following steps we will define the flow as a time dependant curve with specific cycle
duration and will observe the result on other parameters.

6-64
 Elements within a Diagram

10. Click on the icon on the right of the “Flow” variable units and select the option
“Profile curve”.

Figure 6-43 : Variable definition based on a profile curve option.

11. The icon on the right of “Flow” has been replaced by to represent that this
variable is defined by a time based curve. The button has also appeared, click on
it.
As shown in the following figure, a dialog window opens allowing the definition of the
profile curve:

Figure 6-44 : Profile curve definition window

Description

1 Toolbar

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-65

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Description

2 “Plotter” panel. This panel gives access to the appearance configuration of the
plotter. Different options are configured in the project properties under the
“General standards” branch in “Plotter, Curve editor and Oscilloscope” (see
4.2.2.6 “Plotter, Curve Editor,Oscilloscope and Sizing Sheets” Branch). The
following properties are specific to the single curve:
● Curve axis upper value
● Curve axis lower value
● Time axis upper value
● Time axis lower value

The panel visibility can be modified using the show/hide button on the
upper left corner.

3 Graph zone, here the curve is displayed.

4 “Curve” panel. The upper part of this panel shows the axis name with their
units. In the lower part the curve coordinates are listed.

The panel visibility can be modified using the show/hide button on the
upper right corner.

The following table gives a description of the toolbar controls:

Icon Commands Description

Automatic scale to Resize the plot area to visualize the data points of the y
y axis curve.

Automatic scale to Resize the plot area to visualize the data points of the x
x axis curve.

Automatic scale to Resize the plot area to visualize the data points of all the
all axes curves.

6-66
 Elements within a Diagram

Icon Commands Description

Show/Hide data Show or hide the data points on a curve.

points

Show labels Show points’ coordinates. This function is available only

when the data points are displayed.

Print plotter image Print plot’s image.

Copy plotter Copy plot’s image.

image

 The axes units refer to the chosen units of the variables in the sizing sheet.
12. Add points to the curve by double clicking on the graph area. The point coordinates
are automatically added to the points list. For the example use the following points:
Time (s) Flow (L/min)
0 6
10 10
30 10
40 1
50 2
60 6

 When the data points are visible (“Show data points” option active) it is possible
to modify the point position by drag and drop.

 To add a point it is also possible to use the contextual menu on the point list and
select insert.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-67

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 6-45 : Point insertion

 Another option is to paste the values from a table. The points beyond the cycle
duration period will not be considered in the sizing sheet calculations. The copy
from the points list to another software is also allowed.

Figure 6-46 : Profile curve edition

13. Apply the changes using the button

 All outputs depending on the flow, which is defined as a function of the cycle

6-68
 Elements within a Diagram

duration, become as well variable on the cycle time. A button appers on the
right next to their value allowing the visualisation of their evolution over the cylce.
The visualisation dialog has the same layout as the one for the definition of the
profile curve, but it is not allowed to edit the curve points. Once the input variable
profile curve defined, it is sampled, with a period short enough to have a precise
measure but not to overload the calculation, and then the outputs are evaluated.

 If the profile is variable over the cycle duration, in the sizing sheet the parameter’s
field will be “Variable value”. If, instead, the profile is constant over the cycle
duration the parameter’s field in the sizing sheet will display the constant value.
The only exception applies to the energy as it will always display the value at the
end of the cycle even though it varies over time.

 In a single sizing sheet many profile curves can be used for different variables, if
they allow this type of definition.

Figure 6-47: Sizing sheet to evaluate the lost energy across an orifice

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-69

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 6-48: Hydraulic dissipated energy profile through the orifice over a cycle
14. The dissipated hydraulic energy for this example over cycle duration of 60 seconds is
0.028 kWh.
15. Lock the sizing sheet to prevent accidental modifications.

 It is not possible to link a variable of the current sizing sheet to a parameter

defined by a profile curve in another sizing sheet.

 The sizing sheet print tool includes the curve of each variable with the information
about its maximum, minimum and mean value over the cycle duration.

6.3.3 Association of Sizing Sheet to component

To transfer the values of compatible components in bold to the technical data of a

project’s component, the user has to associate the component to a sizing sheet. This
association can be done in two different ways:

Association by drag and drop

To create an association between a component and a sizing sheet, you just have to drag
and drop the compatible component from the diagram to the “Sizing Sheet Manager”

6-70
 Elements within a Diagram

window. The component category and the present sizing sheets will be automatically
associated to the component.

Example of an association between a hydraulic motor and a sizing sheet:

1. Open the “Sizing Sheet Manager” window.
2. Select the hydraulic motor on the diagram and drag-and-drop it in the “Sizing Sheet
Manager” window.

Figure 6-49 Association of a component to a sizing sheet

Once the component is associated, the reloading icon and the transfer icon for
parameters values are activated. On the right of the toolbar, the component ID and its
name are disabled.

Figure 6-50 "Calculation" Tab with associated component

 Only one component of a project can be associated by component category.

Association via the component properties windows

The same association can be done via the project’s component properties window:
1. Select the component to be sized and double-click on it to open its properties

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-71

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

window.
2. In the toolbar, click on the icon to resize component.

Figure 6-51 Sizing button of a component in properties window

The “Sizing Sheet Manager” is open and the hydraulic motor is associated to the right
sizing sheet category.

Constraints on data transfer to the component

If the calculated values do not follow the technical data’s constraints, those cannot be
transferred. For example, the last computing imposes on you a motor displacement of
3
224.4 cm /rev. Now with the hydraulic motor component, if you fix the maximum
3
displacement to 100 cm /rev, the calculated value cannot be transferred because of the
constraint. A message tells you that the sizing sheet cannot transmit this value or any
other value to the technical data of the associated component.

If the component properties are locked, a message will ask you to unlock those in order
to execute data transfer.

Finally, since calculation can be made only when software is in editing mode and not in
simulating mode, the dynamical values calculated by simulation engine (pressure, flow
etc.) are not transferred to the sizing sheets. Only constant values of compatible
parameters found in the technical data of component can be transferred to the sizing
sheet.

6.3.4 Additional Information Chart

An additional information chart is a tool to help to determine quickly the value of a

coefficient in a plotter interface. The plotter can contain many curves allowing to
determine the coefficient value in specific conditions. The unknow parameter associated
to a plotter can be linked to one of the axis or can be set as a coefficient determining the

6-72
 Elements within a Diagram

curves. If the coefficient is not linked to one of the axis, its different values are displayed
in the plotter legend.

For example, on the following image, the unknow parameter is the density (Y axis)
which is a function of temperature (X axis) and is different according to the type of oil
(Legend).

Figure 6-52 :Plotter interface for additional information curves

Interface

The plotter window can contain many curves per chart located in different tabs (1).

To select data, simply click on a curve, or between two curves of the chart (2), at the
desired point based on the others parameters. The unknow parameter value will be
displayed in the result area (3). To transfer this value to the sizing sheet, click on
.

For more details about the plotter interface, refer to section 9 Plotters.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-73

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

 Make sure the legend is displayed ( ) to be able to choose the appropriate

curve.

 If you move your mouse pointer on the chart, the coordinates are displayed next
to it.

 If you click between two curves, some chart returns a value of an interpolation
between the curves, other charts will return you the value of the closest curve.

Creating a new sizing sheet with a parameter determined by an additional

information chart

Some variables are associated to an additional information curve. For these variables it is
possible to set a determination mode to “value issued from an additional information
chart”.

In this example, we will create a sizing sheet to determine pressure drops in a hydraulic
line. To do so, in the sizing sheet manager:

1. Click on the command “Add a new sizing sheet” at the top of the window
and give it the desired name in “Identification” tab;

2. From the variable list, check the right box next to “Laminar Flow Pressure Loss” to
set it as output variable;

“Laminar Flow Pressure Loss” variable now appears under “Calculations” tab in
“Outputs” category.

3. Click on command on the right side of the parameter to display the list of
equations and click on the first one;

All the variables required by the equation are now displayed under “Required
Unknown”.

4. From the “Required Unknown” list, click on command at the right of

“Laminar head loss coefficient” and choose the first equation. This variable is now
displayed under “Intermediate Unknowns”;

6-74
 Elements within a Diagram

5. In the list of variables, check the left box of each variable appearing under
“Required Unknowns” as illustrated below to define them as “Input”;

Figure 6-53 : List of Unknown variables

All Unknown variables now appears under “Inputs” on the right section of the
window.

6. Click on command or on the right side of “Density”, then select “Value

issued from an additional information chart”;

Figure 6-54 : Determination modes available for this unknow variable

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-75

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

7. Click on command now available at the right of “Density” to open the chart;

8. Select the desired value from the chart to become the default value of the sizing
sheet and apply changes .

Figure 6-55 : Additional information chart

9. For the others input variables, enter default values manually;

10. Click on the command to lock the sizing sheet.

The sizing sheet has been created and is now ready to be use.

6-76
 Elements within a Diagram

6.3.5 Additional Information Table

An additional information table is a tool to help to determine quickly the value of a

coefficient from a reference table. A table contain many possible values of the unknown
coefficient and defined based on different parameters. The unknow parameter associated
to a plotter can be linked to one of the axis or can be set as a coefficient determining the
curves. If the coefficient is not linked to one of the axis, its different values are displayed
in the plotter legend.

Figure 6-56 : Additional Information Table Interface

Interface

The additional information table window can contain many tables located in separate
tabs (1). Each column of a table (3) represent a parameter or property, when a line
represented a configuration. When a line is selected, the unknown parameter value is
displayed in the result area (4). Click on apply (5) to upload the new value to the sizing
sheet.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-77

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

 It is possible to use filter (2) to facilitate your search.

 Click on a column header to sort by ascending or descending alphanumerical order

of this property.

Creating a new sizing sheet with a parameter determined by an additional

information table

Some variables are associated to an additional information table. For these variables it is
possible to set a determination mode to “value issued from an additional information
table”.

In this example, we will create a sizing sheet to determine pressure drops in a hydraulic
fitting. To do so, in the sizing sheet manager:

1. Click on the command “Add a new sizing sheet” at the top of the window
and give it the desired name in « Identification » tab;

2. From the variable list, check the right box next to “Pressure Loss” to set it as
output variable;

“Pressure Loss” variable now appears under “Calculations” tab in “Outputs”

category.

3. Click on command on the right side of the parameter to display the list of
equations and click on the first one;

All the variables required by the equation are now displayed under “Required
Unknown”.

4. In the list of variables, check the left box of each variable appearing under
“Required Unknowns” as illustrated below to define them as “Input”;

6-78
 Elements within a Diagram

Figure 6-57 : List of Unknown variables

All Unknown variables now appears under “Inputs” on the right section of the
window.

5. Click on command or on the right side of “Loss Coefficient”, then select

“Value issued from an additional information table”;

Figure 6-58 : Determination modes available for this unknow variable

6. Click on command now available at the right of “Loss Coefficient” to open the
table;

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-79

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

7. Select the desired value from the table to become the default value of the sizing
sheet and apply changes.

Figure 6-59 : Additional information chart

8. For the others input variables, enter default values manually;

9. Click on the command to lock the sizing sheet.

The sizing sheet is now created and ready to be used.

6.4 Attributes of Graphic Objects

It is possible to modify some graphical object attributes by selecting the “Component
Properties” dialogue box by a right-click on the object.

For the animation Properties: Refer to the HMI and Control Panels Workshop User’s

6-80
 Elements within a Diagram

Guide for all the details about the CAD objects.

6.4.1 “Data” Branch

This “Data” branch can be used to modify only two properties.

Figure 6-60: “Component Properties” Dialogue Box, Graphic Object

The zones described here are the same as in section 6.2.1 “Data” Branch. The available
properties are the following:
Field Description
Internal ID Unique ID of the component.
Layer Layer on which the drawing will be displayed.

6.4.2 “Transparency” Branch

This branch is available for images only. To make a specific colour transparent, simply

check the “Transparency” option and, with the tool, and select which colour to make
transparent.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-81

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 6-61: Transparency Property

6.4.3 “Hyperlink” Branch

Every CAD object (ellipse, rectangle, arc, polygon, …) possesses the “Hyperlink” branch
called. This feature is used to create links that can open an external PRX file generated by
Automation Studio™, or by another correctly installed application on a computer. These
hyperlinks do not work when Automation Studio ™ is in simulation mode.

Figure 6-62: Graphic Object Properties Dialogue Box – “Hyperlink” Branch

Hyperlinks are particularly useful in the design of didactic projects: a directory of PRX
projects in a design can be linked together with hyperlinks. This allows knowledge
transfer, demonstrations or any other educational project implying complex systems.

6-82
 Elements within a Diagram

Figure 6-63: Example of Linked Projects

A hyperlink between Automation Studio™ projects can provide access to:

● A diagram.
● A component.
● An area defined with “Map Locator” coordinates of a targeted diagram.
● A wire in an electrotechnical diagram.
● An internal document without specified object (web page, other document,
report).
● A script.

To create a hyperlink:
1. Select a CAD object (text, image, line, rectangle, ellipse, polygon or circle) of the
diagram, open its “Component Properties” dialogue box and choose “Hyperlink”
branch.
2. Type the access path in the “Destination” field, (see the following sections for
hyperlink syntax).
3. Or, choose the cursor form when it is on the object, in the “Cursor Type” drop-down
list.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-83

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

4. Type additional information in the “Description” field as needed.

To launch a hyperlink
1. Place the cursor on the drawing object that contains the hyperlink.
A tooltip appears as a reminder of the launching key combination.
2. Hold the CTRL key and click on the left button.

To navigate between linked documents:

To navigate forward and backward between documents previously reached, use “Back”
and “Forward” in the “View” tab.

Figure 6-64: “Back” and “Forward” Navigation Buttons

Hyperlink Syntax

The hyperlink syntax related to objects created in Automation Studio™ respects the
following structure containing 4 fields separated by the “:” character.

Protocol:Project path:Document path.Object identifier:View#

 Space between the colons does not change syntax.

If the hyperlink source leads to a target located within the same project, it is useless to
set the project path. However, the “:” and “:”separators must remain.

Protocol::Document path.Object identifier

st
Field 1: Protocol: The 1 field defines the calling protocol.
● ASREF: This general protocol is used to target any object type in any document.
Its advantage is its flexibility. On the other hand, it needs to specify the object’s
full path. The search is always done within the documents of a project.
● ASREFISO: This protocol is used to target a component, a subcomponent or a
variable using their internal identifiers or ISO code in standard and electrical
diagrams, or using a derivative. Its advantage is its simplicity, because the ISO

6-84
 Elements within a Diagram

code is unique and therefore it implicitly defines in which document the

component can be found without having to set its path. The document’s path
does not have to be set.
● HTTP: This protocol is used to display a web page in an independent window.

Example : http://www.automationstudio.com/
● FILE: This protocol is used to display a file in the associated application window.
● SCRIPT: Refer to the APIs User’s Guide to launch scripts through hyperlinks.
nd
Field 2: Project path: The 2 field defines the project path.

The syntax to define project or document paths can be expressed in a relative or in an

absolute way. The string defining the path must be inserted between “<” and “>”
characters (symbols).
● Absolute path: it is equivalent to set the full path of each element.
Example: <C:\ProjetsAS\Target.prx>
● Relative path: the document referred to by the hyperlink, must be in the project
directory or subdirectory from where is launched the hyperlink. This method is
recommended to design training projects that can be transferred from one
computer to another easily.
Example: <Target.prx>
rd
Field 3: Document path.Object identifier: The 3 field defines the document path and
object identifier. These two items are separated by a “.”.

The document identification can be done in two formats (forms).

● Relative: If this field does not begin with a point, the document used will be the
document where the component that has launched navigation is located or the
current document if navigation has not been launched by a component link.
● Absolute: If the field starts with a point, the text that follows, until the next
point, is the document’s path. For example, ".Folder1\SFC1." or ".SFC1.". The
complete path from the project must be specified. The document and directory
names should not contain points.
th
Field 4: View#: The 4 field is optional. It reaches a component within a particular view,
View 1 or View2 for instance.

Syntax including a View#

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-85

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

ASREFISO:[Project1]:[Component1].[View1]

ASREF:[Project1]:[Document3]:[Component4].[View2]

Object Identifier

The object identification can be done in many ways. Each document type is free to set its
suitable format. In the following examples, SFC components are identified by their ID X#
(step) and Y# (transition).

The object types that can be referenced are as follows:

● A SFC component.
● A wire in a cable diagram.
● An internal document to a project without selecting any object (web page, other
document, report).
● An area defined by the map locator.

Some components cannot be referenced by a text hyperlink. The syntax has not yet been
extended to deal with these cases and browsing options were developed instead. If
needed, the syntax should be extended.
● Some parts of an electrotechnical device (because they all have the same ISO
code).
● The terminals of a terminal strip.
● A cross-reference satellite (because the ISO code is unknown).

Examples

In the following examples each case will be illustrated. For convenience, we show the
project manager with all the documents to be used.

Example 1: Based on a rectangle inserted in the circuit of Famic_Excavator.prx project, to

put the address in the destination field so that the link leads to the SC_B1 diagram of
Famic_Excavator_Driving_System.prx project.

6-86
 Elements within a Diagram

Figure 6-65: Example of Rectangle that Links to Another Project

Absolute Path: ASREF:<C:\Dir1\Famic_Excavator_Driving_System.prx>:.SC_B1

Relative Path: ASREF:<Famic_Excavator_Driving_System.prx>:.SC_B1

For relative path case, as stated above, this implies that Famic_Excavator.prx and
Famic_Excavator_Driving_System.prx projects are in the same Dir1 directory.

If we consider that the SC_B1 diagram is in the SR_1 directory of the

Famic_Excavator_Driving_System.prx project, then the hyperlink address is according to
the chosen syntax:

Absolute Path: ASREF:<C:\Dir1\Famic_Excavator_Driving_System.prx>:.SR_1\SC_B1

Relative Path: ASREF:<Famic_Excavator_Driving_System.prx>: .SR_1\SC_B1

Example 2: Based on a text box inserted in a diagram of the

Famic_Excavator_Driving_System.prx project, we will define the address to put in the
destination field so that the link leads to the 1-1P3 pump of Famic_Excavator.prx project.
It is assumed that the two PRX projects are located in the same directory Dir1.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-87

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 6-66: Example of Text that Links Another Project

The syntax defining the absolute project path is used. Note that for the component, no
path is specified as the internal identifier or ISO code is enough to identify the
component in the project:

Absolute Path: ASREFISO:<C:\Dir1\Famic_Excavator.prx>:1-1P3

The syntax defining the relative project path is used. To make this link works, it is
necessary that the original project, which contains the hyperlink, is in the same directory
as the target project:

Relative Path: ASREFISO:<Famic_Excavator.prx>:1-1P3

If the Famic_Excavator.prx file was in a subdirectory Srep2 then the syntax would be:

Absolute Path: ASREFISO:<C:\Dir1\SDir2\Famic_Excavator.prx>:1-1P3

Relative Path: ASREFISO:<SDir2\Famic_Excavator.prx>:1-1P3

Example 3: Based on a rectangle inserted in the circuit of Famic_Excavator.prx project,

put the address in the destination field so that the link leads to the D07 – D09 map
locator zone of SC-A1 diagram in the Famic_Excavator.prx project.

6-88
 Elements within a Diagram

Figure 6-67: Example of Rectangle that Links to Map Locator Zone

Absolute Path: ASREF:<C:\Dir1\Famic_Excavator.prx>:.SC_A1.[D07-D09]

Relative Path: ASREF:<Famic_Excavator.prx>:.SC_A1.[D07-D09]

Other Examples
Hyperlink Syntax Target
ASREFISO::1-1P1 Pump with internal identifier 1-1P1 in the active
project.
ASREFISO:Project1:1-1P1 Pump with internal identifier 1-1P1 in the active
project (without < and >).
ASREFISO:<C:\Project1.prx>:1-1P1 Pump with internal identifier 1-1P1 in another
project (with < and >), written in absolute syntax.
ASREFISO:<Project1.prx>:1-1P1 Pump with internal identifier 1-1P1 in another
project (with < and >), written in relative syntax.
ASREFISO::1-1V1.SOL1 SOL1 distributor command of the 1-1V1 valve in
the current project.
ASREF::X1 A SFC component with relative document.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-89

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Hyperlink Syntax Target

ASREF::.SR-1\SFC1.X1 X1 Step in the SFC1 SFC, located in the SR-1
subdirectory of the current project.
ASREF::.Cable1.1 Wire 1 in a cable diagram of the current project.
ASREF::.Cable1. A cable diagram in the current project.
ASREF::[C03-D05] A map locator area in the current diagram.

6.5 Accessories Management

This section introduces you in Accessories Management.

6.5.1 Creating Accessories

It is possible to create accessories with or without a symbol in a project for hydraulics,

pneumatics and electrotechnical workshops.

6.5.1.1 Accessories with Symbol

In order to create an accessory with a symbol, it must be present as a component on the

diagram. There are two ways to transform the component into accessory with symbol.

The first way to transform the component is to drag and drop it to the “Accessory
Manager”.

To do this,
1. Open the “Accessory Manager” window by clicking on tab “Tools”  “Management”
 “Accessory Manager” (see section 2.2.7 Accessory Manager).
2. Select the component.
3. Drag and drop it in the “Accessory Manager”.
4. A dialogue box opens to confirm configuration of the symbol as an accessory. Click
on “Yes”.
5. A line corresponding to the symbol is added to the Accessory Manager, under the
“Accessories with Symbol” tab.

6-90
 Elements within a Diagram

Figure 6-68: Adding a Component in the “Accessories Manager” Window

The second way is to transform the component by clicking on the checkbox “Is
Accessory” in the branch “Accessories” of the “Components Properties” (see section
6.2.2 “Accessories” Branch).

Figure 6-69: Checkbox “Is Accessory” in the “Component Properties”

Open the Accessory Manager in the “Accessories with Symbol”, to find a new line
corresponding to the symbol has been added.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-91

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

6.5.1.2 Accessories without Symbol

Accessories that cannot be represented by a symbol in Automation Studio ™ can be

created in the “Accessory Manager”. Upon creation, the accessory without symbol will be
considered as an accessory model. Instances may be associated with a component or to
the project.
1. In the “Accessory Manager”, select the “Accessories without Symbol” tab.

2. Click on the “Add” button .

3. In the “Accessory Properties” dialogue box, edit the “Part Number”, “Catalogue
Description” and “Manufacturer” fields.

Figure 6-70: “Accessory Properties” Dialogue Box

4. Click on the validate button .

The accessory model is created in the tab “Accessories with Symbol”.

Figure 6-71: “Accessory Manager”, “Accessories without Symbol

It is possible to add customized properties for accessory models without a symbol. To do

6-92
 Elements within a Diagram

this:
1. Make sure the accessory is unlocked.

2. Click on the “Add Variable” button .

3. In the dialogue box “Add a variable”, edit the fields to set the variable type, the
measure type and the variable name (see also Properties Edition under section
6.2.1.2 List of Properties).

 The location field does not apply here.

Figure 6-72: “Add a variable” Dialogue Box

4. Click on the validate button .

The properties will be added to the accessory model without a symbol in the “User
Defined” category in the bottom area of the “Accessories without Symbol” tab.

6.5.2 Accessory Association

Once the accessories are defined in the “Accessory Manager”, it is possible to associate
them to a component or to a project for the accessories without a symbol.

 It is not possible to associate an accessory to another one.

6.5.2.1 Association of Accessories with a Component

To associate an accessory with or without a symbol to a parent component:

1. In the “Accessories without Symbol” or the “Accessories without Symbol” tab, select

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-93

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

the accessory to associate to a component.

2. From the selection, drag and drop the accessory on a component of the diagram.
3. When the mouse cursor overlaps the component and an association with it is
possible, this component will be highlighted.
4. Release the button to create the association.

Figure 6-73: Association of an Accessory with Symbol to a Component

 It is possible, with multi-selection (CTRL + click), to associate more than one

accessory with the same component.

The “Associations” tab shows the association between accessories and parent
components. The accessories of a component are also presented in the “Accessories”
branch of the component properties window (see section 6.2.2 “Accessories” Branch).

In the following example shown in the following figure, the dialogue box shows that the
accessory A321 has a symbol that can be simulated (Automation Studio ™ icon) and that
is associated to the parent P1 (“Parent Identifier” column).

6-94
 Elements within a Diagram

Figure 6-74: Accessories Associated to a Parent Component

6.5.2.2 Association of Accessories without Symbol to the Project

To associate an instance of an accessory model without a symbol to the current project:

1. In the “Accessories without Symbol” tab of the Accessory Manager, select the
accessory model to associate to the project.

2. From the selection, click on the “Add to Project” button.

Click on the tab “Association”, if necessary, to validate the association.

The following figure shows that an instance of the Accessory without Symbol A321 is
associated to the “Project1”, and that it is not associated to any component.

Figure 6-75: Accessory Associated with the Project

6.5.3 Deleting Accessories

To delete an association:
1. Open the “Associations” tab in the Accessory Manager.
2. Select the accessory to delete.

3. Click on the Delete button .

To delete an accessory:

© Famic Technologies Inc. 6-95

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

1. Open the “Accessories with Symbol” or “Accessories without Symbol” tab.

2. Select the accessory to delete.

3. Click on the Delete button .

4. If the accessory is associated with a component or a project, a dialogue will ask you
to confirm the accessory deletion.

6-96
7 Reports
Reports are information documents that are generated using the data from technology
components of the current project or of its documents. All single or assembled
components from libraries and catalogues are considered when creating a report.

Reports are managed the same way as any document type in a project and are
accessible from the project explorer once created.

Automation Studio™ can produce reports based on the project created. Some report
templates are provided with the regular version of the software, but you can create your
own personalized template.

The following figure is a report in the form of an information spreadsheet. Columns

correspond to a property associated with a component, and rows correspond to the
properties’ value.

Figure 7-1: Report Example

 If the report’s characteristics are to be modified, right-click the report in the Project
Explorer and choose “Properties”.

7.1 Managing Reports

This section introduces you in the managing of reports

7.1.1 Creating

To create a new report, first create a project containing diagrams. Once this is complete,

© Famic Technologies Inc. 7-1

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

begin creating reports.

1. Go to  “New Document”  “Report” and select the type of report to produce,

such as “Generic”.
The “Report Configuration” dialogue box opens to configure the new report.
2. Define the report characteristics.

 When created, new reports have a default name given by the report naming rule
standard accessible from the project properties (see section 4.2.1.2 “Standards”).
Reports can be renamed through the contextual menu of the report in the “Project
Explorer”, or in the Report Properties under the “Document Properties” Branch 
“Information” category.

At this point, the report appears in the project’s tree of the “Project Explorer”. Notice that
another view appears under the report.

Figure 7-2: Report View

While a report itself is shown in a spreadsheet form (Figure 7-1: Report Example), the
Report View corresponds to the print view (Figure 7-3: Report Print View), and matches
the report’s Page Setup Standard (page orientation and format, title block…).

7-2
 Reports
Figure 7-3: Report Print View

 The report’s Page Setup Standard can be accessed via the report’s properties,
under “Document Properties” branch, “Standards” category.

While displaying a report’s view, you can navigate through pages with “Next” and
“Previous” commands.

Report Template - Definition:

A report template can be saved with user-defined characteristics to avoid reformatting

one of the default templates every time. In this case, filters, fields and page formatting
are saved with in the template to keep these configurations every time a new report is
created from this template. Automation Studio™ provides some copies of templates.

Figure 7-4: Report Template selection window

The creation of a report template is performed based on an existing report.

To create a template:

A report is a spreadsheet built of columns (fields) and lines (data).

To create a report template, data and field needs to be configured as follows.

 Notice that many parameters of the report (data, fields, …) are compatible with
user translations. However, to ensure a proper formatting, make sure to select the
same language to display than for edition. Refer to section 2.2.9 Translation
Manager for more details.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 7-3

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide
Data

The data selection is done through the “Data” branch of the report’s document properties
window.

Figure 7-5 : Data Configuration Window

Area Name Description

1 Source Define the source of data for the report.
2 Filtering rules Delete a new global variable in the project. At validation
time, the user can receive information from messages.
3 Filters Modify the filter’s characteristics
charateristics

The sources of the report’s entries can include the types of elements:
● Technology Components
● Accessory Components
● Component Failures
● Virtual components such as cables, PLC, …

7-4
 Reports

● Project documents

The filtering rules apply only to the selected sources.

Filtering rules are defined by sets of rules. For each set, in the dropdown list, there are
three possibilities of treatment:

Figure 7-6 : Three possible treatments for a set of rules

The command allows to add:

 A set of rules
 A new rule
 An existing rule of the filters list.

Create a Rule

To create a filtering rule, select “Add a new rule” command by clicking on button.

A dialog window opens up to add a new filtering rule.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 7-5

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 7-7 : Filter’s Scope

Select the set of rules scope and configure the desired values in section (1) of the figure
below.

Figure 7-8 : Filter example applied to visible layers (1)

A filter’s scope for a selected source is applicable exclusively to the following items:

Filter’s Item Description

scope

7-6
 Reports

Filter’s Item Description

scope
Locations Location Allows filtering by specific locations such as
Installation/Circuit, Circuit/Subcircuit, Harness/Module,
Essential Subdivision/Installation.

 These specific locations must be used by the data

source.

Location Name Allows to enter manually a location name for a filter.

 The advantage of this option is to specify filters

independently of the project contents. Therefore,
this is an ideal method to while creating a new
report template.

Components Component Allows to filter by component types.

Type
Technologies Allows to filter by component technologies.
Layers Layers Allows to filter by layers, through available layers in the
documents of the selected source.
Layer’s Name Apply a filter by layer, the layer’s name has to be
entered manually, the filter is independent from the
document.

 This filter can be useful if you have standardized

layers names for all documents.

Visibility Apply a filter only to visible layers or hidden layers.

Documents Document Apply a filter to a combination of document names.
Names
Documents Apply a filter to a combination of documents.
Document Apply a filter to document types.
Types

© Famic Technologies Inc. 7-7

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Filter’s Item Description

scope
General Property Apply a filter to values of different property types. Refer
to section “Types of properties”

The figure below shows an example of a set of rules allowing to filter all hydraulic
components on a visible layer with a manufacturer other than Famic.

Figure 7-9 : Set of Rules Example

 All single or assembled components from the library or a catalogue are considered
in a report.

 It is possible to exclude a component from a report: access the component’s

properties, and in the “Data” branch  “Miscellaneous” category, check the
property “Disregard in BOM”.

 Often a component symbol is obtained from multiple single symbols. To identify

the component as being one independent product in a report, the component
symbols need to be grouped and then assembled.

Types of Properties

This dialog appears frequently during the report configuration, it allows the user to
choose a type of property.

7-8
 Reports

 The property identification is a combination of the name (not alias), its value and
unit.
 « Manually Configured Property » Type

For a custom property, the characteristics have to be entered manually. However, the
property needs to exist to receive a value from the source.

Figure 7-10: Custom Property Dialog

 « Property » Type

Only properties from the current project, its documents and components appears in the
dialog.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 7-9

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 7-11 : Property Selection Window

Fields

Column’s field configuration is done from the “Field” branch of the report properties
dialog.

7-10
 Reports

Figure 7-12 : Fields Configuration Dialog

Area Description
1 Add or delete a field.
2 Modify a field position:
 Move to the top
 Move up of one position
 Move down of one position
 Move to the end.
3 The filters toolbar allows you to filter, or mark fields in a filter applied to
the selected columns of the dropdown list.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 7-11

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Area Description
4 Selected fields and main characteristics:
 “Order” of fields in the report
 “Is Displayed” or not in the report
 “Locked” (not editable) or not. This characteristic can be editable or
not by the user for some fields
 Automatic “update” or not of a field for related items.

 If the automatic update is activated for a value, then a

modification to it in the report will be automatically updated in its
associated component.
 “Category” of the field
 “Name” of the field, it cannot contain any space or special character
 “Alias” of the field, no restrictions in terms of characters allowed
 “Type” of variable used the field

 A click on the column header allows to sort by ascending or

descending alphabetical order.
5 Allows to visualize and configure all characteristics of the selected field.

Add Field

Click on the command to add a new column field.

The “Add Field” Dialogue opens up.

7-12
 Reports

Figure 7-13 : Add Field Dialog

Zone Description
1 Selection of a type of field.
2 Characteristics of the selected field.

Types of Fields

The field configuration and characteristics changes according to the type of field selected.
 Property Field

Add different types of property field, refer to section “Types of properties” for more
details.

 In this section, you can add the required component properties for a bill of

© Famic Technologies Inc. 7-13

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

material for example.

 In most cases, you can edit property values in the report and they will be
transferred to its associated component.
 Grouped Field

A grouped field allows to group values of properties from different source type.

 This field is useful if you desire to have a column with a list of all manual
configurations of components in the circuit.

Figure 7-14 : Add a Group Dialogue

Select a group property from the list (1), then add a property (2) and choose the

7-14
 Reports

properties to be grouped (3).

 Properties displayed in area (3) have to be added previously to the fields list (1).
Those properties don’t need to have the attribute “Is displayed” set to true.
 Quantity Field

Add a field of item quantity, when a grouped field is configured.

 Calculated Field

A calculated field returns a value calculated from a user defined mathematical

expression.

This expression is a combination of operators, functions and existing fields from the list.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 7-15

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 7-15 : Expression Editor Dialog

First, select “Calculated Field” (1) and then click on the “ ” button (2).

7-16
 Reports

The “Expression Editor” opens up, to edit the field’s expression (2). Use “Functions”,
“Operators”, “Fields” or “Constants” in zone (4) and choose an option located in zone (5)
to create your expression.

 The property list that appears in zone (5) is the list of fields added to the report.
The value of “Is Displayed” characteristic, does not need to be TRUE in the report.
 Report field

A “Report Field” is a custom field applied to a specific report. This field will be
automatically added as a property to all components linked to this report.

Figure 7-16 : Add Field Dialog

A report field can be issued from available properties or customized.

For a custom report field, a value must be added to the “Editable Description” as the
“Name” will be automatically added. The goal is to make the “Name” unique as it will be
sent through the report’s items list.

 This field is useful to assign properties to specific components in the project, but
not all of them, like a global variable would do (go see chapter 4.2.1.5
Components’ Global Properties).

© Famic Technologies Inc. 7-17

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide
Grouping

When a report’s data and fields are configured, the grouping function can help to make
the report lighter to read and easier to find information.

Access the “Grouping” branch in the report’s document properties to configure grouping
options. This dialog contains two sections: the “Grouping Properties” (1) and the
“Property Concatenation” (2).

Figure 7-17 : Report Group Edition

Area Description
1 Field selection for the group.
2 Field selection to concatenate values of grouped rows.

 To be added to a group or to be concatenated, a field must already exist in the

7-18
 Reports

report.

After adding the “Manufacturer” property for the group with the fields “Part Number”
and “Component Names” as “Property Concatenation”, this is how the data are displayed
in the report:

Figure 7-18: Report Before Grouping

Figure 7-19 : Report after grouping manufacturer property

© Famic Technologies Inc. 7-19

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 7-20: Report after grouping and conatenating component name and part number

Save a Report Template

Once the configuration of your report is completed, you can create a Report Template.

To create a Report Template from your report, you have to:

TM
With the report opened, go to Automation Studio Menu  “Document”  “Save
Report Template”. The User-defined Report Templates dialogue box opens to name the
new template and enter the directory in which the template will be saved.

The report template has the *.re file extension. It is recommended to save all templates
in the suggested directory. All templates in this location are automatically loaded when
starting Automation Studio™.

7-20
 Reports

TM TM
To modify this option, go to Automation Studio Menu  Automation Studio
Options and modify “Templates Location”

7.1.2 Actions in a Spreadsheet Report

Some actions can be performed on a spreadsheet report when it is active on the screen.

7.1.2.1 Edit a Cell

In the spreadsheet, you can edit an unlocked cell by double clicking on it.

When you modify the value of a cell, this value will be automatically updated in its
source component.

To quit edit mode, click on any other cell in the spreadsheet.

7.1.2.2 Actions on a Row

Some actions can be done on a row from the contextual menu in the report editor.

Figure 7-21 : Contextual Menu for a Row

Hyperlink Function

When the mouse cursor is placed on a report row and open the contextual menu with a
right-click, then the command ”Follow the Link” (Ctrl-Click shortcut). When executing this
command, a document view is activated on the highlighted component.

The hyperlink function works also for assemblies.

The hyperlink function is also possible in a report revision or comparison.

However, the function is deactivated when the underlying component or
assembly in the report does not exist anymore in the project.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 7-21

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide
Resize Columns/Rows :

Resize a column by clicking the vertical line that separates headers, and by dragging it to
the left or right. Also see section Error! Reference source not found. Error! Reference
source not found..

7.1.2.3 Actions on a column

A great number of actions can be applied on the report’s columns, these actions are
explained below.

Figure 7-22 : Contextual Menu of a Column

You can open the contextual menu with a right click to access the following functions:

Name Icon Description

Sort Ascending Sort a column by alphanumeric ascending order of the
report’s lines based on the selected column.
Sort Descending Sort a column by alphanumeric descending order of the
report’s lines based on the selected column.
Clear Sorting Cancel sorting.

7-22
 Reports

Name Icon Description

Group by this Group report’s lines based on the selected column values.
Column
Show/Hide Show or hide the Group Panel.
Group Panel
You can drag headers to this panel to group them or drag
it out to cancel those changes.

 Groups can be cumulative.

Show Column Show or hide column chooser, it displays all available

Chooser columns that are not displayed in the report.
Best Fit Minimize a column size, keeping all fields visible.

Best Fit (all Minimize all column sizes keeping all fields visible.
columns)
Filter Editor This command opens the filter editor dialog. This dialog
allows you to create filters for the selected column from
the different values of the associated field.

 Return to the contextual menu to cancel a filter.

Show/Hide Show or hide the text search panel.

Search Panel
 With this panel you can search any text in the
entire report.

Display a Column

Hide a column by dragging its header out of the spreadsheet. To display it again, go to
the “Fields” branch of the Report’s document properties and check the box of the “Is
Displayed” property.

You can move a column’s position in the spreadsheet by dragging its header at the
desired position.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 7-23

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide
Sort a column

Apply an alphanumeric sorting on a column by clicking on its header or from the

contextual menu.

Add a Filter to a Column

To add a filter to a column, access the filter editor from the contextual menu. From the
“Filter Editor” dialog, a first group must be selected from its dropdown menu. You can
also add a condition, add a group or clear it all from the same contextual menu.

Figure 7-23 : Filtering Group Contextual Menu

Once the filtering group is set, choose the condition type from its contextual menu by
right-clicking on it and enter a value.

7-24
 Reports

Figure 7-24 : Contextual Menu of a Filtering Condition

7.1.2.4 Summary Panels

There are three types of summary panels available for a report : Report Summary Panel,
Column Summary Panel and Group Summary Panel.

Summary panels are used to display information about the column, group or report. The
available summary values are: “Sum”, “Min”, ”Max”, ”Count” or “Average”. Summary
values can be added to a panel directly from its contextual menu or by the option
“Customize...” of the contextual menu.

All types of summary panels can be displayed or hidden from the ribbon’s bar “View”
tab, “Display” group.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 7-25

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 7-25 : Column Summary Panel Contextual Menu

Customize a Summary Panel

To customize a summary panel, first, select desired summary items (2) for each field (1).
All selected items will be displayed in the summary panel.

Figure 7-26 : Customizing a summary – “Items” tab

Then, go to “Order” tab and modify the layout (1 and 2) or prefix and suffix text of an
item (3) and validate (4).

7-26
 Reports

Figure 7-27 : Customizing a summary - "Order" tab

Summary in a Group Header

There are two types of group summaries, the group summary panel and summary in the
group header. To edit and customize a summary in the group header, right click it and
access the contextual menu of a grouped column header. Then, from the contextual
menu click on “Group Summary Editor...” to open the “Group Summaries” dialog. From
this widow, it is possible to customize the summary of a group header in the same way
as done for a group summary panel.

Figure 7-28 : Group Summary Editor Location

© Famic Technologies Inc. 7-27

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

 The group summary panel is located in the footer of a group.

7.1.3 Actions to the Report Print View

Many actions are possible when the Print View is active:

Selection :

To select cells in a report, click on a first cell and drag the pointer towards a second one.
The contextual menu offers the possibility of executing the “Copy the selection”
command.

The contextual menu also offers the possibility to navigate through the report.

7.1.4 Export

A report can be exported to many file formats. To export a report click on “Export...”
command located in the “Report” tab of the ribbon’s bar, as shown below.

7-28
 Reports

Figure 7-29 : Export function

7.1.5 Update

Updating the report is necessary after some changes that will impact the report’s content
or appearance.

If the report or its print view is active, use the command “Update Information” in the
“Tools” group under the “Report” tab of the ribbon bar.

Figure 7-30: “Report”  “Tools”

The report view is updated with the report.

The “Export” command in the figure above export the report’s content to a text file.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 7-29

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

7.1.6 Print Preview and Print

Reports can be included when printing a project: refer to section 4.1.4 Print and Print
Preview for more details.

The report’s view is the document’s print view.

7.1.7 Saving a Report

A report is saved with the project. When the project is re-opened, the report contains the
same information as when the project was closed.

7.2 Report Properties

The report properties dialogue box is used to view and edit the report’s characteristics
and properties.

The report property tree is composed of four branches:

● Document Properties
● Data
● Fields
● Group

7.2.1 “Document Properties” Branch

Under the “Document Properties” branch can be found the standards used for the report,
as well as a number of parameters and properties.

7.2.1.1 “Standards”

In the “Standards” category, choose and modify the standards used for the report. The
“Page Setup Standard” contains such information as page orientation and format, and the
title block. The other standards are used here to set the naming rules for the components
in the report. Refer to section 4.2 Project Properties for more information on the
standards.
● Page Setup Standard
● Map Locator Standard
● One-Line Standard
● Electrotechnical Standard

7-30
 Reports

● Fluid Standard
● Electrical Standard
● Digital Electronic Standard
● Ladder Standard

7.2.1.2 Reports Standards

Fields

This category concerns applicable standards to report’s data fields.

Name Description
Field Precision To set the display precision for numeric
values.

Grid

This category concerns the applicable standards to report’s grid.

Name Description
Selection Colour Set the highlight color for selected cells
during report edition.
Cell Background Colour Set the background color for grid cells.
Cell Text Typography Set the font used in the report’s body.
Cell Text Horizontal/Vertical Alignment Set text alignment in report’s body.
Cell Text Word Wrap Activate or deactivate automatic word
wrap for report’s cells.
Cell Numeric Text Typography Set the font used in the report’s body
numeric values.
Cell Numeric Text Horizontal/Vertical Set text alignment in report numeric
Alignment data cells.
Cell Numeric Text Word Wrap Activate or deactivate automatic word
wrap for numeric data cells.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 7-31

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide
Column Headers

This category concerns the applicable standards to report’s column headers.

Name Description
Column Header Text Typography Set the font used in the report’s column
header.
Column Header Text Horizontal/Vertical Set text alignment in report’s column
Alignment headers.
Column Header Text Word Wrap Activate or deactivate automatic word
wrap for column headers.

Row Headers

This category concerns the applicable standards to report’s row header.

Name Description
Row Header Text Typography Set the font used in the report’s row
headers.
Row Header Text Horizontal/Vertical Set text alignment in report’s row
Alignment headers.

Groups

This category concerns the applicable standards to report’s groups.

Name Description

Group Summary Display Mode Define group summaries position in the

column header or align to right on the
group header.
Display Automatically Groups Content Extend or retract by default groups
content display.

Group Headers

This category concerns the applicable standards to report’s group headers.

7-32
 Reports

Name Description
Group Header Text Typography Set the font used in the report’s group
headers.

Group Summaries

This category concerns the applicable standards to report’s group summaries.

Name Description
Group Summaries Text Typography Set the font used in the report’s group
summaries.

Grid Summaries

This category concerns the applicable standards to report’s grid summaries.

Name Description
Grid Summaries Text Typography Set the font used in the report’s grid
summaries.

Value Presentation

This category concerns the applicable standards to report’s value presentation .

Name Description
Locations Naming Rules
Choose the location naming rule used in
the report.
These rules are defined in the “Project
Properties” dialogue: see section 4.2.6
“Report”.

Search

This category concerns the applicable standards to a search in a report.

Name Description

© Famic Technologies Inc. 7-33

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Name Description
Search Mode Set the report’s search mode to “Filter”
or “Marker”.

7.2.1.3 “Information”

Similar to the project and document properties, the information branch of a report
contains “information” about the document along the different steps of its creation and
the identification of its contributors.

View the details of the selected information in the “Show Details” part at the bottom of
the dialogue.

This data is available in the automatic fields, which can be accessed from the “Home” tab
 “Drawing” group  “Field” command.

Add new, user-defined information fields with the command.

“Revisions” Branch

 This option is available only for reports created before Automation Studio
TM
version
6. 3.

The “Revision” branch is used to follow the evolution of a report. Create many revisions
for a given report and display earlier revisions of the report, or compare two different
revisions.

7-34
 Reports

Figure 7-31: “Revisions” Branch

Before creating a first revision, the button “Last Revision” is the only one active. The last
revision refers to the current version of the report.

To create a new revision, enter a name for the revision in the field “Revision Name” and
press the “Create Revision” button. The new revision is a snapshot of the current report
at the time it was created.

To view an earlier revision of the report, check the “Revision” radio button and choose
the revision in the drop-down list. When the report is updated, it will show the notice
“Displaying Revision X” at the bottom, where “X” is the revision’s name.

To compare two revisions, check the button “Comparison” and choose the revisions to
compare in the two drop-down lists. The checkboxes below provide extra options to
choose what to display in the comparison. When the report is updated, it will show a
notice at the bottom.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 7-35

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 7-32: Comparison: “Draft” Revision vs. Current Version

7-36
8 Simulation and Analysis
Upon completion of a diagram or project, a simulation is used to test, verify, analyse,
diagnose, troubleshoot, and eventually validate the design’s integrity.

This section covers the following topics:

● Description of the Simulation mode.
● Data acquisition.
● Dynamic measuring instruments.
● Video recording.

This section of the User’s Guide gives an overview of simulations. In the User’s Guides of
the various workshops, there are examples of simulations related to the workshop’s
technology.

8.1 Description of the Simulation Mode

This section describes the overall aspects of the user interface that change when
launching a simulation. The following topics are covered:
● Tabs and Commands.
● Status Bar.
● Display Colours.
● Windows Layout.

In the Simulation mode, none of the Edit commands can be used, and modifications
cannot be made to the project or diagram. As a result, deactivated commands are grayed
out. However, it is possible to browse through and display projects and diagrams while in
Simulation mode.

 In Simulation mode, it is possible to print a diagram.

The simulation of a project or diagram is launched from the “Simulation” Tab.

The status bar shows the time elapsed during simulation (see section 2.1.7 Status Bar).

The Mouse Cursor: The hand represents the possibility of intervening during
simulation. Based on the workshop and components inserted in the diagram, make

© Famic Technologies Inc. 8-1

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

various modifications such as adjusting the orifice size of the throttle in the Pneumatic
workshop, or activating the push-button of an on-off switch in the Electric workshop.

Display Colours: In Simulation mode, specific elements appear in different colours to

indicate or emphasize their behaviour or simply to identify them. The use of colours
identifies of the components’ links, status, or status change. For further details on
displayed colours during simulation, refer to the simulation standards for each workshop.

Window Layout: When a project contains a circuit which spans several diagrams, it is
helpful to place windows so as to have an overall view of the diagram:
1. Open all windows to display.
2. Choose “View”  “Window”  “Vertical Tile” or “Horizontal Tile”.
3. Select a diagram by clicking on its window.
4. Click on “View”  “Zoom”  “Zoom All Components” to view the entire diagram in
the window.
5. Repeat previous step for each opened window.

 Use the function “Pan” to center each diagram.

 When a project is saved after choosing this layout, the layout will remain the next
time the project is opened.

8.1.1 Launching the Simulation

To simulate the current project: Choose the “Project Simulation” command in the
“Simulation” tab  “Mode” group, and then activate one of the simulation commands in
the “Simulation” tab  “Control” group (see section “Control” Group“Control” ). The
“Simulation” mode is launched. Elements from the current project’s circuits appear in the
colours related to the Simulation mode. For further information on simulation colours,
refer to standards of the related workshop.

In Simulation mode, it is possible open different diagrams with the “Open” command or
creates a new view with the “New View” command from the document contextual menu
in the “Project Explorer”.

 At any time during simulation, switch to another simulation speed just by clicking
on the desired mode command in the “Simulation” tab  “Control” group.

8-2
 Simulation and Analysis

In simulation mode, simulated time is indicated in the status bar.

It is possible to simulate a specific diagram, independently from the other diagrams of

the project.

To launch the Simulation of the Diagram: Open the diagram to simulate. Choose
“Simulation” tab  Mode group  “Document Simulation”; then choose a simulation
command from the “Control” group. The Simulation is launched and applies only to the
selected diagram.

Select several diagrams to be simulated simultaneously.

To simulate several diagrams, choose “Simulation” Tab  “Mode” Group  “Select

Documents to Simulate” and click on the checkboxes of the diagrams to be simulated.
Then, choose a simulation command from the “Control” group.

Figure 8-1: Selection of Documents to Simulate

The simulation is launched and applies only to selected diagrams.

8.2 Simulation Paces

Five simulation paces are available:
● 10 ms
● 2 ms
● 1ms
● 0.5 ms
● 0.1 ms

The simulation pace determines the general parameters of the simulation: simulation
time step, frequency division factor for electrotechnical simulation and animation refresh
rate.

The selection of the pace is done in the project properties.

 In all cases, the animation refresh rate is 50 milliseconds.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 8-3

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 8-2: Selecting Simulation Pace

8.2.1 10 ms Simulation

The 10 ms simulation pace is active by default and is the most commonly used. Its
purpose is to allow quick simulation of large circuits and instant interaction with them.

When simulating using this pace, the simulation step time is 10 milliseconds. Because
this step time is not fine enough to sample signal frequencies of 50 or 60 Hz, a frequency
division factor is introduced which divides all electrotechnical source frequencies by 20.

In the Electrotechnical workshop, the 10 ms simulation pace is designed to support AC

frequencies only between 50 Hz and 60 Hz. Although it is possible to set values out of
this range, measurement errors can occur and components may behave erroneously.

When simulating using the 10 ms pace, components are simulated in steady state;
transient responses are approximated.

If a behaviour seems to be unstable with a certain simulation pace, reduce it for the
simulator to resolve the calculation in a finer way.

8-4
 Simulation and Analysis

8.2.2 0.5, 1 and 2 ms Simulation

As an example, the 0.5 ms simulation pace provides a more accurate representation of

circuit behaviour.

In this case, the simulation step time is 500 microseconds. This step time is fine enough
to accurately sample frequencies of up to around 100 Hz. It can sample frequencies
above that, but the reduced number of samples per period may result in less than ideal
signal representation. The highest limit above which signal sampling becomes impossible
is 500 Hz for the 0.5 ms simulation pace.

 When simulating using this pace, large circuits may simulate slower than real-
time. This simulation pace is ideal for medium to small sized circuits.

 In this case, certain components will show a more accurate transient response.

8.2.3 0.1 ms Simulation

As an example, the 0.1 ms simulation pace provides a good simulation of component

behaviour.

In this case, the simulation step time is 100 microseconds. This step time is good enough
to accurately sample frequencies of up to 500 Hz. It is able to sample frequencies above
that, but the reduced number of samples per period may result in less than ideal signal
representation. The highest limit above which signal sampling becomes impossible is 2.5
kHz.

 When simulating using the 0.1 ms pace, medium to large circuits may simulate
slower than real-time. This simulation pace is ideal for small sized circuits focusing
on a few components.

8.3 Detecting Simulation Errors

Some error messages may appear in the message explorer window a simulation starts or
while a simulation is running (Refer to section 2.2.12 Message Explorer).

© Famic Technologies Inc. 8-5

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide
Error Detection when a Simulation Starts

The fluid simulation cannot work properly if a connection is missing. Hence, an error
message appears.

The simulator of command technologies tolerates free connectors.

Communication (OPC) Error Detection

In simulation mode, if the option to display server messages is selected in the “Add
Server” dialogue box, the messages will be displayed during simulation.

In edit mode, the OPC server state is indicated in the dialogue boxes of creating links
between OPC items.

8.4 Advanced Analysis Tools

Advanced analysis tools are used to perform thorough systems analyses, which are
divided into two parallel and distinct parts.
1. The first part is composed of the “Snapshot” tools. Trigger a data simulation snapshot
according to various criteria. These values can be used to restart a simulation with
saved values. This data can also be exported to be included in a complete simulation
analysis report.
2. The second part is the “Measuring Instruments” tool. Insert dynamic measuring
instruments on desired components and connection ports. Each instrument can
record the evolution of a variable in simulation mode. After simulation, the
measured values can be saved. These values can be plot or export for analysis.

8.4.1 Snapshot of a Circuit State

When schematics are composed of hundreds of components and simulation considers

thermal phenomena, viscosity, fluid compressibility, etc., the simulation can be
considerably slower. In such conditions, it can be expensive, in terms of time, to restart
the simulation from a certain state. Therefore, Automation Studio™ offers a feature to
trigger a snapshot of circuit’s numerical state from a given moment.

The snapshot saves the values of the simulator in an internal file. This file can be used to
reinitialize the simulation. For example, if an accumulator takes 2 minutes to fill, it can be
useful to capture this circuit state when it is full and to study only the unloading phase,

8-6
 Simulation and Analysis

without having to restart the simulation.

The added value of this feature is two-fold because of the considerable time gain when
studying the different work stages of a machine on one hand. Furthermore, it allows the
analysis of the behaviour differences of the circuit as a result of component modifications
and technical data changes.

When a snapshot is triggered, an internal file is automatically created in the “Snapshot”

directory of the “Project Explorer”. This document contains all the data and variables that
were used in the diagram when the snapshot was triggered. Its contextual menu is
shown in the following figure.

It is possible to trigger a snapshot with various activation methods.

To trigger a snapshot manually:

1. Start the desired simulation mode.

2. Choose “Simulation” Tab  “Conditions” Group  “Trigger Snapshot” .

The simulation is suspended.
3. Fill the fields in the “Snapshot Document Information” dialogue box that appears.

Figure 8-3: “Snapshot Document Information” Dialogue Box

4. Click on the “Simulation” button of the dialogue box.

 The data acquisition is created. Click on the desired simulation speed command to
continue the simulation.

 A snapshot document is created every time this command is used.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 8-7

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

 This command can only be used in simulation mode.

To trigger a delayed snapshot:

1. Open “Project Properties” dialogue “Project”  “Properties” Branch  “Simulation”
Category.

Figure 8-4: “Delayed Snapshot” Option

2. Check the “Delayed Snapshot” option.
3. Type the desired delay before the snapshot will be triggered in the “Snapshot Delay”
field.
4. Start the desired simulation mode.
5. When the relative simulated time attains the entered delay, the simulation is
suspended and a “Snapshot Document Information” dialogue box appears. Fill the
required information and then click on the “Ok” button.

To trigger a snapshot when a steady state condition is satisfied:

This activation mode is available only for Hydraulics and Pneumatics Workshops. Refer to
the user’s guide of these workshops for details on Steady State configuration.
1. Open the “Project Properties” dialogue  “Project”  “Properties” branch 
“Simulation” category.

8-8
 Simulation and Analysis

2. Check “Steady State Evaluation” option.

 You can access this function in the ribbon via the “Simulation Options” command
located in the “Control” group of the “Simulation” tab.

Figure 8-5: “Steady State Evaluation” Option

3. Start the desired simulation mode.

 When starting a simulation and a condition is related to a component that is not

simulated (the component is on a hidden layer or on a non-simulated diagram), a
message appears and the steady state evaluation is deactivated.
4. If the condition is true for a period of time equal to the convergence time, a snapshot
is triggered: the simulation is suspended and a “Snapshot Document Information”
dialogue box appears.
Fill the required information, and then click on the “Ok” button.
Refer to the Hydraulics and Pneumatics Workshops User’s Guide to get details on the
steady state convergence time delay.
5. If the data snapshot was triggered by a steady state condition, the following
dialogue box opens to choose how the simulation will be restarted depending on the
choices available.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 8-9

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 8-6: “Resume Simulation” Dialogue Box

Option Description
Continue simulation with If this option is selected on closing this dialogue box, and
the same steady state the “Steady State Evaluation” option is checked, the
condition. active condition is reset and the simulation continues.
Continue simulation with The option to select another condition. If this option is
other steady state selected on closing the dialogue box, and the “Steady
condition. State Evaluation” option is checked, the selected
condition is activated and the simulation continues.
Continue simulation without The “Steady State Evaluation” option is unchecked and
steady state condition. the simulation continues.
Stop simulation The simulation is stopped.

To save a snapshot document:

1. As soon as a condition described in the previous section is satisfied, a snapshot is

triggered.
2. Name the snapshot and add a descriptive comment if needed.
The snapshot document is saved in the “Snapshot” directory of the project. If the
directory doesn’t exist, it is created.

8-10
 Simulation and Analysis

Figure 8-7: Snapshot Document Created in the “Project Explorer”

Every simulated document and component receives a unique ID (ISO code) inside a
project. When a snapshot is triggered, each simulator returns the information on every
simulated document and component, as well as general information on the simulator.

The saved information is:

● Absolute simulated time of the snapshot.
● Information on each simulated document with its unique ID.
● Information on each simulated component with its unique ID.
● Internal information about each simulator.
● Global variables of the project.

The contextual menu of a data snapshot in the project explorer offers the following
commands:
Command Description
Simulate With This Data To launch a simulation with the values saved in the
snapshot document.
See below for more details.
Export… To export the contents of the snapshot document to
a tabulated .txt file.
More information below.
Cut Standard operations.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 8-11

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Command Description
Copy

Delete

Rename To rename the snapshot document.

Properties To set or modify the properties of a snapshot

document.
More information below.

To start the simulation:

Snapshot can be used to define new initial conditions of a simulation. The simulation can
restart with the same setting as the saved conditions. The relative simulated time starts
at 0. The absolute simulated time is equal to the saved time of the snapshot.

To start a simulation with a snapshot:

Select a snapshot document in the “Project Explorer”, open its contextual menu and
activate the “Simulate with this Data” command.

or

Activate the “Simulate with Snapshot” command in the “Simulation” Tab  “Control”
Group.

The following dialogue box is displayed to choose the desired snapshot document.

 It is also possible to simply double-click on the snapshot document in the Project

Explorer.

Figure 8-8: Snapshots Selection

8-12
 Simulation and Analysis

To export a snapshot document:

This function can be used only if the measuring instruments have been inserted with the
option “Record” activated. Refer to section 8.4.2 Dynamic Measuring Instruments for
details.
1. Select a snapshot document in the “Project Explorer”.
2. Open its contextual menu and activate the “Export” command.
The “Filter Configuration” dialogue box appears. It contains two lists for multiple
object selection.

Figure 8-9: Data Selection to Include in the Report

3. In the left list, select the diagrams to export data.
4. In the right list, select measuring instruments of the selected diagram to export data.
5. Once the data is selected, click on “OK”.
The “Save As…” dialogue box appears.
6. Set the name of the exported file and directory.
A report, which contains all the saved data of the selected measuring instruments, is
created and saved in .txt format.

 It is possible to open this report with Excel or other similar software. The following
figure shows an example of a snapshot document report transfer to spreadsheet
software.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 8-13

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 8-10: Snapshot Document Report Example

To define and modify snapshot document properties:

1. Select a snapshot document in the “Project Explorer”.
2. Choose “Edit”  “Document Properties  “Summary Info”. In the “Document
Properties” dialogue box, enter or modify field information.

Figure 8-11: Snapshot “Document Properties” Dialogue Box

Attribute Description
Comment Optional comment that can be assigned to the snapshot
document.
Created Date and time of the creation of the document (cannot be
edited).
Document Category The category of the document (cannot be edited).
Saved The document last save date and time (cannot be edited).
Name The name of the snapshot document.

8-14
 Simulation and Analysis

Attribute Description
Simulation Information on the simulation that produced this data
Information snapshot (cannot be edited):
● Type of stop condition: manual, with delay, or steady
state condition.
● In case of steady state, the condition.
● The absolute simulated time.
● The list of simulated diagrams.
● The project’s options.

 Renaming or deleting the file necessary for the snapshot, renders it invalid
anymore. Also pay attention to the diagram modifications. If a component is
deleted, its data is not used. If a component is added, the simulation starts in its
default state. If a component is modified, the snapshot data is reinserted if the
simulation is possible with this new data.

 Obviously, comparing an initialization of a modified circuit is valuable only if the

exact reason for performing this change is known, and if there is a snapshot of the
document.

8.4.2 Dynamic Measuring Instruments

8.4.2.1 Interface Presentation and Description

Dynamic measuring instruments are specialized components satellites that obtain useful
information on the variables used in a simulation. In order to avoid inserting unnecessary
components in real schematics, these instruments, accessible in the “Simulation” tab 
“Measuring” group, can be inserted in a circuit during simulation.

The main purpose of these dynamic measuring instruments is to display and record a
given property. It is then possible to plot evolution curves of variables and to build a
complete analysis report of the simulation. Unit and refreshment period can be specified.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 8-15

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 8-12: “Simulation” tab  “Measuring” Group for Fluid, Electrotechnical and One-
Line Editors

Icon Editor Description

Standard Dynamic measuring instrument on components.

Multi-Lines and One-

Line Electrotechnical

Standard Dynamic measuring instrument on one junction.

One-Line
Electrotechnical

Standard Differential dynamic measuring instrument on two

junctions.
Electrotechnical

Electrotechnical Differential dynamic measuring instrument on

three junctions.

8-16
 Simulation and Analysis

Icon Editor Description

Standard Power dynamic instrument.

8.4.2.2 Positioning Measuring Instruments

1. First, activate the command you want to use, here for example the Power Dynamic
Instrument:

Figure 8-13 Activating Power Dynamic Instrument then Setting the Flow
2. Click once the line to set the flow. It will be highlighted in blue. Release. Select a first
junction and, holding down the left button of the mouse, drag and drop it to any part
of the editor.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 8-17

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 8-14 First Pressure

3. Release and move toward another junction.

Figure 8-15 Second Pressure

4. Once the two pressure points are defined, the measuring instruments window will
pop up. The user can now select the recorded property and the unit to calculate it.

8-18
 Simulation and Analysis

Figure 8-16 Recorded Property and Unit Selection

5. When the checkbox “Record” is checked, the values measured during simulation will
be recorded and displayed within a plotter.

Figure 8-17 Recording Option for Measured Data

8.4.2.3 Configuring Measuring Instruments

There are two different ways to open the “Measuring Instrument Properties” dialogue
box.
● When creating a new measuring instrument.
● When opening the component properties (“View” Tab  “Properties” group 
“Component Properties” command, contextual menu, double-click, or ALT-ENTER,
etc.).

© Famic Technologies Inc. 8-19

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 8-18: “Measuring Instrument Properties” Dialogue Box

Zone or element Description
Measured To set the measured property.
property

 The available properties depend on which measuring

instrument is inserted.
Displayed unit To define the displayed unit of the chosen property.
Precision To limit screen update of the displayed value. As long as the
measured value variation is in the range of the defined stability,
the displayed information stays the same.
Comments To insert significant comments related to the measured property.
The comment is displayed on the screen when the corresponding
box is checked.
Record To set if the component has to record simulation measures.

 Check this box to make the measure available for

exportation.

8.4.2.4 Measurement Data Management

It is possible to register the values displayed by the measuring instrument in a Plotter.

From this plotter, exporting all data to an external .txt file is possible.

8-20
 Simulation and Analysis

The measures document:

 Reinserts the registered values in the plotter in order to read again the curves.

 Exports the registered values by the measuring instruments to a .txt file that can
be used for analysis or reuse by the simulator.

To save a measures document:

1. Make sure that the “Record” box is checked in the “Recorder” dialogue box for all
instruments to record measures.
2. A black dot is displayed (red dot in simulation mode ) on
the instruments that will record measures in simulation mode.
3. Start a desired simulation mode.
4. All measuring instruments are initialized. In every simulation cycle, the properly
configured instruments, record the corresponding values and the absolute simulated
time of the simulation measures. At the end of the simulation, the data is saved.
5. Stop the simulation.
6. The saved values are preserved until the next simulation
7. In the measuring instrument contextual menu, click on “Save simulation values”.
8. A plotter is created in the project explorer its window opens up automatically. The
plotter image is locked, which means that it will keep the same data during the next
simulation.

Figure 8-19: Plotter’s Contextual menu

© Famic Technologies Inc. 8-21

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

The contextual menu of a dynamic measuring document in the project explorer offers the
following commands:

Command Description

Show/Hide Plotter To visualize in the plotter the previously recorded

measures.

Cut Cut the plotter’s to possibly paste it elsewhere in the

project.

Copy Allows to copy the plotter’s data in the project

explorer in a new locked plotter.

Delete To delete the measures document.

Rename To rename the measures document.

Properties… To set or modify the measures document properties.

More details below.

To plot curves of the measures:

1. Select a measures document in the “Project Explorer”.

2. Open its contextual menu and activate the “View” command or drag and drop it
directly onto the plotter.

The plotter appears if it is not already opened and the recorded measures are
displayed.

8-22
 Simulation and Analysis

Figure 8-20: Plotter with Recorded Dynamic Measures

To export measures:

Activate the “Export…” command in the measures document contextual menu. If the
values registered in the document are displayed in the plotter, activate the “Export”
command in the plotter.

Set the export file name and the folder in saving dialogue box, then click on “Save”. The
obtained file can be imported into other software (Excel for example).

To define or modify measures document properties:

In the “Document Properties”  “Summary Info”, enter or modify field information

.
Figure 8-21: Snapshot “Document Properties” Dialogue Box

© Famic Technologies Inc. 8-23

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Attribute Description

Comment Optional comment to assign to the measures document.

Created Date and time of creation of the document (cannot be

edited).

Document Category The category of the document (cannot be edited).

Name The name of the measures document.

Saved The document last save date and time (cannot be edited).

Simulation Information on the simulation that produced this data

Information measures (cannot be edited):

 Type of document.

 Information on the simulation that created this

measures document. This information can be copied
and pasted in any other text editor.

 The measuring instrument identifier.

 The name of the measured property.

 The comment of the measuring instrument.

8.5 Video Recording

It is possible to record and share MP4 format files of every action in project edit or
simulation mode, as well as in diagram simulation mode. It becomes easy to visually
illustrate the technical explanations concerning the project.

All the video commands are grouped together in the “Tools” tab  “Video Recording”
group.

8-24
 Simulation and Analysis

8.5.1 Video Recording Options

The following figure shows all options that can be configured for the recording properties
of Automation Studio™ (accessible from the “Recording Options” command of the “Video
Recording” group).

Figure 8-22: “Video Recording” Configuration Options

Zone Description

Video Quality To set recorded file compression. The higher the quality, the
larger the associated file size.

Images per Second To set the video capture frequency.

Capture Area To determine if the recording will be the active workspace or

the complete application window.

Show Cursor To display the movement of the mouse cursor during

© Famic Technologies Inc. 8-25

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Zone Description
recording.

Marker Options If the cursor is displayed, you may display the mouse
movement, the mouse click or both. For each one, you can
select the colour (“Click colour”).

Audio Parameters From this section you can activate and deactive the audio
recording. If the audio recording is activated, you can select a
recording device.

Audio Recording Display a list of available recording device, you must select
Device one of the choices for recording. This option is only available
if the Audio Recording is activated.

The last two options are deactivated when no recording device is connected.

In synchronous recording mode, if the simulation I sno close from real time, then the
autio quality will not be good. It is recommended to record audio in asynchronous mode.

To record a video in the edit mode:

1. Choose “Tools” Tab  “Video Recording” Group  “Asynchronous Recording”.

Recording begins immediately and all subsequent actions are registered.

2. Build the circuit or the application that to record.

 To record some steps, it is possible to pause by choosing “Tools” Tab  “Video

Recording” Group  “Pause”. The recording starts again when the “Pause” option
is deactivated.

To stop the recording:

1. Choose “Tools” Tab  “Video Recording” Group  “Stop”.

The “Save As” window automatically opens.

8-26
 Simulation and Analysis

2. Choose the location to save the recording in the “Save In:” zone, and name it in the
“File Name” zone with the .mp4 extension.

3. Click on “Save” to the video capture save.

Watch the video with any .mp4 file media player.

To record a video in the simulation mode:

1. Choose “Tools” Tab “Video Recording” Group  “Synchronous Recording”. This

mode is synchronized with the beginning of the simulation.

2. Start the simulation mode.

Recording begins.

 To only record a specific part of the simulation, start the simulation normally and
choose “Asynchronous Recording” or “Synchronous Recording” when the
simulation is already started.

 To only record some steps, it is possible to pause by choosing “Tools” tab 

“Video Recording” Group  “Pause”. The recording starts again when the “Pause”
option is deactivated.

To stop the recording:

1. Choose “Tools” Tab  “Video Recording” Group  “Stop” or stop the simulation by
choosing “Simulation”  “Pause”.

The “Save As” window automatically opens.

2. Choose the location to save the recording in the “Save In:” zone and name it in the
“File Name” zone with the .mp4 extension.

3. Click on “Save” to the video capture save.

Watch the video with any .mp4 file media player.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 8-27

9 Plotters
Using the plotters, it is possible to display a graphical representation of the state of
variables during the simulation of a circuit. Automation Studio ™ provides three types of
plotter, y(t) , y(x) , z(x,y) , which can be used to plot the variation in the
variables of technological components.

The user can drag and drop components, variables or dynamic measuring instruments
onto the plotting area.

In this way, it is possible to graph the values recorded by dynamic measuring

instruments.

The y(t) plotter graphs variables as a function of time, y(x) graphs as a function of
another variable while the z(x,y) plotter provides a graph in three dimensions.

 These plotters can be used with all of the technologies available in Automation
Studio™.

 The number of plotters that can be created for any project is unlimited, except
when using the Educational Edition.

9.1 Presentation of the Plotters

9.1.1 Access to the Plotters

The plotters are available in the “Measuring” group of the “Simulation” tab in the ribbon.

Figure 9-1 "Measuring" Group of the "Simulation" Tab

Once they have been created, plotters are shown and can be accessed from the project
explorer. Each new plotter will be added to a folder named “Plotters” in the Project
Explorer.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-1

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 9-2 Plotters shown in the “Plotters” Folder in the Project Explorer

 Only plotters which belong to the active project can be opened.

9.1.2 Interface Overview

Figure 9-3 General Plotter Interface

9-2
 Plotters

Area Name Description

1 Close button Close the active plotter.
2 Help button Open the help file.
3 Show/Hide Button used to show or hide the configuration panel.
Configuration Panel
4 Plot Area Area where variables are plotted at the selected scale.
5 Resize handle Handle used to change the size of the plot area.
6 Plotter configuration Area composed of two tabs, “Plotter” and “Curves” in
area which the simulated variables can be displayed with
their legend.
This area can be edited. See sections 9.2.1.2
Configuration of y(t) and y(x) Plotters in the Project
Properties and 9.3.1.1 Configuration of the z(x,y) Plotter
in the Properties.
7 Resize handle Handle used to resize the configuration area in order to
display all of the available options.

 The graph display can be panned by moving the mouse pointer over the display
while the left mouse button is pressed.

9.1.3 Description of Each Plotter

The displayed values are the defaults used by the software. Some of them can be edited
whereas others are fixed.

Each project can contain an unlimited number of plotters (except for the Educational
Edition). As an example, here are the three plotters on the same project. For each plotter,
it is possible to edit the scale used on the graph (see section 9.2.3.1 Scale).

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-3

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 9-4 Example of y(t) Plotter

Figure 9-5 Example of y(x) Plotter

9-4
 Plotters

Figure 9-6 Example of z(x,y) Plotter

The default display settings for the plotter are set in the “Plotter, Curve Editor and
Oscilloscope” section in the project properties.

9.2 y(t) and y(x) Plotters

The y(t) plotter can be used to plot variables as a function of time and to display the
variations. The y(x) plotter is used to plot variables as a function of another variable.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-5

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 9-7 Example of three Variables plotted as a function of Time with the y(t) Plotter

Figure 9-8 Example of two Variables plotted as a function of another Variable with the y(x)
Plotter

9-6
 Plotters

9.2.1 Plotters Configuration

9.2.1.1 y(t) and y(x) Plotter Configuration Panels

 The properties of the curves and of the plotter are defined in the configuration
panel attached to the plotter and shown to the right of the graph area.

 This panel consists in two tabs, “Plotter” and “Curves”.

Figure 9-9 Configuration Panel of the Plotter

The settings can be modified at two levels: for each variable and its corresponding graph
(“Curve” tab) and globally for the plotter (“Plotter” tab).

“Curve” Tab from the Configuration Area of the y(t) Plotter

The upper part of the “Curve” tab shows the list of variables that are taken into account
by the plotter during the simulation.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-7

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 9-10 List of Variables from the "Curves" tab of the y(t) and y(x) Plotters respectively

It is possible to perform a search for specific variables using a filter based either on the
name of the “Variable” or its “Location” using a drop-down menu.

Variables can be deleted from the list using the button.

The lower part of the configuration panel can be used to configure the curves and the
scale of the x and y axes of the selected variable.

 To select the variable to modify, click on the variable’s row. Its details are
displayed in the lower part.

 In the configuration panel of the y(x) plotter, the radio buttons to the left of the
variable names, in the column “X”, are used to choose which variable will be
displayed on the x axis.

Name Description
Curve Colour Modify the colour of the curve selected in the variable
list.
Scale Select the line scale : linear, natural logarithm (ln[e]),
decimal logarithm (lg[10]), binary logarithm (lb[2]).

9-8
 Plotters

Name Description
Lineweight Specify the width of the line. 25 different lineweights
are available.

 Important: The thicker the line is, the slower the

plotting of the curves will be. The ideal value is
therefore 1.

Line Pattern Define the line pattern : Solid, Dash, Dash Dot, Dot,
Small Dot.
Axis Initial Minimum Set the reference axis minimum value.
Value
 This is the value that the plotter will set when the

“Reset axes limits” button is pressed.

Axis Initial Set the reference axis maximum value.

Maximum Value
 This is the value that the plotter will set when the

“Reset axes limits” button is pressed.

Axis Minimum Value Delimit the plot area by setting the axis minimum value
Axis Maximum Delimit the plot area by setting the axis maximum value
Value
Curve Visibility It is possible to hide a variable curve and to show only
the curves which are of interest.

“Plotter” Tab of the y(t) Plotter Configuration Panel

The “Plotter” tab contains the display options for the plotter and apply to all of the curves
on this plotter.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-9

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 9-11 "Plotter" Tab of the y(t) Plotter

Click on the button to open the project standards for plotters.

Name Description
Annotations Colour Change the background colour of the annotation
bubbles.
Background Colour Set the background colour of the plot area.
Background Image The background of the plot area can be personalised by
applying an image.
Cursors Appearance The measurement cursors on the plot area can be
shown as either a vertical bar or as a crosshair. The
« Crosshair » option makes it easier to follow the curves.
Cursors Colour Set the colour of the cursors displayed on the plot area.

9-10
 Plotters

Name Description
Grid Colour Set the colour of the grid.
Grid Strips Layout Configure the display of strips on the background of the
plot area: None, Vertical, Horizontal, Both.
Horizontal Axis The horizontal axis can be placed at the bottom or at the
Placement top of the graph.
Initial Time Interval
 This option is only available for the y(t) plotter.

Markers Colour Set the colour of markers displayed on the plot area.
Maximum Number Limit of the number of points per plot.
of Measurements by
Plot  A tooltip is displayed which shows the simulation
time for the specified limit.

Precision of The number of decimal places can be specified for

Exported measurement data exported from the plotter.
Measurements
Show Legend Show the legend on the plot area. The legend also
allows the activation or deactivation of any of the
variables on the plotter.
Values Colour Set the colour of values displayed on the plot area.
Vertical Axes Layout Layout of the vertical axes and the associated curves:
with the option “Layered”, the curves for each variable
overlap on one plot area. The option “Stacked” shows
each curve separately as a series of graphs stacked one
on top to the other.
Vertical Axes The vertical axes can be placed All left, All right,
Placement alternating Left then right, or Right then left.

9.2.1.2 Configuration of y(t) and y(x) Plotters in the Project Properties

It is also possible to configure the plotters at project level. Go to the Project Properties →
“General Standards” → “Plotter, Curve Editor and Oscilloscope”.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-11

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

 These parameters will be the default parameters for all plotters in the project
unless one of these options is modified in the configuration panel of a given
plotter.

Figure 9-12 Access to the Plotter Parameters in the Project Properties

Figure 9-13 Parameters Window for the y(t) Plotter

9-12
 Plotters

Name Description
Background Colour Personalize the background colour of the plot area.
Grid Colour Personalize the grid colour.
Values Colour Personalize the colour of the displayed values.
Cursors Colour Personalize the colour of the displayed cursors.
Annotations Colour Personalize the colour of annotations placed on the plot
area.
Markers Colour Personalize the colour of displayed markers.
Vertical Axes Layout Layout of the vertical axes and the associated curves:
with the option “Layered”, the curves for each variable
overlap on one plot area. The option “Stacked” shows
each curve separately as a series of graphs stacked one
on top to the other.
Grid Strips Layout Configure the display of strips on the background of the
plot area: None, Vertical, Horizontal, Both.
Horizontal Axis The time axis can be placed at the bottom or at the top
Placement of the graph.
Vertical Axes The vertical axes can be placed All left, All right,
Placement alternating Left then right, or Right then left.
Cursors Appearance The measurement cursors on the plot area can be
shown as either a vertical bar or as a crosshair. The
« Crosshair » option, with a horizontal and vertical line,
makes it easier to follow the curves.
Background Image The background of the plot area can by personalised by
applying an image.
Initial Time Interval
 This option is only available for the y(t) plotter.

Show Legend Show the legend on the plot area. The legend also
allows the activation or deactivation of any of the
variables on the plotter.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-13

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Name Description
Maximum Number Limit of the number of points per plot.
of Measurements by
Plot  A tooltip is displayed which shows the simulation
time for the specified limit.
Precision of The number of decimal places can be specified for
Exported measurement data exported from the plotter.
Measurements

9.2.2 Plotter Document Properties

The plotter document properties can be accessed from the contextual menu in the Project
Explorer.

Figure 9-14 Plotter Properties in the Contextual Menu in the Project Explorer

9-14
 Plotters

Figure 9-15 y(t) Plotter Document Properties

The document properties window shows the following fields:

 Comment (read/write)
 Created (read only)
 Document category (read only)
 Name (read/write)
 Saved (read only)

9.2.3 Plotters Toolbar

The plotters have a number of tools available. Some of these tools are common to all
plotters, others depend on the type of plotter.

9.2.3.1 Scale

Figure 9-16 y(t) Plotter Scale Toolbar

The following tables give a brief description of the toolbar buttons that are common to all

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-15

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

plotters.

Icons Commands Description

Automatic / Automatic scrolling continuously updates the display
Manual scrolling to show the latest values while the simulation is
running.
With Manual scrolling, the data is incorporated into
the plotter but the display does not automatically
advance with the addition of new data.

 This option is only available if the plotter is in

the “Unlock Acquired Measurements” mode.

 Only available for the y(t) plotter.

Delete Delete all measurements taken prior to clicking on the

measurements button.
Automatic scale to Resize the plot area to visualize the data points of the
y axis y curve.
Automatic scale to Resize the plot area to visualize the data points of the
x axis x curve.
Automatic scale to Resize the plot area to visualize the data points of all
all axes the curves.
Reset axes limits Reset the axes limits to the default values or to the
to default lower values previously defined with the options “Axis
and upper values Initial Maximum Value” or “Axis Initial Minimum
Value”. See section “Curve” Tab from the
Configuration Area of the y(t) Plotter
Reset time scale Reset the time scale.

 Only available for the y(t) plotter

 The scale can also be changed scrolling the wheel of the mouse.

9.2.3.2 Inserting Cursors, Annotations and Markers

9-16
 Plotters

Icons Commands Description

Add cursor Cursors on the plot area allow measurements in the time.
The measurement cursors on the plot area can be shown
as either a vertical bar or as a crosshair.

 They can be moved throughout the plot area.

 Only available for the y(t) plotter.

Remove all cursors Remove all the cursors inserted on the plot area.

Add annotation Add annotation on the plot area in order to add

complementary information if needed.
Remove all Remove all the annotations placed on the plot area.
annotations
Add marker Markers allow to get measurements of a precise point on
the curve.

 Unlike cursors, markers cannot be moved.

Remove all Remove all the markers and their measurements from
markers the plot area.

Cursors

The user can display one or several cursors on the plot area. They can display several
measurements taken at a certain point of the time.

They can be shown as either a vertical bar or as a crosshair. The crosshair allows it to be
able to better follow the curves and the measurement points.

 Cursors are only available for the y(t) plotter.

 They can be moved within the plot area in order to display other measurements.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-17

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 9-17 Example for y(t) plotter with cursors (vertical)

The vertical cursor is inserted with the corresponding tool from the toolbar or from
the contextual menu (See section 9.2.4 Plotters Contextual Menu).

 Inserting cursors can be done while either simulating or editing.

The cursor is inserted at the place pointed by the mouse if done from the contextual
menu, and by default at the plot area’s centre if done from the toolbar.

The cursors can be moved by the mouse at any place on the plot area, without them to
necessarily coincide with measurement points.

They can be deleted from the contextual menu or with the corresponding tool from the

toollbar .

With the crosshair, the horizontal bar follows automatically the curve. The time is
indicated under the cursor and the measured value is displayed at each intersection. In
case there are two cursors, the difference between two values is displayed next to the
second one with its unit. The time difference is also indicated under brackets.

The cursor appearance (vertical bar or crosshair, colour etc.) is defined in the
configuration panel. See “Plotter” Tab from the Configuration .

9-18
 Plotters
Markers

Markers inserted by the user display specific measurement values.

Figure 9-18 Examples of Measurements displayed via Markers

Markers are inserted from the toolbar or from the contextual menu. The marker is
always inserted at the current point in the simulation.

 Inserting markers can be done only while simulating.

Measurement values are written under the markers. These values remain the same even
if the scale is modified.

These markers cannot be moved but the user can place an unlimited number of markers
on the curves.

They can be removed from the plotter’s contextual menu (See section 9.2.4 Plotters

Contextual Menu), with the corresponding tool from the toolbar or while simulating

with the command “Delete Measurements” .

The marker’s colour can be modified with the parameter “Markers Colour” which can be
accessed from the plot area.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-19

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

 These markers and their values are considered for the printing and appear on the
printed document.

 Markers are ignored during the export of the curve.

Annotations

The user can add annotations according to his needs which allow him to personalize the
plotter adding complementary information.

Annotations are inserted onto the plot area with the corresponding tool from the toolbar

or from the contextual menu.

 Inserting annotations can be done while either simulating or editing.

The annotation is inserted at the place pointed by the mouse if done from the contextual
menu and by default at the plot area’s centre, if done from the toolbar.

It can then be moved, resized or rotated according to the user’s needs.

Double-click on the label to edit it.

Select the annotation and click on the Del. key to delete it. The annotation is also deleted

from the plotter’s contextual menu or from the toolbar .

The annotation’s colour can be modified with the parameter « Annotations Colour » in the
configuration panel.

 The annotations are considered for the printing and will appear on the printed
document.

 The annotations are ignored while exporting the curve.

9.2.3.3 Display

9-20
 Plotters

The user can also use display tools in the toolbar.

Figure 9-19 Display Toolbar for the y(t) and y(x) Plotter

Icon Commands Description

Show/Hide Show or hide the measurements points on a curve.
measurement
points

Show all plots Show in one click all the plots, even those that were
previously invisible.
Show Legend The legend can be shown on the plot area to visualize the
variables being plotted and deactivate some of them, if
needed.
Unlock/Lock Lock and unlock the acquired measurements.
Acquired
Measurements  The user has the possibility to freeze the plotter: it
won’t be restarted at the next simulation which
mean that its plot will be saved.
Print Print plot’s image.

Copy Copy plot’s image.

Export Export measurements to a .txt file.

 The number of decimals can be defined with the

option “Precision of Exported Measurements” in
the “Plotter” Tab from the configuration panel.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-21

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 9-20 Display Legend and Highlight a Curve

The option “Display Legend” allows the user to visualize the selected and plotted
variables.

 Hover the variables’ name with the mouse. The curve of the corresponding
variable is highlighted in the plot area.

9.2.4 Plotters Contextual Menu

The commands from the contextual menu allow the user to navigate through the
annotations and markers, add new one or delete them.

9-22
 Plotters

Figure 9-21 : Plot Area’s Contextual Menu

Command Description
Insert Cursor Insert a cursor onto the plot area.

 Inserting cursors can be done while editing and simulating.

 The vertical cursor is inserted at the place pointed by the

mouse if done from the contextual menu or at the centre of
the plot area if done from the toolbar.

 Only available for the y(t) plotter.

Next Cursor Navigate to the next cursors.

Previous Cursor Navigate to the previous cursors.

Delete all Cursors Delete of all the cursors from the plot area.
Add Annotation Add annotation onto the plot area.

 Adding can be done while either editing or simulating.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-23

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Command Description

 The annotation is inserted at the place pointed by the

mouse if done from the contextual menu or at the center of
the plot area if done from the toolbar.

Next Annotation Navigation to the next annotation

Previous Navigation to the previous annotation.
Annotation
Delete all Delete all annotations from the plot area.
Annotations
Insert Marker Insert marker on a curve point.

 Adding can be done only while simulating. This command is

then available in the contextual menu only in simulation
mode.

 The marker is always inserted at the current point in

simulation.

 A marker cannot be moved.

Next Marker Navigation to the next markers.

Previous Marker Navigation to the previous markers.
Delete all Markers Delete all the markers from the plot area.
Copy Plotter Image Copy the plotter’s image in order to print it.
Export Export measurements to a .txt file.
Measurements
 Only available in Editing mode.

9.2.5 Plotters Appearance Configuration

9-24
 Plotters
Plot Area Background

The plot area’s background can be personalized according to the users’ needs, who can
display curves on a blank background or vertical or horizontal lines (Option “Display Grid
Strips” in the “Plotter” Tab in the configuration panel) or modify its colour (Option “Colour
Background”).

The user can also insert a personalized image in the background of the plot area (Option
“Background Image”).

Figure 9-22 Example for Background Image

Curves Colour

The curves colour is defined in the “Curves” Tab from the variables and curves
configurator. The user can choose contrasted colours for a better plots’ visualization. To
do so, select the variable in the variables list, then, in the lower part, select the “Curve
Colour”.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-25

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 9-23 Select Curves Colour

It is also possible to vary the curve colour as a function of the variable measurements.

Figure 9-24 Curve Colour varying as a function of Variables Values

9.2.6 Data Plot in Simulation

9.2.6.1 Adding a variable onto a Plotter

To add a variable in Editing mode:

9-26
 Plotters

1. Create a plotter;

2. Select a component in the diagram and drag-and-drop it onto the plot area ;

The dialogue box “Plot Selection” in which the user can select the variables to be plotted
automatically pops up:

Figure 9-25 : Dialogue Box « Plot Selection »

 If the component has no variable to plot, you will get the message “No available
plots for this component”. Click on OK to close it.

The selected variables are displayed in the configuration area in the “Curves” tab. They
appear in the order defined in the “Variables Selection” dialogue box.

Figure 9-26 List of Variables in the Configuration Zone

Each variable has its corresponding curve except if the option “Curve Visibility” is
deactivated in the list .

The plotter assigns automatically the following properties to each curve:

 Scale: Minimum and maximum values of the plot.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-27

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

 Plot Colour: Colour assigned by default to the variable when selected.

 Plot Unit: Metric or imperial values, depending on the unit system defined upon
installation.
 Time Scale: Time lapse that is visible in the plotter window.

When a variable is configured, the plot is automatically generated in simulation mode.

 Unlimited number of plotters can be created within a same project which allows
the user to get an unlimited number of plots out of one simulation.

9.2.6.2 Adding a Measuring Instrument onto a Plotter

Plotting the Curve

Variables are simultaneously plotted and simulated at each simulator cycle. Simulation
and plotting occur simultaneously. If the simulation’s duration exceeds the visible plotter
frame, the plotting surface scrolls to display the new time frame, and a scroll bar
becomes active at the bottom of the window. This scroll bar is used to review the entire
curve once the simulation is stopped

To change the colour associated with a variable: Go to the Curve tab in the
configuration area, select a variable by double-clicking on its name in the “Variable”
column and modify the “Curve Colour” option.

To modify the plot scale of a variable: Click on the corresponding value in the Plotter
Variables’ Properties Window and modify the value. Make sure that the scale’s minimum
value is smaller than the scale’s maximum value.

 You can also launch the automatic scale function by selecting a curve and clicking

on the following commands: .

Preserving Visual Data

Once the simulation is stopped, the graphic data remains on the plotter screen.

 The screen is reset when the simulation is restarted.

9-28
 Plotters
Selecting Curves

To select curves:

Select multiple variables in the plotter properties window by holding the CTRL key, or by
clicking directly on the curves in the plot area.

Curves corresponding to selected variables are doubled in thickness.

When one or more curves are available without a selected variable, the default scale
displayed is the scale of the first variable in the property window. When a variable is
selected in the property window, its scale automatically appears in the plot area with the
corresponding colour and unit.

When a curve on the graph is selected, it will select the associated line in the properties
table and vice versa.

Taking Measurements

Take measurements between two points on a curve.

To take a measurement:
1. Start simulation;

2. Activate the command to insert a marker ;

3. The measurements are displayed on the plot area next to the inserted marker;

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-29

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 9-27 : Measurements on a Plotter

The user can also insert a cursor as a vertical bar or crosshair allowing him to display
measurements. This function is only available for the y(t) plotter. Contrary to inserting
markers, this can be done in editing mode.

To cancel a measurement:

Click on or fom the toolbar: The calculated information is removed from the
plot.

Saving Textual Data

After variables have been plotted, it is possible to export the plot data as a .txt file. To do
so, click on the “Export” button from the plotter’s toolbar when the data are plotted.

 It is possible to select more than one variable at the same time to export the data
of multiple curves. To do so, hold the CTRL key and select all of the desired
variables. This way, it is possible to compare multiple curves when the data is
exported.

The “Save File” dialog box appears and opens in the root directory of the project if the
data has already been saved. If the data has never been saved, the data is stored in the

9-30
 Plotters

Automation Studio™ folder. The formatted data can be imported into any spreadsheet
application.

 The number of decimal places can be determined with the option “Precision of
Exported Measurements” located in the “Plotter” tab from the configuration panel.

Deleting a Variable and its Associated Plot

Click on the variable or one of its values to select it (hold the CTRL key and select all the
desired variables) and click on the “Delete” button .

Drag and drop the same component onto the “Plotter” surface and uncheck the
corresponding variable.

 When a component is deleted from a diagram, the associated curves in the plotter
are automatically deleted as well.

9.3 z(x,y) Plotter

The z(x,y) Plotter is used to plot a variable set on the z axis as a function of variables set
on the x and y axes and create a 3D representation.

Figure 9-28 Example of three Variables plotted with the z(x,y) Plotter

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-31

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

9.3.1 Plotter’s Configuration

Configuration Area of the z (x,y) Plotter

The properties of the curves and of the plotter are defined in the configuration panel
attached to the plotter and shown to the right of the graph area.

This panel consists on two tabs, “Plotter” and “Curves”.

Figure 9-29 z(y,x) Plotter Configuration Area

The settings can therefore be modified at two levels: for each variable in its
corresponding graph (“Curve” tab) and globally for the plotter (“Plotter” tab).

“Curve” Tab of the Configuration Area

The upper part of the “Curve” tab shows the list of variables that are taken into account
by the plotter during the simulation.

9-32
 Plotters

Figure 9-30 Variables’ List in the “Curves” Tab

It is possible to perform a search for specific variables using a filter based either on the
name of the “Variable” or its “Location” using a drop-down menu.

Variables can be deleted from the list using the button.

The lower part of the configuration area can be used to configure the curves and the
scale of the z, x and y axes of the selected variable.

 To select the variable to modify, click on the variable’s row. It will be highlighted.

 In the configuration area of the z(y,x) plotter, the radio buttons to the left of the
variable names, in the column “X”, are used to choose which variable will be
displayed on the x axis.

Nom Description
Curve Colour Modify the colour of the curve selected in the variable
list.
Scale Select the line scale : linear, natural logarithm (ln[e]),
decimal logarithm (lg[10]), binary logarithm (lb[2]).

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-33

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Nom Description
Lineweight Specify the width of the line. 25 different linewidths are
available.

 Important: The thicker the line is, the slower the

plotting of the curves will be. The ideal value is
therefore 1.

Line Pattern Define the line pattern: Solid, Dash, Dash Dot, Dot, Small
Dot.
Axis Minimum Value Delimit the plot area by setting the axis minimum value.
Axis Initial Minimum Set the reference axis minimum value.
Value
 This is the value that the plotter will set when the

Reset axes limits button is pressed.

Axis Maximum Delimit the plot area by setting the axis maximum
Value value.
Axis Initial Set the reference axis maximum value.
Maximum Value
 This is the value that the plotter will set when the

Reset axes limits button is pressed.

Curve Visibility It is possible to hide a variable and to show only the

curves which are of interest.

“Plotter” Tab from the Configuration Panel

The “Plotter” tab contains the display options for the plotter and apply therefore to all of
the curves on this plotter.

9-34
 Plotters

Figure 9-31 “Plotter” Tab

Click on the button to open the project standards for plotters.

Name Description
Show Legend Show the legend on the plot area. The legend also
allows the activation or deactivation of any of the
variables on the plotter.
Grid Display Set the colour of the grid.
Annotations Colour Modify the background colour of the annotation bubbles.
Values Colour Set the colour of values displayed on the plot area.
Background Colour The background of the plot area can be personalized by
applying an image.
Maximum Number Limit of the number of points per plot.
of Measurements by
Plot  A tooltip is displayed which shows the simulation
time for the specified limit.

Precision of The number of decimal places can be specified for

Exported measurement data exported from the plotter.
Measurements

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-35

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

9.3.1.1 Configuration of the z(x,y) Plotter in the Properties

It is also possible to configure the plotters at project level. Go to the Project Properties →
“General Standards” → “Plotter, Curve Editor and Oscilloscope”.

 These parameters will be the default parameters for all plotters in the project
unless one of these options is modified in the configuration panel of a given
plotter.

Figure 9-32 Access to Plotters’ Parameters in the Project Properties

Figure 9-33 z(y,x) Plotter Parameters in the Project Properties

9.3.1.2 Plotter Document Properties

9-36
 Plotters

The plotter document properties can be accessed from the contextual menu in the Project
Explorer.

Figure 9-34 Plotter’s Properties from the Project Explorer

Figure 9-35 z(y,x) Plotter Document Properties

The document properties window shows the following fields:

 Comment (read/write)
 Created (read only)
 Document category (read only)
 Name (read/write)
 Saved (read only)

9.3.2 z(x,y) Plotter Toolbar

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-37

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

The plotters have a number of tools available. Some of these tools are common to all
plotters, others depend on the type of plotter.

9.3.2.1 Scale

Figure 9-36 z(x,y) Scale Toolbar

The following tables give a brief description of the toolbar buttons that are common to all
plotters.

Icons Commands Description

Automatic Scale to Resize the plot area to visualize the points of all the
all axes curves.
Automatic Scale to Resize the plot area to visualize the data points for
x axis the x curve.
Automatic Scale to Resize the plot area to visualize the data points for
y axis the y curve.
Automatic Scale to Resize the plot area to visualize the data points for
z axis the z curve.
Reset axes limits Reset the axes limits to the default values or to the
values previously defined with the options « Axis
Initial Maximum Value ». See section “Curve” Tab of
the Configuration Area.

 The scale can also be used using the scroll wheel of the mouse.

9.3.2.2 Adding Annotations

Icon Commands Description

9-38
 Plotters

Icon Commands Description

Add annotation Add annotation on the plot area in order to add
complementary information if needed.
Remove all Remove all the annotations placed on the plot area.
annotations

Annotations

The user can add annotations according to his needs which allow him to personalize the
plotter adding complementary information.

Annotations are inserted onto the plot area with the corresponding tool from the toolbar

or from the contextual menu.

 Inserting annotations can be done while either simulating or editing.

The annotation is inserted at the place pointed by the mouse if done from the contextual

menu and by default at the plot area’s centre, if done from the toolbar.

It can then be moved, resized or rotated according to the user’s needs.

Double-click on the label to edit it.

Select the annotation and click on the Suppr. key to delete it. The annotation is also

deleted from the plotter’s contextual menu or from the toolbar .

The annotation’s colour can be modified with the parameter « Annotations Colour » in the
configuration panel.

 The annotations are considered for the printing and will appear on the printed
document.

 The annotations are ignored while exporting the curve.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-39

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

9.3.2.3 Display

Display

Icon Commands Description

Show/Hide Show or hide the measurement points on the curve.
measurement
points

Show all plots Show all the plots, even those that were previously
invisible.
Display legend The legend can be shown on the plot area to visualize
the variables being plotted and deactivate some of
them, if needed.

3D Display

3D diplay tools are available for the z(x,y) plotter. They are used to modify the
representation perspective of the curves.

Icon Commands
Display Top View

Display Bottom View

Display Left View

Display Right View

Display Front View

Display Back View

 Click and hold the left button of the mouse to manually modify the 3D curve
perspectives.

9-40
 Plotters

 The scroll wheel of the mouse allows the user to minimize and maximize the
zoom on the 3D object and its curves.

9.3.3 Contextual Menu of z(x,y) Plotter

The commands from the contextual menu allow the user to navigate through the
annotations and markers, add new one or delete them.

Figure 9-37 : Menu contextuel du grapheur

Command Description
Add Annotation Add annotation onto the plot area.

 Adding can be done while either editing or simulating.

 The annotation is inserted at the place pointed by the

mouse if done from the contextual menu or at the center of
the plot area if done from the toolbar.

Remove all Remove all annotations from the plot area.

Annotations
Edit x Axis Legend It is possible to rename the x axis.
Edit y Axis Legend It is possible to rename the y axis.
Edit z Axis Legend It is possible to rename the z axis.
Copy Plotter Image Copy the plotter’s image in order to print it.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-41

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Command Description
Export Export measurements to a .txt file.
Measurements
 Only available in Editing mode.

9.3.4 z(x,y) Plotter Appearence Configuration

Curves Colour

The curves colour is defined in the “Curves” Tab from the variables and curves
configurator. The user can choose contrasted colours for a better plots’ visualization. To
do so, select the variable in the variables list, then, in the lower part, select the “Curve
Colour”.

Figure 9-38 Select Curves Colour

9-42
 Plotters
It is also possible to vary the curve colour as a function of the variable measurements.

Figure 9-39 Curve Colour varying as a function of Variable Values

9.3.5 Data Plot in Simulation

9.3.5.1 Adding a variable onto a Plotter

To add a variable in Editing mode:

1. Create a plotter;

2. Select a component in the diagram and drag-and-drop it onto the plot area ;

The dialogue box “Plot Selection” in which the user can select the variables to be plotted
automatically pops up:

Figure 9-40 : Dialogue Box « Plot Selection »

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-43

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

 If the component has no variable to plot, you will get the message “No available
plots for this component”. Click on OK to close it.

The selected variables are displayed in the configuration area in the “Curves” tab. They
appear in the order defined in the “Variables Selection” dialogue box.

Figure 9-41 List of Variables in the Configuration Panel

Each variable has its corresponding curve except if the option “Curve Visibility” is
deactivated in the list .

The plotter assigns automatically the following properties to each curve:

● Scale: Minimum and maximum values of the plot.
● Plot Colour: Colour assigned by default to the variable when selected.
● Plot Unit: Metric or imperial values, depending on the unit system defined upon
installation.
● Time Scale: Time lapse that is visible in the plotter window.

When a variable is configured, the plot is automatically generated in simulation mode.

 Unlimited number of plots can plot at the same time which allows the user to get
an unlimited number of plots out of one simulation.

9.3.5.2 Adding a Measuring Instrument onto a Plotter

9.3.5.3 Plotting the Curve

Variables are simultaneously plotted and simulated at each simulator cycle. Simulation
and plotting occur simultaneously.

9-44
 Plotters

To change the colour associated with a variable: Go to the “Curve” tab in the
configuration panel, select a variable by double-clicking on its name in the “Variable”
column and modify the “Curve Colour” option.

To modify the plot scale of a variable: Click on the corresponding value in the Plotter
Variables’ Properties Window and modify the value. Make sure that the scale’s minimum
value is smaller than the scale’s maximum value.

 You can also launch the automatic scale function by selecting a curve and clicking

on the following commands: .

Preserving Visual Data

Once the simulation is stopped, the graphic data remains on the plotter screen.

 The screen is reset when the simulation is restarted.

9.3.5.4 Selecting Curves

To select curves:

Select multiple variables in the plotter properties window by holding the CTRL key, or by
clicking directly on the curves in the plot area.

Curves corresponding to selected variables are doubled in thickness.

When one or more curves are available without a selected variable, the default scale
displayed is the scale of the first variable in the property window. When a variable is
selected in the property window, its scale automatically appears in the plot area with the
corresponding colour and unit.

 When a curve on the graph is selected, it will select the associated line in the
properties table and vice versa.

9.3.5.5 Saving Textual Data

After variables have been plotted, it is possible to export the plot data as a .txt file. To

© Famic Technologies Inc. 9-45

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

do so, click on the “Export” button from the plotter’s toolbar when the data are
plotted.

 It is possible to select more than one variable at the same time to export the data
of multiple curves. To do so, hold the CTRL key and select all of the desired
variables. This way, it is possible to compare multiple curves when the data is
exported.

The “Save File” dialog box appears and opens in the root directory of the project if the
data has already been saved. If the data has never been saved, the data is stored in the
Automation Studio™ folder. The formatted data can be imported into any spreadsheet
application.

 The decimal number can be determined with the option “Precision of Exported
Measurements” located in the “Plotter” tab from the configuration panel.

9.3.5.6 Deleting a Variable and its Associated Plot

Click on the variable or one of its values to select it (hold the CTRL key and select all the
desired variables) and click on the “Delete” button

Drag and drop the same component onto the “Plotter” surface and uncheck the
corresponding variable.

 When a component is deleted from a diagram, the associated curves in the plotter
are automatically deleted as well.

9-46
10 Custom Component
The custom component is a tool that complements Automation StudioTM main library by
allowing the creation of components with complex behaviours and specific operation
logic that are represented by simple or specific symbols.

This chapter covers the following topics:

● Custom Component Elements
● Custom Component Generation
● Custom Component Functionalities

All the above topics will be detailed and illustrated with an example for a better
understanding.

10.1 Application Example

For a better understanding of the custom component various functionalities, an example
will be used all along this chapter.

This example consists of a voltage reducing transducer that receives as input an analog
voltage signal and produces as output another voltage signal reduced by a certain ratio
(gain) that depends on the internal circuit and an adjustable parameter in simulation. The
“Input – Output” ratio, also called “Gain”, can be shown or hidden via a switch.

This example will be developed step by step in the following sections.

10.2 Custom Component Elements

The custom component is composed of three complementary elements that provide the
final component with all the required flexibility:

These elements are:

● Symbol
● Behaviour
● Logic

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-1

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

10.2.1 Symbol

The custom component’s symbol is a graphic representation that is mainly used to

visually identify and instantaneously provide information on the component’s nature,
operation, state, connections, etc.

 Custom component symbol should only be drawn on a standard or electrotechnical

document.

 It can use different layers of the same document but cannot use several
documents.

The custom component symbol is composed of two main elements:

● Symbol Drawing
● Symbol connection Ports

10.2.1.1 Symbol Drawing

The custom component’s symbol drawing can contain drawing objects (“Home” ribbon 
“Drawing” Group), and technological and HMI components. It can also contain groups and
assemblies. It can only be drawn on only one “standard” or “electrotechnical” document
but can be represented on several layers of this document.

 If the custom component’s symbol drawing contain components with simulated

animations, these components will keep animating if all required conditions are
respected (for example: component’s supply, variables’ links or component
associations, state of components or its variables, etc.).

 It is possible to extract symbol from an existing component. For that, the user may
use the “Extract Symbol” command in the “Custom Component” group. For the
command to be active, only one component, one group or one assembly should
be selected on a standard or electrotechnical diagram. Once the command is
applied on the selection, a drawing assembly of this selection is created and
automatically saved in a custom library called “Symbols”. To be able to use this
assembly, the user can simply drag & drop it from the “Symbols” library onto his

10-2
 Custom Component

diagram.

Example: Voltage Reducing Transducer

Let’s create the symbol’s drawing:

1. Create a new “electrotechnical” project of “NEMA” type;
2. Activate the layer’s manager (“Edit” ribbon  “Editing” group  “Layer Properties”
command) in the project’s diagram and rename the default layer “Symbol”;

Figure 10-1 "Symbol" Layer

 You can make the symbol visible or invisible on the diagram by a simple click on
the “eye” icon.
3. Use the drawing tools (“Home” ribbon  “Drawing” group) to produce the following
figure:

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-3

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 10-2 Symbol - Drawing

4. Insert a HMI switch from the library into the diagram. Delete the default alias in the
dialogue that opens when you insert the switch (“?”) and type “Display_Gain”.
Resize then the component after unlocking its dimensions through its contextual
menu and place it like the following figure:

Figure 10-3 Symbol with HMI switch

10-4
 Custom Component

5. Insert a MMI Numeric Display Box without frame (“HMI and Control Panels” 
“Measuring Instruments”  “MMI Numeric Display Box”) into the diagram like the
following figure:

Figure 10-4 Symbol with several HMI Components

6. Double-click on the numeric display box to open its component’s properties dialogue.
In the “Data” branch, go to “Technical – Characteristics” category, select the “3” value
for the “Number of Decimals” property and close the dialogue.

10.2.1.2 Ports

With the Custom Component tool, the user can insert ports into the custom component
symbol when creating it. These ports are considered to be potential connection ports for
the custom component to be generated. They do not have any connection capability until
they are converted to ports of the final custom component.

With the “Port” command (“Custom Component” group of the “Home” ribbon), the user
can insert a “Port” component into a standard or electrotechnical diagram.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-5

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

 The “Port” components must be located on one (or several) layer(s) used for the
custom component’s symbol. Otherwise they will not be considered in the custom
component.

Once a “Port” component is inserted into the diagram, it is given a default name made of
a number which increments with every new “Port”.

 The name of the “Port” component will be given to the corresponding future
custom component connection port when the user will link it to a free port of the
behaviour’s circuit, see 10.2.2.2 Ports Correspondence.

 It is possible to modify the name of the “Port” component in the “Data” branch of
the component’s Properties dialogue  “Identification” group  “Component
Name” property.

Example: Voltage Reducing Transducer

To continue with the voltage reducing transducer example, proceed as follows:

7. Click on the “Port” command in the “Home” ribbon  “Custom Component” group.
The cursor takes the form of a “Port”.
8. Insert 4 ports into the above drawing like in the following figure. You can also move
the ports names.

10-6
 Custom Component

Figure 10-5 Symbol's "Port" Components

10.2.2 Behaviour

The Custom Component’s behaviour consists of a circuit composed of several components

connected to each other allowing to model the custom component’s operation in
simulation.

Once the custom component is generated, the behaviour circuit cannot be changed by
user anymore but it is simulated. Only the component’s symbol is visible and possibly
animated.

 The custom component circuit must be drawn on one “standard”,

“electrotechnical” or “bloc diagramm” document. It can use different layers of a
single and same document.

 The custom component behaviour circuit has to be drawn in the same project of
the custom component symbol but can be on a different document than the one
used for the symbol.

Example: Voltage Reducing Transducer

After inserting the symbol’s “Port” components, the behaviour can be created with
following steps:

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-7

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

9. Create a new layer in the layers manager (F5 function key) and name it “Behaviour”;

Figure 10-6 "Behaviour" Layer

10. Keep the “Behaviour” layer selected in the layers manager and insert, from the main
library into the diagram, the following components:
Electrotechnical NEMA Measuring Instruments  Voltmeter
Electrotechnical NEMA Basic Passive and Active Components  Resistor
Electrotechnical NEMA Power  Transformers  Transformer with two windings
Electrotechnical NEMA  Measuring Instruments  Voltmeter
Electrotechnical NEMA  Basic Passive and Active Components  Resistor.

Figure 10-7 Behaviour Components

10-8
 Custom Component

11. Double-click on the transformer to open its properties dialogue. In the “Data” branch,
change the value of the “Secondary voltage“ property to “110” V;

Figure 10-8 Transformer's Technical Properties

12. Double-click on the top resistor to open its properties dialogue. In the “Data” branch,
change the “Maximum Resistance” value to “2000” Ohms and close the dialogue.

Figure 10-9 Resistor's Technical Properties

13. Keep the “Behaviour” layer activated in the layers manager and connect the
components to each other like the following figure:

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-9

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 10-10 Custom Component Behaviour’s Circuit

10.2.2.1 Behaviour’s Free Ports

A free port in the behaviour circuit is a port that is not connected to any other port. It is
displayed in red in the diagram.

In the previous figureFigure 10-10), the behaviour circuit has 5 free ports.

 A component’s port connected to another one that became invisible (or located on
an invisible layer) is also considered to be “free” since the port is displayed non-
connected and in red.

10.2.2.2 Ports Correspondence

The user can create the custom component connections on an interface in which he can

10-10
 Custom Component

associate each “Port” component of the symbol (see 10.2.1.2 Ports) to a free port of the
behaviour (see 10.2.2.1 Behaviour’s Free Ports). This interface is accessible via the
“Associated Port” branch in the “Port” component properties dialogue by double-clicking
on a “Port” component.

Figure 10-11 "Associated Port" Branch in the "Port" Component Properties Dialogue

Zone Description
1 Behaviour Diagram Allows to localize the project’s document in which
the behaviour circuit can be found.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-11

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Zone Description
2 Free ports on Allows to show the list of all free ports in the
Diagram diagram specified in the “Behaviour Diagram” list
(1).
The “Free” item allows including the “Port”
component in the final symbol of the custom
component to be generated, without this “Port”
component being associated to a behaviour’s free
port.
If “None” item is selected, the “Port” component
will not be included in the custom component’s
symbol to be generated.
By selecting a free port in the list, the current “Port”
component and the free selected port correspond to
each other. In this case, the current “Port”
component becomes a connexion port of the custom
component to be generated and corresponds exactly
to the free port which becomes invisible after the
creation of the custom component.
3 Legend Colour codes legend reflecting the
selection/connection state of the displayed free
ports.
4 Application Button Allows to apply the modifications made in the
dialogue.

 Each free port in the “Free Ports on diagram” list is displayed with the following
syntax: internal component ID followed by a point, free port name and the
component ID between brackets. Ex.: Electro1.ET20.2 [033].

 In the case of a component’s subcomponent, the internal component’s ID is

followed by a point and the subcomponent’s internal ID.

 It is not possible to select more than one free port in the “Free Ports on Diagram”
list.

10-12
 Custom Component

 It is recommended to rename and display only the behaviour’s free ports in order
to be able to identify them easily for the association.

 The alias, and not the name, is considered in the simulation parameters. In case
the alias is duplicated, it is therefore necessary to rename it.

Example: Voltage Reducing Transducer

To continue with the voltage reducing transducer example and make ports
correspondence, proceed as follows:
14. Double-click on the symbol’s “Port” component number “1” to open its properties
dialogue;
15. In the “Associated Port” branch of the properties dialogue, select the free port that
you wish to connect to the top left wire of the behaviour circuit (see following
figure) and apply via ; Note that the free ports’ names are displayed in small
characters in the behaviour diagram.

Figure 10-12 Correspondence of the First "Port" Component

16. Repeat steps 14 and 15 with the other “Port” components (2, 3 and 4) to make
correspondences like the following figure.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-13

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 10-13 "Port" Components Correspondence

10.2.3 Logic

The Custom component can include a complex logic built with SFC. Whether you have
control sequences, animation conditions or advanced logics, the custom component
wizard gives the possibility to select and include them in the custom component to be
generated.

It is possible to use several SFC documents for the logic.

 The user can create a custom component without “logic”. In this case, it will have
only a symbol and a behaviour circuit.

Example: Voltage Reducing Transducer

Once the ports correspondence is done (see above), you can create a logic to estimate
the component’s gain and its animation. To do this, follow the steps below:
17. Create a new SFC Diagram;

10-14
 Custom Component

18. Open the variable manager (ribbon “Tools”  “Management”  “Variable

Manager”) and click on the “Add variable” command;
19. In the custom variable creation dialogue, select:
● Type: LREAL
● Measure Type: Without Unit
● Localization: the SFC Diagram that you have just created
● Name: Gain
● Alias: Gain

Figure 10-14 "Gain" Custom Variable

 All the custom variables used in the SFC you wish to include in the custom
component to be generated must belong to the SFC document(s) of the logic and
not to the project, which means that, when creating the variable, its location must
be the SFC document that uses this variable.
20. Create a second custom variable with following information:
● Type: LREAL
● Measure Type: Without Unit
● Localization: the SFC Diagram that you have just created
● Name: DisplayAnimation
● Alias: DisplayAnimation

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-15

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 10-15 "DisplayAnimation" Custom Variable

21. Create the following sequence in the SFC diagram (see possibly the SFC User’s Guide)

Figure 10-16 Steps and Transitions of the Logic

22. Open the first step’s properties dialogue and write “DisplayAnimation := 0 ;” in the
“Actions” zone and apply;
23. In the first transition’s properties dialogue, double-click on the line of the variable
whose alias is “Display_Gain” and apply;
24. In the second step’s properties dialogue, do as follows:

10-16
 Custom Component

● Type “DisplayAnimation := 10 ;” in the “Actions” zone.

● Press the “enter” key to move to the next line.
● In the “Variables” zone, double-click on the line of the variable whose alias is
“Gain”.
● Type “:=” at the end of the “Actions” zone’s second line just after the “Gain”
variable.
● In the “Variables” zone, double-click on the line of the variable whose alias is
“RMS Voltage” coming from the second voltmeter (the bottom one in the
diagram).

 In order to be sure to have the correct variable, you can verify the “Location”
column of the “Variables” zone. It shows the internal ID of the component
containing the variable followed by a point and the component ID between
brackets.
● Type “/” at the end of the “Actions” zone’s second line after the variable that
you have just added.
● In the “Variables” zone, double-click on the line of the variable whose alias is
“RMS Voltage” coming from the first voltmeter (the top one in the diagram).
● Apply.

 The gain is defined as the ratio between output and input. In the case of our
example, it is the ration between the output voltage measured by the bottom
voltmeter (transformer’s secondary side) and the input voltage measured by the
top voltmeter (transformer’s primary side).
25. In the second transition’s properties dialogue, type “NOT” in the “Actions” zone, then
double-click on the line of the variable whose alias is “Display-Gain” in the
“Variables” zone, apply and close the dialogue. You get following sequence:

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-17

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 10-17 Logic sequence

26. Return to the electrotechnical diagram of your project;
27. Double-click on the symbol’s MMI numeric display box to open its properties
dialogue;
28. In the “Internal Links” branch, choose the “Gain” variable in the “Compatible

Simulation Variables” zone, click on the link creation’s button ( ) and close the
dialogue;

 You can use the filtering or marking options at the top of the “Compatible
Simulation Variables” zone in order to easily find the variable you are looking for.
29. In the layers manager (“Edit” ribbon  “Editing” group  “Layer Properties”
command), select the “Symbol” layer;
30. Use the drawing tools (“Home” ribbon  “Drawing” group) to draw a frame for the
display box and to insert, the text “GAIN” as a title;

10-18
 Custom Component

Figure 10-18 Display Box with Frame and Title

31. Select the display box, the frame and the title and right-click to open selection’s pop-
up menu;
32. Click on the “Assemble” command and delete the new assembly ID which is
automatically displayed on the diagram;
33. Double-click on the assembly to open its properties dialogue;
34. In the “Visibility” branch, proceed as follows:
● Check the “Visibility Animation” box in the “Visibility properties” zone.
● In the “Threshold 1” field, seize “5”.
● In the “threshold 1”’s top list, select “invisible”.
● In the “Threshold 1”’s bottom list, select “visible”.
● In “Compatible simulation variables” zone, choose the “DisplayAnimation”
variable and create an association on it ( ).
● Apply and then, close.

At this stage, the three elements of the custom component have been created; the
custom component can now be generated.

10.3 Custom Component Generating Wizard

The custom component generation and the configuration of its properties, variables and
options are made through a wizard composed of a sequence of dialogues. This wizard is
launched with the “Custom Component” command from the “Custom Component” group
in the “home” tab.

Example: Voltage Reducing Transducer

To continue our exercise and launch the custom component generating wizard, do the
following step:
35. Click on the “Home” tab  “Custom Component” group  “Custom Component”

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-19

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

command;
This command starts the wizard that first opens the symbol selection dialogue.

10.3.1 “Symbol Selection” Dialogue

The “symbol selection” dialogue allows selecting the document containing the custom
component symbol or some of this document’s layers.

Figure 10-19 "Symbol Selection" Dialogue

Zone Description
1 Project Name Current project’s name (when launching the wizard).
2 Document(s) Name of the standard and electrotechnical documents
Name of the current project.
3 Layer(s) Name Layers name of each (standard or electrotechnical)
document of the current project.
4 Checkboxes Allow to select the document(s) or the layer(s) of the
document representing the symbol.

It is not possible to select several documents, or layers

of different documents.

10-20
 Custom Component

See also 3 Common Commands of the Dialogues.

 The “next” button will only be activated if the user makes a selection for the
symbol. This means that the creation of a custom component without symbol is
not allowed.

Example: Voltage Reducing Transducer

To continue our exercise, do the following step:

36. Check the “Symbol” layer box and click on “Next >”;

10.3.2 “Behaviour Selection” Dialogue

This dialogue is used to select the document containing the custom component
behaviour or some layers of this document.

Figure 10-20 "Behaviour Selection" Dialogue

Zone Description
1 Project Name Current project’s name.
2 Document(s) Name Compatible documents’ name in the current
project.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-21

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Zone Description
3 Layer(s) name Name of the layers of each document of the
current project, except the layers already
selected for the symbol (see 10.3.1 “Symbol
Selection” ).
4 Checkboxes Allow to select the document(s) or the layer(s)
of the document representing symbol.

 It is not possible to select several

documents, or layers of different
documents.

 It is possible NOT to select any behaviour (click on the “Next >” button and keep
all boxes unchecked) which is not allowed with the symbol. In this case, the
component will not have any technological behaviour; it will only have a symbol
and logic.

Example: Voltage Reducing Transducer

To continue our exercise, do the following step:

37. Check the “Behaviour” layer box and click on “Next >”;

10.3.3 “Logic Selection” Dialogue

This dialogue is used to select the SFC documents containing the logic of the custom
component to be generated.

 It is possible not to select any logic (click on button “Next>” and keep all
checkboxes unselected), which is not allowed with the symbol. In this case, the
component will have a symbol and a behaviour but no control logic.

10-22
 Custom Component

Figure 10-21 "Logic Selection" Dialogue

Zone Description
1 Project Name Current project’s name.
2 Document(s) Name of all SFC documents in the current project.
Name
3 Checkboxes Allow to select the SFC document(s) that represent the
logic.
It is possible to select several SFC documents.

Example: Voltage Reducing Transducer

To continue with our exercise, do the following step:

38. Check the SFC document box and click on the “Next>” button;

10.3.4 “Variables Configuration” Dialogue

This dialogue is used to select the variables of different elements that should be visible
in the custom component to be generated.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-23

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 10-22 "Variables Configuration" Dialogue

Zone Description
1 “Hidden Variables” Zone showing the simulation variables and the
variables belonging to the documents of the
different elements.
2 Filtering Criterion Allows selecting a criterion between the
available columns of the variables list in the
“Hidden Variables” zone.
3 Text Field Allows to seize a text as a filter.
4 Hidden Variables List Shows the list of simulation variables and
variables belonging to the documents of the
custom component’s different elements.

10-24
 Custom Component

Zone Description
5 “Visible Variables” Field Zone showing the variables that have been
made visible by the user. These variables will
appear in the “Variable Assignment” branch of
the custom component properties dialogue or in
the variable manager of the project in which the
custom component will be used. See 10.4.2
“Variable Assignment” Branch.
6 Filtering Criteria Allows selecting a criterion between the
available columns of the variables list in the
“Visible Variables” zone.
7 Text Field Allows to seize a text as a filter.
8 Visible Variables List Shows the list of variables made visible by the
user.
9 “Add” Button Allows to transfer the selected variables from
the “Hidden Variables” list to the “Visible
Variables” list.
10 “Delete” Button Allows to transfer the selected variables from
the “Visible Variables” list to the “Hidden
Variables” list.

 A hidden variable made visible by the user will only appear in the “Variable
Assignment” branch of the custom component properties dialogue if it meets one
of the following conditions:
● The variable appears in the “Variable Assignment” branch in the properties
dialogue of a component that is used in the custom component;
● The variable is created by the user (custom variable) and belongs to the
document used for one of the following elements: symbol, behaviour or logic.

 In order to distinguish components’ variables from each other, especially the ones
having the same alias, it is recommended to modify the variable alias or edit the
variable’s “description” attribute in the “Data” branch of its component properties
dialogue. A new alias or a description will then appear in the wizard dialogues
where the variable appears.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-25

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide
Example: Voltage Reducing Transducer

To continue with our exercise, do the following steps:

39. Select the variables with alias “Display_Gain” and “Gain” (whose location is “.SFC1”)
and the two “RMS Voltage” variables;
40. Click on the “Add” button;
41. Click on the “Next” button;

10.3.5 “Simulation Setting Configuration” Dialogue

This dialogue is used to select the simulation setting variables that should be visible in
the custom component to be generated.

Figure 10-23 "Simulation Setting Configuration" Dialogue

10-26
 Custom Component

Zone Description
1 “Available Zone showing the available variables that can be set
Simulation Setting in simulation.
Variables”
2 Filtering Criterion Allows selecting a criterion between the available
columns of the variables list in the “Available
Simulation Setting Variables” zone.
3 Text Field Allows to seize a text as a filter.
4 Available Setting Shows the list of available setting variables.
Variables’ list
5 “Selected Simulation Zone showing the variables that can be set in
Settings Variables“ simulation and made visible by the user.
zone The variables setting dialogue appears in simulation
when the user clicks on a free zone of the custom
component. A free zone is a zone of the custom
component’s symbol where there are no components
with setting variables that can be configured in
simulation. See 10.5 Custom Component Simulation
6 Filtering Criteria Allows selecting a criterion between the available
columns of the variables list in the “Selected
Simulation Setting Variables” zone.
7 Text Field Allows to seize a text as a filter.
8 Visible Variables List Shows the list of the variables selected by the user.
9 “Add” Button Allows to transfer the selected variables from the
“Available Simulation Setting Variables” list to the
“Selected Simulation Settings Variables” list.
10 “Delete” Button Allows to transfer the selected variables from the
“Selected Simulation Settings Variables” list to the
“Available Simulation Setting Variables” list.

 A right click on the variable line in the “Available Simulation Setting Variables” or
“Selected Simulation Settings Variables” zone opens the “Follow the link”
command that allows to localize in the schematic the component containing the

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-27

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

variable. Applying this command automatically zooms on the component in red in

the screen center.

 More than 9 setting variables in the “Selected Simulation Settings Variables” zone
are not allowed.

Example: Voltage Reducing Transducer

To continue with our exercise, do the following steps:

42. Select the “Resistance” variable of the “Resistance” component on the transformer’s
primary side (Resistor on the top of Figure 10-10 Custom Component Behaviour’s
Circuit);
43. Click on the “Add” button;
44. Click on the “Next >” button;

10.3.6 “Options Configuration” Dialogue

This dialogue is used to name the custom component to be generated and specify its
technology (hydraulic, pneumatic, electrotechnical IEC or electrotechnical NEMA).

10-28
 Custom Component

Figure 10-24 "Options Configuration" Dialogue

Zone Description
1 “Component Name” Field Allows to give a name for the custom
component to be generated.
2 “Component Standard” Allows to select the standard of the custom
Scrolling List component to be generated.
The content depends on the behaviour’s
technology. If the behaviour’s document is of a
“standard” type, you will have to choose in the
list between “hydraulic” and “pneumatic”. If the
behaviour’s document is of an “electrotechnical”
type, you will have to choose between
“Electrotechnical IEC” and “Electrotechnical
NEMA”.

Example: Voltage Reducing Transducer

To continue with our exercise, do following step:

45. In the “Component Name” field, edit “Voltage Reducing Transducer” as a name;

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-29

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

46. Select “Electrotechnical NEMA” in the “Component Standard” list;

47. Click on the “Finish” button;
Custom component generation is now completed. A last dialogue pops up to confirm
component’s creation.

10.3.7 Confirmation Dialogue for Custom Component Creation

This is the wizard’s last dialogue for the custom component creation. It also informs the
user about the possibility to create a customized help to the component (see 10.4
Custom Component Properties )

Figure 10-25 Confirmation Dialogue for Custom Component Creation

Once the component is generated, it is saved in a custom library called “Custom

Components”. If this library does not exist, it will be created automatically. Otherwise, it
will open automatically and the component that has just been created is saved in the
“New” category last location of this library.

 The “Custom Component” library has the same characteristics and functionalities
of any other custom library.

10-30
 Custom Component

Figure 10-26 "Custom Component" library

 It is recommended to always keep the source project that contains the custom
component’s different elements because the generated custom component and its
subcomponent cannot be modified afterwards.

10.4 Custom Component Properties Dialogue

The custom component properties dialogue contains 4 branches:
● “Data” Branch
● “Variable Assignment” Branch
● “Accessories” Branch
● “Troubleshooting” Branch

10.4.1 “Data” Branch

The “Data” Branch is similar to that of any other standard component but it contains by
default the following categories:

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-31

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

 “Information” category: it contains different information on the custom component,

among others, the name of the source project containing the different elements and
the name of the elements’ documents.
 “Description” category: it contains by default the “Help” property that allows editing
a customized help on the component. This content will appear when the user uses
the command to open the component’s help.

Figure 10-27 "Data" Branch of the Custom Component Properties Dialogue

Example: Voltage Reducing Transducer

To continue with our exercise, do the following steps:

48. Create a new “Electrotechnical NEMA” project;
49. Insert the custom component that you have generated into the diagram;
50. Open the component properties dialogue and click on the “Data” branch;
51. In the “User-defined” category of the “Help” property, edit a text describing the
component operation (for ex.: The voltage reducing transducer receives a voltage
signal as input and produces as output another voltage signal reduced by a
certain ratio (gain) that depends on an internal circuit and an adjustable
parameter in simulation.);
52. Close the component properties dialogue;
53. Right-click on the custom component on the diagram and select the “Context Help”
command;

10-32
 Custom Component

Figure 10-28 Custom Component's Help

Note that the component’s context help displays exactly the text previously entered in
the “Help” property of the custom component properties’ dialogue.

10.4.2 “Variable Assignment” Branch

The “Variable Assignment” branch is identical to that of any other standard component.
The “Component Variables” zone displays the variables made visible by the user in the
variables configuration dialogue (see 10.3.4 “Variables Configuration” ) only if those
meet one of the following conditions:
● Variable appeared in the “Variable Assignment” branch in the properties dialogue
of a component that is used in the custom component.
● Variable created by the user (custom variable) and belongs to the document of
one of the following elements: symbol, behaviour or logic.

 Any other variable that the user chose to be visible and that does not meet one of
these conditions will be displayed in the “Variables Manager” of the project into
which the custom component is inserted but NOT in the custom component’s
“Variables Assignment” branch.

Example: Voltage Reducing Transducer

To continue with our exercise, do the following step:

54. Click on the “Variable Assignment” branch of the custom component already inserted
into the diagram;

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-33

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Note that the “Component Variables” zone contains both variables “Display_Gain” and
“Gain”. The “Display_Gain” variable is the assignment variable of the symbol’s HMI
switch and the “Gain” variable is a user-defined variable created on the logic’s SFC
document level.

Figure 10-29 "Assignment Variable" Branch in Custom Component Properties Dialogue

10.4.3 “Accessories” Branch

This branch is identical to that of any standard component. See 6.2.2 “Accessories”
Branch.

10.4.4 “Troubleshooting” Branch

This branch is identical to that of any standard components. See 2.2.14 Failure Builder.

10.5 Custom Component Simulation

The custom component simulation is identical to that of any other standard component.
The custom component symbol is visible and animated according to the component’s
behaviour and logic. Those are simulated but invisible.

If during simulation you click on a component of the symbol that has variables adjustable
in simulation, these variables’ setting dialogue will pop up. But if you click on any other

10-34
 Custom Component

part of the symbol, the custom component’s setting configuration dialogue will pop up.
See 10.3.5 “Simulation Setting Configuration”.

Example: Voltage Reducing Transducer

55. Close the properties dialogue and complete the circuit like in the following figure:

Figure 10-30 Custom Component Circuit

56. Make sure to set “220V” as the “AC Source” “Nominal Voltage”;
57. Start simulation;
When the simulation is launched, the component “Gain” display box is not visible.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-35

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 10-31 Custom Component Simulation - Case 1

58. Click on the symbol’s HMI button. The display box is now visible and shows the
component’s gain;

Figure 10-32 Custom Component Simulation - Case 2

59. Click on the custom component symbol but not on the HMI switch;

The setting dialogue of the resistance on the transformer’s primary side pops up.

10-36
 Custom Component

Figure 10-33 Setting of Adjustable Variables in Simulation

 This property has been made visible in the setting configuration dialogue. The
whole component symbol is considered to be a free zone which allows displaying
this dialogue by clicking on it in simulation, except the HMI switch part because it
has its own setting parameter.
60. Modify the resistance value. The component’s gain is modified accordingly.

Figure 10-34 Custom Component Simulation - Case 3

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-37

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

10.6 Additional application example: Hydraulic pump by

block diagram
It is possible to use as source behaviour a block diagram, thus allowing to build, and then
use in a real application, a custom model of a technical component. The benefit is the
ability to achieve the desired behaviour in a block diagram when there is no equivalent
behaviour that can be obtained by assembly of generic components.

In this example, the component to generate is a hydraulic pump of which the model is
built in a block diagram, simplified for the purpose of example. The required block
diagram can be completed beforehand from the use case exercise of the Block Diagram
workshop guide:

Figure 10-35 : Block diagram of the source behaviour of the hydraulic pump

This model has for inputs the displacement and the driving radial speed of the pump and
calculates the output in function of the volumetric efficiency curve and the pressure
measured on the hydraulic diagram. The model includes the reservoir at the pump
suction port. At this point what remains is to create the pump’s symbol, associate the

10-38
 Custom Component

free port of the block diagram’s hydraulic adapter component with the hydraulic port on
the symbol, and generate the custom component.

Block diagram of the source behaviour

1. In a new project, complete the block diagram of the hydraulic as detailed in the
block diagram workshop guide;
2. Add a Standard Diagram to the project;

Symbol of the custom component

We now need to create the symbol that the pump will have from CAD objects. The user is
free to create the symbol he desires. Here, we will simply reuse the symbol of the pump
from the main library:
3. Insert a hydraulic pump and a hydrostatic reservoir from the main library on the
diagram and link them as show :

4. Group the 2 components (CTRL + G);

5. Select the grouped pump and reservoir and click on the “Extract Symbol”
command from “Home” tab  “Custom Component” group;

The symbol is extracted and stored in a new temporary symbol library:

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-39

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 10-36 : Extracted symbol in library

6. Delete the pump and reservoir components from the diagram and insert the
extracted symbol;

This CAD object is now the symbol that will be used for the custom component.

Connection port of the custom component

7. Activate the « Port » command from “Home” tab  “Custom Component” group
and place the port at the suitable position on the pump symbol:

10-40
 Custom Component

Figure 10-37 : Port positioned on the symbol

8. To associate this port with the free port of the hydraulic adapter component of
the block diagram, first open its properties and note its “Internal ID” property
(for example B1):

9. In the standard diagram, open the properties of the Port that needs to be
associated, on the “Associated Port” branch;
10. Select the block diagram as « Behaviour Diagram ». In the list of available free

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-41

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

ports of the block diagram, select port 3 of the Hydraulic Adapter component,
which will be listed as DiagramName.ComponentInternalID.PortNumber, for
example Block_Diagram1.B1.3 :

Figure 10-38 : Selection of the associated port on the source behaviour

The port is now associated. This will ensure, in the final component, that the pressure
measured in the circuit be transmitted to the block diagram calculation, and that the flow
calculated be outputted by the port in the hydraulic circuit:

10-42
 Custom Component

Figure 10-39 : Link of the hydraulic port between the symbol and the block diagram

Generation of the custom component

11. Now the custom component needs to be generated. First, make sure that the
pump symbol and the ports on the standard diagram be the only object on a
dedicated layer. Similarly, the block diagram of the source behaviour must be on
an exclusive layer :

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-43

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 10-40 : Source behaviour and target symbol on dedicated layers

12. Open the properties of the 2 cursor components on the block diagram and give a
representative alias to the output value, to identify them more easily in the next
steps;
13. Give the focus to the standard diagram and launch the generation of the custom
component from “Home” tab  “Custom Component” group  “Custom
Component”;

14. Select the layer of the symbol on the standard diagram and click “Next”;

10-44
 Custom Component

Figure 10-41 : Selection of the symbol

15. Select the layer of the source behaviour on the block diagram and click “Next”;

Figure 10-42 : Selection of the behaviour

16. As the component does not have a logic, click on “Next”;

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-45

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 10-43 : Selection of the logic

17. To make available the displacement and radial speed variables in the generated
component, select them by finding them by their alias, click “Add” then “Next”;

Figure 10-44 : Adding variables to be available in the custom component

18. To make these 2 variables available to modify in simulation, select them by
finding them by their alias, click “Add” then “Next”;

10-46
 Custom Component

Figure 10-45 : Adding variables to be simulation settings in the custom component

19. Give a name to the component and select the Hydraulic technology, then click
“Finish” to complete the generation of the component;

Figure 10-46 : Completion of the custom component

20. The custom component is created and stored in a new library. Validate the
messages dialog if no error is indicated;

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-47

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 10-47 : Custom component stored in a new library

21. The custom pump component is now ready to be used. To test it, create in a new
project a basic hydraulic circuit in which the pump is missing, then insert the
pump:

10-48
 Custom Component

Figure 10-48 : Use examples of the custom pump component

Notice that the displacement and the radial speed can be set during simulation, similarly
to the pump from the main library, because these variables from the source behaviour
were made available. The flow is adjusted according to these settings just like with
generic components. We can also see the effect of the volumetric efficiency on the
output flow.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-49

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 10-49 : Simulation settings of the custom component

 It is possible to monitor the value of intermediate calculation taking place within

the source behaviour from the created custom component. To do this, add
measuring instruments in the source behaviour beforehand, in present case “Value
Display” components in the block diagram. For instance, we can add these
components at the suitable places to read the progress of these values: theoretical
and actual flow, volumetric efficiency and pump pressure. By giving representative
alias to their variables, they can be added to the custom component during its
creation. Then, when the custom component is inserted on the diagram, simply
find these variables in the Variable Manager and directly drag and drop them in a
y(t) Plotter:

10-50
 Custom Component

Figure 10-50 : Adding components to monitor values on the source behaviour block diagram

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-51

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 10-51 : Adding the measurement variables to the custom component

10-52
 Custom Component

Figure 10-52 : Adding the measurement variables to a plotter from the Variable Manager

 A logic can also be added to this custom component to manage an animation of its
symbol. Or also if the animation can be simply controlled by a variable link with
the source behaviour, this link is kept in the custom component, thus retaining the
animation, without a need for a logic.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 10-53

11 I/O Interface Card
The I/O interface card was designed to complement Automation Studio™ simulation
modules.

This section presents all the information needed to use the card. It explains how to create
and simulate a project, and illustrates these explanations with a practical example of an
application.

To install and configure the card, please refer to the specific documentation provided.

The I/O interface card is part of the Interface family in the Automation Studio ™ library.
The installation of the card is not included in the basic installation of Automation Studio™;
it must be completed separately. The procedure is described in the following section.

The I/O interface card facilitates interaction between the simulation modules of
Automation Studio™ and PLCs (programmable logic controllers). With the included relay
interface, users can also control circuits that are simulated on screen, and connect
simulation circuits to actual field devices such as solenoid valves, push buttons, etc., or
on sensors of an existing circuit or training panel.

Figure 11-1: Interaction between the Software and a PLC

The chapter is presented in chronological order to clearly map the steps to simulate a
circuit interacting with a peripheral device.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 11-1

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Remember that this guide does not cover the theoretical notions concerning peripheral
devices. It was written assuming that users are already familiar with communication
notions as well as input/output interfaces with peripheral devices.

This chapter presents the following information:

● Using the I/O interface card with Automation Studio ™.
● An example of a circuit interacting with the interface card.

11.1 Using the I/O Interface Card

This section presents the information needed to use the interface card with Automation
Studio™.

The information is presented in the following order:

● Inserting the I/O interface card in a diagram.
● Defining I/O interface card component properties.

To insert an I/O interface card in a diagram:

1. In the Library Explorer, click on the “Interface” workshop and insert the “USB I/O
Interface Module” component.

11-2
 I/O Interface Card

Figure 11-2: Interface Workshop Library

To access the configuration properties of the card, open the component properties
window, in the “Data” branch, add the configuration in the “Technical Characteristic”
category. In the “Identification” category, keep the default card name.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 11-3

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 11-3: Example of the I/O Interface Card Symbol

To access the variable assignment properties of the I/O interface card, click on the
“Variable Assignment” branch of the properties tree (see section 6.2.4 “Variable
Assignment” Branch).

11.2 Practical Example Using the I/O Interface Card

This section presents a practical example of an I/O card connected to a PLC.

The following tasks are to be performed:

● Building the circuit.
● Defining the circuit sequence.
● Defining the ladder diagram.
● Assigning input and output variables to the electrical circuit components.
● Simulating the circuit and communicating with the PLC via the I/O interface card.

11.2.1 Building the Circuit

The following figure presents the simulated PLC controlled electro-pneumatic circuit to be
built. The PLC outputs are connected to the I/O interface card inputs and the card outputs
to the PLC inputs.

11-4
 I/O Interface Card

Figure 11-4: Example of an Electro-Pneumatic Circuit

The circuit is composed of two cylinders (A1 and A2), each controlled by a double
solenoid 5/2 valve. Proximity sensors are used to detect the in and out positions of the
cylinders. A pushbutton is used to start the sequence.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 11-5

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

11.2.2 Defining the Sequence

This is the functioning sequence of the circuit. It is first described, and then represented
with the help of a SFC. This sequence must be programmed into the PLC. In addition, we
will translate this sequence into a ladder diagram to program the PLC.

Step 1 On step 1, by activating the A1- and A2- solenoids, both cylinders rods are
retracted.

Step 2 As soon as the START button is clicked and that both cylinders are
retracted, (A1_0 and A2_0 proximity sensors) the sequence is started. At
this moment, transition 1 is cleared and step 2 is activated. Once step 2 is
activated, solenoid A1+ is energized, therefore extracting the A1 cylinder
rod. Once the rod is fully extended, the A1_1 proximity sensor is activated.

Step 3 Transition 2 is then cleared and step 3 is activated. With step 3 activated,
the A2+ solenoid is energized; this extracts the rod of cylinder A2. Once the
rod is fully extended, the A2_1 proximity sensor is activated.

Step 4 Transition 3 is then cleared and step 4 is activated. The A2- solenoid is
engaged and the A2 cylinder rod is retracted. Once the rod is completely
retracted, proximity sensor A2_0 is activated.

Step 5 Transition 4 is cleared and step 5 activated. Solenoid A1- is activated and
the A1 cylinder rod is retracted. Once the rod is completely retracted,
proximity sensor A1_0 is activated. This clears transition 5 and returns to
the first step. The simulation is now ready for another cycle.

The following figure presents the sequence in SFC format.

11-6
 I/O Interface Card

Figure 11-5: Sequence SFC

11.2.3 Sequence Ladder Logic Diagram

The following figure presents the circuit sequence ladder logic diagram. The following
tables present the corresponding tag names for the inputs and outputs of the interface
card and of the corresponding components.

© Famic Technologies Inc. 11-7

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Figure 11-6: Ladder Logic Diagram of the Sequence

Reproduce this diagram with the use of PLC software. Once the PLC is programmed, the
sequence can be tested by starting the simulation.

When applying the program for a specific PLC, make sure that the correct I/O addresses
are used. In the following example, the addresses must correspond to the wiring
between the I/O interface card and the PLC.

11-8
 I/O Interface Card

For example, a command schematic for an Allen-Bradley PLC could have the following
corresponding addresses:

PLC Tag Allen- Connection to PLC Tag Allen- Connection to

name Bradley the I/O name Bradley the I/O
Address interface card Address interface card

DEPART I:1/0 OUT0 Y2 B3 :0/1 N/A

A1_0 I:1/1 OUT1 Y3 B3 :0/2 N/A

A1_1 I:1/2 OUT2 Y4 B3 :0/3 N/A

A2_0 I:1/3 OUT3 Y5 B3 :0/4 N/A

A2_1 I:1/4 OUT4 X1 B3 :1/0 N/A

A1+ O:2/0 IN0 X2 B3 :1/1 N/A

A1- O:2/1 IN1 X3 B3 :1/2 N/A

A2+ O:2/2 IN2 X4 B3 :1/3 N/A

A2- O:2/3 IN3 X5 B3 :1/4 N/A

Y1 B3 :0/0 N/A

A command schematic for a Modicon PLC could have the following corresponding
addresses:

PLC Tag Modicon Connection to PLC Tag Modicon Connection to

name Address the I/O name Address the I/O
interface card interface card

DEPART 10001 OUT0 Y2 01101 N/A

© Famic Technologies Inc. 11-9

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

PLC Tag Modicon Connection to PLC Tag Modicon Connection to

name Address the I/O name Address the I/O
interface card interface card

A1_0 10002 OUT1 Y3 01102 N/A

A1_1 10003 OUT2 Y4 01103 N/A

A2_0 10004 OUT3 Y5 01104 N/A

A2_1 10005 OUT4 X1 01200 N/A

A1+ 00001 IN0 X2 01201 N/A

A1- 00002 IN1 X3 01202 N/A

A2+ 00003 IN2 X4 01203 N/A

A2- 00004 IN3 X5 01204 N/A

Y1 01100 N/A

11.2.4 Assigning I/O Variables to Electrical Circuit Components

In order to establish a connection between the circuit components and the interface card,
the I/O variables must now be assigned. To access the variables assignment properties of
the component, select the “Variables Assignment” branch of the properties tree in the
Component Properties dialogue box.

The following is the correspondence table between the electrical components of the
circuit and the I/O interface card.

11-10
 I/O Interface Card

Read-only output tag names Component type Tag name

for circuit components

LOIC1.OUT0 NO Pushbutton 1-1PBNO1.DEPART

LOIC1.OUT1 Proximity sensor 1-1S1.A1_0

LOIC1.OUT2 Proximity sensor 1-1S2.A1_1

LOIC1.OUT3 Proximity sensor 1-1S3.A2_0

LOIC1.OUT4 Proximity sensor 1-1S4.A2_1

The default input tag names must be modified according to the following table, before
linking them to the valve solenoids:

Read-only components linked to I/O Input Tag name

card inputs

Solenoid SOL1 of valve 1-1V1 LOIC1.IN0 A1+

Solenoid SOL2 of valve 1-1V1 LOIC1.IN1 A1-

Solenoid SOL1 of valve 1-1V2 LOIC1.IN2 A2+

Solenoid SOL2 of valve 1-1V2 LOIC1.IN3 A2-

11.3 Simulating the Circuit Connected to a PLC

The use of the I/O interface card is used to establish a link between simulated
components and real devices. Validate a circuit by connecting it to real components or
validate a PLC program by connecting it to a circuit in Automation Studio ™.

When a circuit is simulated, the output signals emitted by the simulated circuit are
transmitted via the I/O interface card to the external components with which it is
associated. All components that have tag names mapped to an output in the I/O

© Famic Technologies Inc. 11-11

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Interface Card dialogue box transmit a signal to a peripheral device when they are
activated. In the same manner, all components that have a tag name mapped to an input
in the I/O Interface Card dialogue box are activated by a signal emitted from the
peripheral device.

To avoid the transmission of erroneous signals to a peripheral device, it is recommended

that the circuit is first tested in Automation Studio ™ without establishing the
communication with the I/O interface card. To remove the connection between the card
and the software, deselect the “Activation” option in the properties dialogue box.

To simulate the circuit:

1. Select the Activation option in the properties dialogue box.

2. Start the simulation.

The Simulation mode is active.

3. Activate the pushbutton that starts the circuit simulation by clicking on it. (1-
1PBNO1.START).

In the I/O interface card component symbol in the diagram, the input and output
cells change colour as they transmit or receive signals. The input cells only change
colour if they are associated with a peripheral device.

4. Exit the Simulation mode and return to the Edit mode.

The simulation stops.

The Status bar indicates that the application is now in the Edit mode.

11-12
A Shortcuts

Simplify or speed up various operations by using key combinations or key/mouse

combinations. This appendix describes all of the default key combinations that are
available in Automation Studio™.

It is also possible to define combinations, or modify them by default: refer to section

2.1.5.1 Customizing Keyboard Shortcuts.

Appendix A is divided into three sections:

● Keyboard shortcuts
● Navigation keys
● Mouse shortcuts.

A.1. Keyboard Shortcuts

Shortcut keys are used to quickly access the most frequently used commands. They are
generally associated with commands that are common to all the utilities.

Project

Shortcut Command

CTRL + N New Project

CTRL + O Open Project

CTRL + S Save Project

CTRL + P Print

ALT + F4 Exit

Famic Technologies Inc. A-1

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide
Diagram Editor

Shortcut Command

CTRL + Z Undo

CTRL + Y Redo

ALT + ENTER Properties

CTRL + X Cut

CTRL + C Copy

CTRL + V Paste

CTRL + D Duplicate

DEL Delete

CTRL + A Select all

CTRL + F Component Search by circuit

F2 To edit the text on a component

Zooms

Shortcut Command

CTRL+ + Zoom +

CTRL + - Zoom -

Layout

Shortcut Command

CTRL + H Rotate right

CTRL + R Vertical flip

A-2
 Glossary

Shortcut Command

CTRL + T Horizontal flip

CTRL + PAGE UP Bring to front

CTRL +PAGE DOWN Send to back

SHIFT + PAGE UP Bring forward

SHIFT + PAGE DOWN Send backward

CTRL + G Group

CTRL + U Ungroup

CTRL + J Convert link to jump

CTRL + L Direct link

Simulation

Shortcut Command

CTRL + F1 Normal simulation

CTRL + F2 Stop simulation

CTRL + F3 Step by step simulation

CTRL + F4 Slow motion simulation

CTRL + F5 Pause simulation

CTRL + S Simulation with initial parameters

“Tools”  “Video Recording”

Shortcut Command

CTRL + F7 Normal recording

CTRL + F8 Pause record

© Famic Technologies Inc. A-3

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Shortcut Command

CTRL + F9 Stop record

Window Display

Shortcut Command

F4 Photo window

F5 Layers window

F6 Catalogue Manager

F7 Message window

F8 Project Explorer

F9 Library Explorer

F10 Plotter

SHIFT + F10 Electrotechnical Plotter

F11 Status bar

F12 Variable Manager

Menu “Home”  “Drawing”

Shortcut Command

CTRL + 1 Pointer

CTRL + 2 Text

CTRL + 6 Line

CTRL + 7 Arc

CTRL + 8 Rectangle

CTRL + 9 Ellipse

A-4
 Glossary

Shortcut Command

CTRL + F9 Field

Help Menu

Shortcut Command

F1 Contextual help

A.2. Navigation Keys

Navigation keys are used to easily navigate the screen or through various windows, or to
move items.

Navigation Keys within the Explorers

Shortcut Movement


Go up one line


Go down one line

PAGE UP or HOME
Go to the top of the tree

PAGE DOWN or END

Go to the bottom of the tree.

Navigation Keys in the Drawing Editor on a Selected Component

Shortcut Movement


Moves the component one grid step to the right.


Moves the component one grid step to the left.

© Famic Technologies Inc. A-5

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Shortcut Movement


Moves the component one grid step up.


Moves the component one grid step down.

CTRL + 
Moves the screen view to the right.

CTRL + 
Moves the screen view to the left.

CTRL + 
Moves the screen view up.

CTRL + 
Moves the screen view down.


Moves the screen view to the upper left corner.

END
Moves the screen view to the lower right corner.

CTRL + 
Moves the screen view upper right corner.

CTRL + END
Moves the screen view lower left corner.

A.3. Mouse Shortcuts

Project Explorer

Action On Effect

Left-click
a diagram Selects the diagram

Double left-click
a diagram Opens a diagram window

A-6
 Glossary
Drawing Editor

Action On Effect

Left-click
a component in the Selects the component.
workspace

Double left-click
a component in the Opens the component
workspace properties window.

CTRL + left-click
a selected component Duplicates the component.

CTRL + left-click
a rotation handle Applies an orthogonal
rotation to the component.

CTRL + left-click
a resizing handle Applies a disproportional
resizing to the component.

CTRL + left-click
a rectangle Draws a perfect square.

CTRL + left-click
an ellipse Draws a perfect circle.

CTRL + left-click
an arc Draws a perfect arc of
circle.

SHIFT+ left-click
a non-selected component Adds the component to the
or in the workspace selection.

SHIFT + left-click
a selected component Removes the component
from the selection.

SHIFT+ left-click
a component in order to Moves the component and
move it severs the links.

Right-click
a component Displays the component
contextual menu.

© Famic Technologies Inc. A-7

Automation Studio™- User’s Guide

Action On Effect

Right-click
workspace Displays the diagram
contextual menu.

CTRL + scroll wheel

workspace Increases or decreases the
zoom percentage.

SHIFT + scroll wheel

workspace Moves the page
horizontally.

SPACE BAR + left-click

workspace Page displacement.

ALT +
workspace Go to the previous
hyperlink.

ALT +
workspace Go to the next hyperlink.

Plotter

Action On Effect

Scroll wheel
Plot area Vertical scaling

CTRL + scroll wheel

Plot area Horizontal scaling

A-8
B Glossary
Active Workshop

Installed workshop in which components are displayed.

Alphanumeric

Consisting of both letters and numbers and often other symbols such as punctuation
marks and mathematical symbols. The main characters are the 26 letters of the alphabet
and 10 numbers.

Assembly

A group considered as a single component in reports. To view this feature, check the
Assembly checkbox in the group properties dialogue box.

Automation Studio™ Menu

Menu regrouping project management commands. It is also used to access the software
configuration dialogue box.

Automatism

Device, system, or equipment to execute specific operations without the intervention of

an operator.

Component

The basic elements used for creating diagrams. “Technical Data” are used to assess the
component’s behaviour during simulation, and catalogue properties are used to generate
reports. Components are included in libraries provided with each workshop.

Connection

A connection binds two components and/or links them together. The connections’ colour
is the same as the elements they are linked to, and is specific when not connected to
any element. Two connections from non-compatible technologies cannot be connected
together. For example, a pneumatic line cannot be connected to a SFC component and

© Famic Technologies Inc. B-1

Automation Studio™ – User’s Guide

vice-versa.

Connection Number

A number designated for each point where components are connected.

Connector

Element represented by a red circle when not linked. It allows the connection of two
components. A connector becomes a connection as soon as it is connected to another
element.

Contact Point

A connection that links an emitting component to a receiving component and which

allows elements to influence one another’s behaviour. A lozenge represents these
contacts points. Contrary to connections, the colour of the lozenge is not affected by the
connection status.

Contextual menu

Standard windows menu accessible by right-click, its contents depend on the element
under the mouse cursor.

Custom Status Bar

Custom bar to add commands for a quick access.

Diagram

A drawing that graphically represents a circuit or a model using elements and

components selected from the Automation Studio™ workshop libraries. Note that only
SFC components can be placed in a SFC diagram.

Display Tools

Designates the design accessories in the Diagram Editor: grid, rulers, connections and
connection numbers. Modify how they are displayed from the View menu.

B-2
 Glossary
Document Manager

Displays the contents of one of the project editor's windows. The document manager lists
all of the documents that make up the project.

Edit Mode

A mode of operation in Automation Studio ™ during which project diagrams can be

created and modified. There is another mode of operation, the Simulation mode.

Graphic Object

An element of the Library that cannot be simulated. Graphic objects are inserted into
diagrams strictly as non-functional elements. There are four types: rectangles, ellipses,
lines, and texts.

Grid

A network of horizontal and vertical dotted lines which covers the workspace in the
Diagram Editor and on which elements of a diagram are aligned.

Group

Two or more components forming a single entity.

Library Explorer

A window containing the basic elements used for designing circuits or simulation models.

Link

A link connects components. During simulation, it is used to transfer information from

one component to another.

Link Shape

Path of a link between two points.

Mechanical Contacts

Mechanical contacts connect a sensor and a receiver making it possible for a component

© Famic Technologies Inc. B-3

Automation Studio™ – User’s Guide

to modify the behaviour of another component. They are represented by a rhombus that
appears at the point of contact. Contrary to connectors, the colour of the rhombuses is
not influenced by the state of the connection.

PLC

Logogram of Programmable Logic Controller.

Project

A group of documents forming a cohesive whole. A Project is managed by the Project

Manager.

Project Explorer

The tool used to create, modify and manage “project” files. The Project Explorer includes
the document manager that manages all the documents contained in the project.

Project Label

A brief description of the project appearing in the project summary.

Properties

Characteristics or parameters of a component. Change or view the properties by opening

the component Properties dialogue box.

Ribbon

The ribbon is a graphic user interface that appears in the upper part of the software
window: it consists of a table regrouping all the software functions, adapted to the data
context.

Rulers

Rulers are displayed at the edges of the window and indicate the unit of measurement
being used for the diagram. They serve as references for diagram size and the relative
position of elements.

B-4
 Glossary
SFC

Sequential Function Chart (SFC). A graphic representation using basic SFC components
used to represent an automatism.

Simulation Cycle

One step in the calculation that determines the state of each component.

Simulation Mode

The mode of operation in Automation Studio ™ in which a project or a diagram is

simulated. Unlike the Edit mode, the Simulation mode, when active, does not allow any
changes to the project.

Sort Key

The criteria used to classify items of the Diagram list in alphanumeric order. The sort keys
are specified in the Sort box of the Tools menu in the Project Manager. The alphanumeric
order is as follows: 0, 1, and 2..9, A, B, C..Y, Z.

Status Bar

Horizontal bar located at the bottom of all utility windows. It contains various types of
information such as error messages, zoom factor, mouse cursor coordinates, etc.

Title Bar

The horizontal bar located at the top of a window that contains the title of the window.

Toolbar

A bar located under the menu bar that contains buttons for the most frequently used
commands.

User Interface

The environment made up of windows, dialogue boxes, graphic objects, etc. thanks to
which tools the user communicates with the software.

© Famic Technologies Inc. B-5

Automation Studio™ – User’s Guide
Utility

A general designation for the different types of windows in Automation Studio ™. The
Core System contains two utilities: the Project Manager and the Diagram Editor.

Worksheet

The entire surface available in Automation Studio ™ for generating diagrams.

Workshop

A module that plugs into the Core System. Each workshop contains elements, diagrams
and functions that relate to its own technological specialty and to the type of diagram it
can generate.

Workspace

The part of the window that displays the project information such as graphs, tables, and
the item list of the application.

B-6
C Index
Properties ............................ 2-38, 2-66
Administration Tools ......................... 2-55
Property Alias ................................ 2-66
Analysis Tools Property Display ............................ 2-66
Dynamic Measuring Instruments.. 8-15 Property Format ............................ 2-66
Automation Studio™ Reference ...................................... 2-20
Exit ................................................. 2-11 Renumbering ................................. 2-52
Help ...................................... 2-10, 2-17 Select ............................................. 2-37
Online Support ............................... 2-11 Setting ........................................... 2-61
Options ........................................... 2-12 Component Accessory Manager ....... 2-54
Software Registration ................... 2-10
Component Tooltip ........................... 2-23
Bill of Materials ....................... 2-20, 6-12 Insert a hyperlink to audio file ..... 2-24
Insert .............................................. 6-13 Insert a hyperlink to file ............... 2-24
Modification ................................... 6-13 Insert a hyperlink to Picture ......... 2-24
Catalogue Manager ............... 2-19, 2-103 Insert a hyperlink to video ........... 2-24
Insert a text ................................... 2-24
Communication Variables ............... 2-103
Search
Component
Text ................................................ 2-37
Animation ...................................... 2-61
Common Properties ...................... 6-26 Connection
Connector ....................................... 2-41 Impossible ..................................... 2-29
Global Properties ........................... 6-26 Custom Component .......................... 10-1
Grid Snap ....................................... 2-21 Behaviour ...................................... 10-6
Identification ................................. 2-42 Behaviour Selection .................... 10-20
In Catalogues ................................. 2-19 Behaviour’s Free Ports ................ 10-10
In Library ........................................ 2-19 Creation Confirmation ................. 10-29
Localization .................................... 2-29 Data ............................................. 10-30
Picture Viewer ............................... 2-54 Elements ........................................ 10-1

© Famic Technologies Inc. C-1

Automation Studio™ – User’s Guide

Example ......................................... 10-1 Navigation ..................................... 2-43

Logic ............................................. 10-13 New ........................................ 2-6, 2-18
Logic Selection ............................. 10-21 Open ................................................. 2-6
Options Configuration .................. 10-27 Panning .......................................... 2-44
Ports ............................................... 10-5 Properties........................2-6, 2-38, 5-9
Ribbon ............................................ 2-27 Save ................................................. 2-6
Simulation .................................... 10-33 Save Template ................................. 2-6
Simulation Setting Configuration 10-25 Template .......................................... 5-4
Symbol ........................................... 10-2 View ............................................... 2-45
Symbol Selection ......................... 10-19 Zoom .............................................. 2-43
Variable Assignment ................... 10-32
Drawing Tools .................................... 2-22
Variables Configuration ............... 10-22
Arc .................................................. 2-22
Wizard .......................................... 10-18
Background Colour ........................ 2-32
Data Snapshot Beginning of Line .......................... 2-31
Copy ............................................... 8-11 Beginning of Line Size ................... 2-31
Cut .................................................. 8-11 Ellipse ............................................. 2-22
Delete ............................................. 8-11 End of Line ..................................... 2-31
Rename .......................................... 8-12 End of Line Size ............................. 2-31
Field................................................ 2-22
Diagnostics ........................................ 2-51
Fill Pattern...................................... 2-31
Diagram Foreground Colour ......................... 2-32
Contextual Menu ........................... 2-61 Line................................................. 2-22
Displayed Information Line Appearance ............................ 2-31
Translation ................................... 2-127 Line Colour ..................................... 2-31
Line Style ....................................... 2-31
Document ............................................ 5-1
Line Thickness................................ 2-31
Close ................................................. 2-6
Picture ............................................ 2-22
Creation ............................................ 5-2
Polygon .......................................... 2-22
Display............................................ 2-44
Polypolygone ................................. 2-22
Export ............................................... 5-5
Rectangle ....................................... 2-22
History ............................................ 2-20
Spline ............................................. 2-22
Importing ......................................... 5-4
Text ................................................ 2-22

C-2
 Glossary

Dynamic Measuring Instruments ..... 8-15 Right Alignment ............................ 2-33

Export ............................................. 8-23 Rotate 180° ................................... 2-32
Measurement Data Management 8-20 Rotate Left ..................................... 2-32
Modify Measurements .................. 8-23 Rotate Right................................... 2-32
Plotting .......................................... 8-22 Send Backward .............................. 2-36
Show/Hide Plotter ......................... 8-22 Send to Back.................................. 2-36
Top Alignment ............................... 2-33
Plotter
Vertical Flip .................................... 2-32
Delete ............................................ 8-22
Visibility ......................................... 2-36
Rename.......................................... 8-22
Width ............................................. 2-36
Edit Width and Height .......................... 2-36
Assembly ....................................... 2-36
Editor
Bottom Alignment ......................... 2-33
Automation Studio Menu ................ 2-3
Bring Forward ................................ 2-36
Clipboard ........................................ 2-28
Bring to Front................................. 2-36
Connection Ports ........................... 2-39
Center Alignment .......................... 2-33
Connection Ports Names............... 2-39
Copy Selection ............................... 2-28
Contact Points................................ 2-39
Cut Selection .................................. 2-28
Grid ...................................... 2-38, 2-39
Delete Selection ............................ 2-29
Highlighting ................................... 2-39
Display Order ................................. 6-19
Hyperlinks ...................................... 2-39
Distribute Horizontally .................. 2-33
Main Window ........................... 2-1, 2-2
Distribute Vertically ....................... 2-33
Margins Page................................. 2-39
Duplicate ........................................ 2-28
Object Deletion ............................ 6-19
Free Rotation ................................. 2-32
Object Duplication ......................... 6-18
Group ................................... 2-36, 6-20
Object Orientation ......................... 6-19
Height ............................................ 2-36
Object Relocation .......................... 6-18
Horizontal Flip ................................ 2-32
Object Selection ............................ 6-17
Layout ............................................ 2-32
Quick Access Toolbar ..................... 2-58
Left Alignment ............................... 2-33
References Names ........................ 2-38
Middle Alignment .......................... 2-33
Satellites Names ........................... 2-39
Object Transfer .............................. 6-24
Status Bar ............................ 2-46, 2-62
Paste Clipboard .............................. 2-28
Title Bar .................................... 2-1, 2-2

© Famic Technologies Inc. C-3

Automation Studio™ – User’s Guide

Tooltip ............................................ 2-39 Link

Ungroup ......................................... 6-21 Diagnostics ....................................... 6-8
Dividing ............................................ 6-6
Element
Joining Links ..................................... 6-6
Search ............................................ 6-14
Jump Setting .................................... 6-5
Extract Symbol ................................... 2-28 Layout .............................................. 6-2
Fluid Manager .................................... 2-51 Modification ..................................... 6-3
Moving ............................................ 6-4
Fluid Related Functions ..................... 2-50
Properties......................................... 6-7
Plotter
Links
Saving Data .................................... 9-45
Dedicated Functions ...................... 2-20
Graphic Object
Management
Attributes ....................................... 6-80
Floating Windows .......................... 2-63
Insertion ................................. 6-8, 6-10
Management Utilities
I/O Interface Card .............................. 11-1
Accessory Manager ....................... 2-53
Example ......................................... 11-4
Catalogue Manager ..................... 2-103
Properties Definition ..................... 11-2
Display of Pictures ....................... 2-144
Ladder Diagram ................................. 11-4 Layers Manager ........................... 2-121

Layer Manager ................................. 2-121 Library Explorer .............................. 2-67

License Information ....................... 2-55
Layers Message Explorer .......................... 2-53
Management ................................. 2-37 Message Window ........................ 2-145
Manager ......................................... 2-37 Plotter .............................................. 9-1
Simulation .................................... 2-127 Project Explorer ................... 2-53, 2-89
Library Explorer ........................ 2-19, 2-67 Project Permissions Management 2-55
Contextual Menu ........................... 2-88 Standards Management ................ 2-55
Icons ............................................... 2-61 Steady State Settings .................. 2-150
Rename .......................................... 2-62 User Accounts Management ......... 2-55
Variable Manager .............. 2-53, 2-103
Line Manager ..................................... 2-51
Manufacturers’Catalogues Download .. 2-
Line Type Manager ............................ 2-51
10

C-4
 Glossary

Mechanics .......................................... 2-51 Configuration Panel ......................... 9-7

Configuration Panel
Message Window .................. 2-54, 2-145
Curve Tab..................................... 9-7
OPC Client ........................................ 2-139 Configuration Panel
Picture Plotter Tab ................................... 9-9
Display ......................................... 2-144 Curve drawing ............................... 9-28
Insertion ......................................... 2-22 Display ........................................... 9-21
General Presentation ...................... 9-1
PLC ......................................... 11-4, 11-11
Markers .......................................... 9-19
Plotter ........................................ 2-49, 9-1 Saving data .................................... 9-30
Curves .................................. 9-28, 9-44 Scale............................................... 9-15
Selecting Curves ..........................9-45 Taking measurements .................. 9-29

Plotter y(t) ........................................... 9-5 Plotter z(x,y)

Add a variable ..................... 9-26, 9-28 Adding a Measuring Instrument ... 9-44
Annotations ................................... 9-20 Adding a variable .......................... 9-43
Configuration Panel ......................... 9-7 Annotations ................................... 9-38
Configuration Pannel Configuration Panel ....................... 9-31
Curve Tab ..................................... 9-7 Configuration Pannel
Plotter Tab ................................... 9-9 Curve Tab................................... 9-32
Cursors ........................................... 9-17 Plotter Tab ................................. 9-34
Curve drawing ............................... 9-28 Display 2D and 3D ......................... 9-40
Curves Selection ............................ 9-29 General Presentation .................... 9-31
Display ........................................... 9-21 Plotting the Curve ......................... 9-44
Markers .......................................... 9-19 Properties ...................................... 9-36
Saving data .................................... 9-30 Saving Data ................................... 9-45
Scale ............................................... 9-15 Scale............................................... 9-38
Taking Measurements ................... 9-29
Plotters y(t)
Plotter y(x) .......................................... 9-5 Access .............................................. 9-1
Access .............................................. 9-1 General Presentation ...................... 9-1
Add a variable ..................... 9-26, 9-28 Interface Overview.......................... 9-2
Annotations ................................... 9-20
Plotters y(x)

© Famic Technologies Inc. C-5

Automation Studio™ – User’s Guide

Interface Overview .......................... 9-2 Templates ........................................ 7-3

Update............................................ 7-30
Programmable Logic Controller11-1, 11-
11 Views................................................ 7-2

Project .................................................. 4-1 Revisions History ............................... 6-12

Closing ...................................... 2-4, 4-8 Search
Creation ............................................ 4-1 Component .................................... 2-37
Export ............................................... 2-8
SFC............................................ 11-4, 11-6
Management ................................... 4-1
Export ............................................... 2-8
New .................................................. 2-5
Import .............................................. 2-8
Open ......................................... 2-4, 4-1
Permissions ...................................... 2-5 Shortcuts ..................................................1
Printing ............................................. 2-7 Keyboard Shortcuts .............................1
Properties ....................... 2-5, 2-38, 4-9 Mouse Shortcuts ..................................6
Save.......................................... 2-4, 4-3 Navigation Keys ..................................5
Save As ............................................ 2-4
Simulation
Save Project Template .................... 2-4
Analysis Tools .................................. 8-6
Send by Mail .................................... 4-8
Circuit ........................................... 11-11
Send To ............................................ 2-5
Current Document ......................... 2-48
Simulation ...................................... 2-46
Data acquisition snapshot ............. 2-48
Simulation Format ........................... 4-3
Diagram ........................................... 8-3
Standards ......................................... 4-9
Diagram Selection to Simulate ....... 8-3
Template .......................................... 4-4
Disconnect a Line .......................... 2-50
Update .............................................. 2-4
Display Colour .................................. 8-2
Update Components ...................... 2-56
Document Selection ...................... 2-48
Project Explorer ....................... 2-53, 2-89 Dynamic Measuring Instruments . 2-49,
8-20
Report .................................................. 7-1
Component ................................ 2-49
Create ............................................... 7-1
Dynamic Measuring on 1 Connector 2-
Hyperlinks ...................................... 7-22 49
Report Dynamic Measuring on 2 Connectors2-
Manual Resize ........................... 7-23 49
Properties ....................................... 7-31 Error Description .............................. 8-5

C-6
 Glossary

Failure Tool .................................... 2-50 Starting the Simulation ................. 8-12

Hydraulic Tester ............................. 2-50
Standards ............................................ 4-9
Initial Conditions ............................ 2-47
3D Diagrams .................................. 4-47
Launch .............................................. 8-2
Couches.......................................... 4-47
Layers ............................................. 2-48
General Standards ......................... 4-13
Manometer .................................... 2-50
Generalities ................................... 4-28
Modes ............................................ 2-47
Label Standards ............................. 4-44
Normal Speed ................................ 2-47
Map Locator ................................... 4-32
Open Path Detection Tool ............. 2-48
Naming Rules ................................ 4-11
Pause ............................................. 2-47
Page Setup .................................... 4-29
Plotter ............................................ 2-49
Plotter and Curve Editor ................ 4-38
Power Dynamic Measuring ........... 2-49
References ..................................... 4-34
Project ............................................ 2-48
Transfer ........................................ 2-154
Reconnect Lines ............................ 2-50
Repair Tool ..................................... 2-50 Steady State Settings ..................... 2-150
Select Items to Simulate ............... 2-48 Teachware Download ....................... 2-10
Simulation Options ........................ 2-48
Template
Slow Motion .................................. 2-47
Document ........................................ 5-4
Snapshot .......................................... 8-6
Status Bar ........................................ 8-1 Text
Steady State .................................. 2-48 Align Text Center ........................... 2-30
Steady State Settings .................... 2-48 Align Text Left ............................... 2-30
Step by Step .................................. 2-47 Align Text Right ............................. 2-30
Stop ................................................ 2-47 Bold ................................................ 2-30
Thermometer ................................. 2-50 Copy Format .................................. 2-29
Troubleshooting............................. 2-50 Decrease Font Size ........................ 2-30
Font ................................................ 2-30
Sizing Sheet ....................................... 6-47
Font Colour .................................... 2-30
Snapshot Font Size ........................................ 2-30
Export ............................................. 8-13 Format ........................................... 2-30
Properties ...................................... 8-14 Increase Font Size ......................... 2-30
Saving ............................................ 8-10 Italic ............................................... 2-30

© Famic Technologies Inc. C-7

Automation Studio™ – User’s Guide

Strikethrough ................................. 2-30 Translations Manager

Underline........................................ 2-30 Reference Language ................... 2-134

Title Block Translations Manager

Automatic Field .............................. 2-22 Languages Mangement .............. 2-134

Tooltip ................................................ 2-23 Update ............................................... 2-10

Translation ....................................... 2-127 Variable

Adding .......................................... 2-110
Translation Manager ............. 2-54, 2-127
Monitoring ................................... 2-115
Translation Manager
Variable Manager .............................. 2-54
Input Language ............................ 2-134
Wizard .................................................. 3-1
Translation Manager
Common Commands ....................... 3-1
Translation Manager: ...................... 2-136 Tree Display Control ........................ 3-2

C-8